Home

WRL Research Report 90/7 1990 DECWRL/ Livermore

Contents

1. 2 3 Diffusion Diffusion is drawn in green and can be referred to in Magic as either diffusion or green It has a minimum width of 2 units and a minimum spacing of 3 units 2 4 Contacts to Metal 4 polysilicon 4 diffusion 4 E gt 4 Contacts between metal and polysilicon and between metal and diffusion have similar forms Poly metal contacts can be referred to as pme or poly_metal_contact they are drawn to look like metal running on top of poly with an X over the area of the contact Diffusion metal contacts are similar except that they look like metal run ning on top of diffusion and have names dmc and diff_metal_contact Contacts are drawn differently in Magic than they will appear in the CIF you do not draw the via hole Instead you draw the outer area of the metal pad around the contact which must 92 Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 be at least 4 units on each side Magic will fill in the appropriate via when CIF is gen erated If you draw contacts larger than 4 units on a side Magic will fill in as many 2 by 2 CIF via holes with 2 unit spacings as it can Contacts areas must be rectangular in shape contacts of the same type may not abut An additional kind of contact called glass_contact is used to generate holes in the overglass layer for use in bonding to pads This layer is drawn as gray stripes over blue and includes both
2. Table I The Magic tutorials maintenance manuals and technology manuals manuals intended for system maintainers These describe things like how to create new technologies Finally there is a set of technology manuals Each one of the technology manuals describes the features peculiar to a particular technology such as layer names and design rules Table I lists all of the Magic manuals The tutorials are designed to be read while you are running Magic so that you can try out the new commands as they are explained You needn t read all the tutorials at once each tutorial lists the other tutorials that you should read first The tutorials are not necessarily complete Each one is designed to introduce a set of facilities but it doesn t necessarily cover every possibility The ultimate authority on how Magic works is the reference manual which is a standard Unix man page The man page gives concise and complete descriptions of all the Magic commands Once you have a general idea how a command works the man page is probably easier to consult than the tutorial However the man page may not make much sense until after you ve read the tutorial A third way of getting help is available on line through Magic itself The help command will print out one line for each Magic command giving the command s syntax and an extremely brief description of the command This facility is useful if you ve for gotten the name or exact syntax o
3. X 2 Polysilicon gos Buried contacts go by the names be and buried_contact They are drawn in a brownish color the same as transistors except with solid black squares over their area As with other contacts you draw just the area where the two connecting materials poly and diffusion overlap Magic will generate the CIF buried window which is actually larger than the overlap area Buried contacts come in two forms The normal form is 2 units on a side and no poly or diffusion overhang is required The second form is used only next to depletion transistors and is a 3 by 2 structure abutting the depletion transis tor This form is a little controversial since it results in larger than normal variations in the size of the depletion transistor As a consequence Magic reports design rule viola tions wherever buried contacts abut depletion transistors less than 4 units long In butting bc dfet structure you should measure the transistor length from the bc dfet boundary WARNING there is one additional rule for buried contacts that is NOT enforced by Magic Where diffusion enters a buried contact there must be no unrelated polysili con for 3 units on that side of the buried contact This rule is necessary because the buried window extends outward from the buried contact by one unit on the diffusion side and polysilicon must be far enough away to avoid shorting to the diffusion through the buried window
4. channel in the layout window Magic will compute the channel structure and display it on the screen as a collection of feedback areas The channel structure is displayed as white rec tangles Type feedback clear when you re through looking at them The second phase of routing is global routing In the global routing phase Magic considers each net in turn and chooses the sequence of channels the net must pass through in order to connect its terminals The crossing points places where the net crosses from one channel to another are chosen at this point but not the exact path through each channel 10 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 In the third phase each channel is considered separately All the nets passing through that channel are examined at once and the exact path of each net is decided Once the routing paths have been determined paint is added to the edit cell to implement the routing The router is grid based all wires are placed on a uniform grid For the standard nMOS process the grid spacing is 7 units and for the standard SCMOS process it is 8 units If you type grid 8 after routing tut7b you ll see that all of the routing lines up with its lower and left sides on grid lines Fortunately you don t have to make your cell terminals line up on even grid boundaries During the routing Magic generates stems that connect your terminals up to grid lines at the edges of channels Notice th
5. like gt Each long command consists of the name of the command followed by arguments if any are needed by that command The command name can be abbreviated just as long as you type enough characters to distinguish it from all other long commands For exam ple h and he may be used as abbreviations for help On the other hand u may not be used as an abbreviation for undo because there is another command upsidedown that has the same abbreviation Try typing u As an example of a long command put the box over empty space on the color display then invoke the long command Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 paint red The box should fill with the red color just as if you had used the middle mouse button to paint it Everything you can do in Magic can be invoked with a long command It turns out that the macros are just conveniences that are expanded into long commands and exe cuted For example the long command equivalent to the g macro is grid Magic permits you to define new macros if you wish Once you ve become familiar with Magic you ll almost certainly want to add your own macros so that you can invoke quickly the commands you use most frequently See the magic man page under the command macro One more long command is of immediate use to you It is quit Invoke this command Note that before exiting Magic will give you one last chance to save the information that you ve modified
6. The first range is for x and the second for y The subscripts for a given dimension are Jo through hi inclusive and the separation between adjacent array elements is sep centimicrons TRANSFORM is a set of six integers that describe how coordinates in def are to be transformed to coordinates in the parent name It is used by ext2sim 1 in transforming transistor locations to coordinates in the root of a design The six integers of TRANSFORM ta tb tc td te tf are inter preted as components in the following transformation matrix by which all coordinates in def are post multiplied to get coordinates in name ta td 0 tb te 0 tc of 1 merge path path2 C al pl a2 p2 aN pN Used to specify a connection between two subcells or between a subcell and mask information of name Both path and path2 are hierarchical node names To refer to a node in cell name itself its pathname is just its node name To refer to a node in a subcell of name its pathname consists of the use id of the subcell as it appeared in a use line above followed by a slash followed by the node name in the subcell For example if name contains subcell sub with use identifier sub id and sub contains node n the full pathname of node n relative to name will be sub id n Connections between adjacent elements of an array are represented using a special syntax that takes advan tage of the regularity of arrays A use id in a path may optionally be followed by a range o
7. allPoly active 3 pc active allPoly active 3 allPoly active 1 m2c metal2 allPoly active 1 Table 12d Some edge rules in the dre section Normally an edge rule is checked completely within a single plane both the edge that triggers the rule and the constraint area to check fall in the same plane However the plane argument can be specified in an edge rule to force Magic to perform the con straint check on a plane different from the one containing the triggering edge In this case OKTypes must all be tile types in plane This feature is used for example to ensure that polysilicon and diffusion edges don t lie underneath metal2 contacts 30 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 edge4way allPoly allPoly active 1 m2c metal2 allPoly active 1 Via must be on a flat surface MOSIS rule 8 4 5 metal2 11 4 Overlap Rules In order for CIF generation and circuit extraction to work properly certain kinds of overlaps between subcells must be prohibited The design rule checker provides two kinds of rules for restricting overlaps They are exact_overlap type list no_overlap type list type list2 In the exact_overlap rule type list indicates one or more tile types If a cell contains a tile of one of these types and that tile is overlapped by another tile of the same type from a different cell then the overlap must be exact the tile in each cell must cover exact
8. 11 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 while we can t construct depletion fet by painting poly and then diffusion we d still like it to behave as though it contained both materials Painting poly or diffusion over a depletion fet should not change it and erasing either poly or diffusion should give the other These semantics are the result of the following rule decompose dfet poly diff The general syntax of both types of composition rules compose and decompose is compose type al bl a2b2 decompose type al bl a2 b2 The idea is that each of the pairs al b1 a2 b2 etc comprise type In the case of a com pose rule painting any a atop its corresponding b will give type as well as vice versa In both compose and decompose rules erasing a from type gives b erasing b from type gives a and painting either a or b over type leaves type unchanged Contacts are implicitly composed of their component types so the result obtained when painting a type PAINT over a contact type CONTACT will by default depend only on the component types of CONTACT If painting PAINT doesn t affect the component types of the contact then it is considered not to affect the contact itself either If painting PAINT does affect any of the component types then the result is as though the contact had been replaced by its component types in the layout before type PAINT was painted Similar rules hold for erasing A
9. An important predefined Rect is GeoNullRect the rectangle with both its lower left and upper right at the origin 0 0 If linked lists of Rects are needed the LinkedRect primitive can be used Another primitive is a position relative to a point GEO_NORTH GEO_EAST etc There are a total of nine positions corresponding to the eight points around a single point in a grid plus the point itself GEO_CENTER The final primitive is a Transform which represents some combination of rotation by a multiple of 90 degrees mirroring across the x or y axis scaling by an integer scale factor and translation by an integer x and y displacement A Transform can be thought of as representing a simple linear transformation on two dimensional points or as a matrix of the form a d 0 b e 0 c f 1 Multiplying a point vector of the form x y 0 by this transform gives a transformed point x y 0 Although the transform matrix has nine elements the three on the right hand are always constant so only six numbers are needed to describe a transform four for the rotation a b d e and two for the translation c f Because the only rotations are multiples of 90 degrees transforms will always be of one of the fol lowing even more specific forms only the four rotation numbers are shown where S is the integer scale factor S 0 0 5S S 0 0 S 0 S S 0 0 S S 0 S 0 0 6S S 0 0 S 0 S S 0 0 S S 0 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 GEOMETR
10. Don Stark Gordon T Hamachi WRL Research Report 90 7 September 1990 WRL Technical Notes TCP IP PrintServer Print Server Protocol Brian K Reid and Christopher A Kent WRL Technical Note TN 4 September 1988 TCP IP PrintServer Server Architecture and Implementation Christopher A Kent WRL Technical Note TN 7 November 1988 Smart Code Stupid Memory A Fast X Server for a Dumb Color Frame Buffer Joel McCormack WRL Technical Note TN 9 September 1989 Why Aren t Operating Systems Getting Faster As Fast As Hardware John Ousterhout WRL Technical Note TN 11 October 1989 Mostly Copying Garbage Collection Picks Up Generations and C Joel F Bartlett WRL Technical Note TN 12 October 1989
11. cate colors in such a way that Magic can never get the 7 color planes that it wants When this happens Magic instead allo cates 128 colors This is better than nothing but not by much strange colors often result when layers overlap 4 Acknowledgments Many people share the credit and the blame for the Magic X drivers The original X10 port was done by Mark Linton and Doug Pan at Stanford University Walter Scott and Eric Lunow of Lawrence Livermore National Laboratories modified the driver and the windows module so that magic windows act like normal X windows Meanwhile Dave Durfee and Markus G Wloka of Brown University improved the reliability of the Stanford X10 driver and added support for a variable number of planes Marco Papa of USC converted the Brown X10 driver to X11 Concurrently someone at the University of Washington converted the Stanford X10 driver to X11 The X11 driver in this distribu tion is predominantly a merge of the UW driver with the multiwindow features of the LLNL driver Some of the ideas for supporting differing plane counts were borrowed from the USC Brown work Thanks to the Digital Equipment Corporation Western Magic Maintainer s Manual 4 September 19 1990 Research Laboratory DECWRL for use of their computer facilities and to Mike Chow of Apple Computer for the Macintosh II specific changes Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and C
12. s Manual DQUEUE 3 Although DQPushFront and DQPushRear take care of increasing the space for a queue automatically sometimes it is desirable to change the size of a queue explicitly This can be done with DOChangeSize which changes the size of the DQueue q to newSize as long as newSize is at least as great as the number of entries already in the queue If there are more than newSize entries in the queue nothing happens One DQueue may be copied to another by DQCopy which copies the DQueue src to the DQueue dst Finally to check whether a queue q is empty one may call DQ sEmpty which returns TRUE non zero if the queue is empty or FALSE zero if it contains any elements BUGS Using NULL to indicate end of queue in DQPopFront and DQPopRear is of marginal usefulness Callers should stick to using DQJsEmpty unless they are certain not to have pushed any zero elements on the queue SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXTFLAT 3 CAD Tool User s Manual NAME extflat procedures in libextflat a for flattening extractor ext files SYNOPSIS include hash h include extflat h typedef struct hiername HierName typedef struct efnn EFNodeName typedef struct efnhdr EFNodeHdr typedef struct efnode EFNode typedef struct fet Fet EFInit EFDone char EFArgs argc argv argsProc cdata int argc char argv Void argsProc pargc pargv cdata Cli
13. s Manual MAGIC 1 in bright colors and non edit cells are in paler colors After see allSame all mask infor mation will be displayed in bright colors see no allSame Reenable the facility where non edit cells are drawn in paler colors select option This command is used to select paint labels and subcells before operating on them with com mands like move and copy and delete It has several forms select If the cursor is over empty space then this command is identical to select cell Other wise paint is selected The first time the command is invoked a chunk of paint is selected the largest rectangular area of material of the same type visible underneath the cursor If the command is invoked again without moving the cursor the selection is extended to include all material of the same type regardless of shape If the command is invoked a third time the selection is extended again to include all material that is visible and electrically connected to the point underneath the cursor select more This command is identical to select except that the selection is not first cleared The result is to add the newly selected material to what is already in the selection select less This chooses material just as select does but the material is removed from the selection rather than added to it The result is to deselect the chosen material select more less area layers Select material by area If layers are not specified then all
14. t turned back into contact The circuit that is read in is functionally identical to the original circuit even though the Magic contact appears slightly smaller There is an additional problem with generating CIF having to do with the cell hierarchy When Magic generates CIF it performs geometric operations such as srow and shrink on the mask layers Some of these operations are not guaranteed to work perfectly on hierarchical designs Magic detects when there are problems and creates feedback areas to mark the trouble spots When you write CIF Magic will warn you that there were troubles These should almost never happen if you generate CIF from designs that don t have any design rule errors If they do occur you can get around them by writing cif with the following command cif flat fileName This command creates an internal version of the design with hierarchy removed before outputing CIF as in cif write An alternative approach that does not require flattening is to modify the technology file in use Read Magic Maintainers Manual 2 The Tech nology File if you want to try this approach Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router Michael Arnold O Division Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory Livermore CA 94550 This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 and Irouter version 0 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selec
15. Each subsection is preceded by a line of the form 40 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 plot style gremlin poly efet dfet bc pcontact active 18 diff efet dfet bc ndc active 22 metal ndc metal1 pcontact metal1 11 pcontact metal1 ndc metal1 bc style versatec poly efet dfet bc pcontact active 0808 0404 0202 0101 8080 4040 2020 1010 0808 0404 0202 0101 8080 4040 2020 1010 diff efet dfet bc ndc active 0000 4242 6666 0000 0000 2424 6666 0000 0000 4242 6666 0000 0000 2424 6666 0000 metal ndc metal1 pcontact metal1 8080 0000 0000 0000 0808 0000 0000 0000 8080 0000 0000 0000 0808 0000 0000 0000 pcontact metal1 ndc metal1 bc X style colorversatec poly efet dfet bc pcontact active magenta 0808 0404 0202 0101 8080 4040 2020 1010 0808 0404 0202 0101 8080 4040 2020 1010 diff efet dfet bc ndc active yellow 0000 4242 6666 0000 0000 2424 6666 0000 0000 4242 6666 0000 0000 2424 6666 0000 metall ndc metal1 pcontact metall cyan 8080 0000 0000 0000 0808 0000 0000 0000 8080 0000 0000 0000 0808 0000 0000 0000 pcontact metal1 ndc metal1 bc X end Table 17 Sample plot section for an NMOS process style styleName Right now only gremlin versatec and colorversatec styles are supported Within the gremlin subsection lines must have one of three forms 41 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 type list stippl
16. TxError which is like fprintf stderr fmt args where args can be zero or more arguments just as in fprintf 3 and finally TxGetLine which is like fgets buf len stdin The library versions of these procedures only get pulled in if you haven t defined them yourself Versions exist of both libraries with profiling pg enabled these are libmagicutils_p a and libmagictrace_p a SEE ALSO magic 1 dqueue 3 geometry 3 hash 3 heap 3 list 3 malloc 3 path 3 runstats 3 set 3 show 3 stack 3 string 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MALLOC 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MALLOC 3 NAME mallocMagic freeMagic a new memory allocator in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include magic h include malloc h char mallocMagic size unsigned size char callocMagic size unsigned size MALLOC type_decl var size type_decl var unsigned size CALLOC type_decl var size type_decl var unsigned size freeMagic var char var FREE var char var cc DMALLOCTRACE cad src magic lib libmagictrace a mallocTracelInit filename char filename mallocTraceEnable mallocTraceDisable mallocTraceDone mallocTraceOnly Watched only bool only bool mallocTraceWatch addr char addr bool mallocTraceUnWatch addr char addr DESCRIPTION These procedures implement a new memory allocator They provide fast allocation and freeing for pro grams that allocate thousands or millions of objects
17. Vdmpce color bitmap files are processed by the vdmpce filter which comes with the Magic VLSI layout edi tor from Berkeley A vdmpce file consists of 5 parts a 1024 byte header and four bitmaps one for each of the following colors in order black cyan magenta and yellow This format is inspired by the 3000 series Versatec color plotters The 1024 byte header starts with a 1 word magic number OxASCF4DFB Thus the first 4 bytes of the file are Ox4D OxFB 0xA5 OxCF The second word four bytes contain the length of the bitmap in pixels The third word gives the width of the bitmap The width must be a multiple of 8 It does not have to match the physical width of the plotter as it will be clipped or padded as needed The remaining words of the header are currently unused and should be set to zero The rest of the file contains the bitmaps There are no separation or formatting characters between the bit maps they follow immediately after the header block and are packed back to back Each bitmap is of size width height bits where width and height are defined in the header Each bitmap consists of a sequence of bits packed into bytes The bits are ordered from the top left of the image moving towards the top right After a complete scan line is represented this way the data for the next lower scan line is represented Bits are packed into bytes such that the leftmost bit on the physical device is placed into the high order bit position o
18. Xsize specifies how many total instances there should be in the x direction when the command is finished and ysize specifies how many total instances there should be in the y direction In the tut3c example xsize was one so no additional copies were created in that direc tion ysize was 10 so 9 additional copies were created The box is used to determine how far apart the elements should be the width of the box determines the x spacing and the height determines the y spacing The new material always appears above and to the right of the original copy In tut3c use corner to extend the purple wires and turn them up Then paint a contact back to blue on the leftmost wire add a stub of blue paint above it and use sarray to copy them across the top of the bundle Finally use fill again to extend the blue bundle farther up 3 Plowing Magic contains a facility called plowing that you can use to stretch and compact cells The basic plowing command has the syntax plow direction layers where direction is a Manhattan direction like left and layers is an optional comma separated list of mask layers The plow command treats one side of the box as if it were a plow and shoves the plow over to the other side of the box For example plow up 5 Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 treats the bottom side of the box as a plow and moves the plow to the top of the box As the plow moves every edge in its path is
19. all the specific actions are managed by clients such as database or netmenu This module implements a whole bunch of utility procedures including a geometry package for dealing with rectangles and points and transformations a heap package a hash table pack age a stack package a revised memory allocator and lots of other stuff This is the overall window manager It keeps track of windows and calls clients like dbwind and cmwind to process window specific operations such as redisplaying or processing commands Commands that are valid in all windows such as resizing or moving windows are implemented here Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 wiring The files in this directory implement the wire command There are routines to select wiring material add wire legs and place contacts 6 Portability Issues Magic runs on a variety of machines Running make config in the top level source directory sets the compiletime options If you are porting Magic you should modify the configuration section at the end of file misc magic h to suit your machine by testing compiler flags No changes should be made that would hamper Magic s opera tion on other machines 7 Compilation Switches Over the years Magic has acquired a number of compilation switches While it s undesirable to have so many it seems unavoidable since people use Magic on such a wide variety of machines The file cad
20. and what happened instead If possible send along small files that we can use to reproduce the bug A list of known bugs and fixes is also available from the above address Magic will not run under the Bourne shell but we don t know why 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 28 MAGICUSAGE 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGICUSAGE 1 NAME magicusage print the names of all cells and files used in a Magic design SYNOPSIS magicusage T technology p path rootcell DESCRIPTION Magicusage will print the names of all cells and files used in the design whose root cell is rootcell Each line of the output is of the form cellname filename where cellname is the name of the cell as it is used and filename is the mag file containing the cell If a cell is not found a line of the form cellname lt lt not found gt gt is output instead If p path is specified the search path used to find mag files will be path Otherwise the search path is initialized by first reading the system wide magic file in cad lib magic sys then the magic file in the user s home directory and finally the magic file in the current directory The most recent path command read from the three files determines the search path used to find cells In addition a library path of cad lib magic techname is used when searching for cells By default tech name is the technology of the first cell read but it may be overridden by specifying a
21. changed it is tested carefully without re installing it and is only re installed when it is in good condition Note that installed doesn t mean that Magic users see the module it only means that other Magic maintainers will see it Each of the makefiles invokes the script instclean to do the module installation This optionally will copy files to the installed directory By keeping modules separate it s possible for several maintainers to work at once as long as they are modifying different source subdirectories Each maintainer works with the uninstalled version of a module and links that with the installed versions of all other modules Thus for example one maintainer can modify database DBcell c and another can modify dbwind DBWundo c at the same time Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 4 Making Magic The top level Makefile cad src magic Makefile provides many options Before using the Makefile be sure to set your CAD_HOME shell environment variable to the location of your top level cad directory if it is not the standard cad The most useful Makefile options are make config Configure the Magic system for a particular type of display or operating system This just runs the config shell script to set up a couple of files The curious may examine the script directly If your configuration isn t handled by this script then you can use it simply as a guide as to wh
22. click the middle button over the caption of the window The window will now fill the entire screen Click in the caption again and the window will shrink back to its former size 2 3 Shuffling Windows By now you know how to open close and resize windows This is sufficient for most purposes but sometimes you want to look at a window that is covered up by another window The underneath and over commands help with this The underneath command moves the window that you are pointing at underneath all of the other windows The over command moves the window on top of the rest Create a few windows that overlap and then use these commands to move them around You ll see that overlapping windows behave just like sheets of paper the ones on top obscure portions of the ones underneath 2 4 Scrolling Windows Some of the windows have thick bars on the left and bottom borders These are called scroll bars and the slugs within them are called elevators The size and position of an elevator indicates how much of the layout or whatever is in the window is currently visible If an elevator fills its scroll bar then all of the layout is visible in that window If an elevator fills only a portion of the scroll bar then only that portion of the layout is visible The position of the elevator indicates which part is visible if it is near the bottom you are viewing the bottom part of the layout if it is near the top you are viewing the top part
23. deducted for the area of the overlap and replaced by a capacitance to the node of the tile in bottomtypes If shieldtypes are specified overlaps between toptypes and bottomtypes that also overlap a type in shieldtypes are not counted The types in shieldtypes must appear on a different plane or planes than any of the types in toptypes or bottomtypes Parallel wire capacitance is between pairs of edges and is described by the sidewall keyword 35 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 metal sidewall metal T overlap sidewall overlap oxide poly Figure 10 Magic extracts three kinds of internodal coupling capacitance This figure is a side view of a set of masks that shows all three kinds of capacitance Overlap capacitance is parallel plate capacitance between two different kinds of material when they overlap Parallel wire capacitance is fringing field capacitance between the parallel vertical edges of two pieces of material Sidewall overlap capacitance is fringing field capacitance between the vertical edge of one piece of material and the horizontal surface of another piece of ma terial that overlaps the vertical edge tfar fartypes neartypes outtypes intypes tinside Figure 11 Parallel wire capacitance is between pairs of edges The capacitance applies between the tiles tinside and tfar above where tinside s type is one of intypes and tfar
24. dre off From this point on the checker will not run Magic will record the areas that need rechecking but won t do the rechecks If you save your file and quit Magic the informa tion about areas to recheck will be saved on disk The next time you read in the cell Magic will recheck those areas unless you ve still got the checker turned off There is nothing you can do to make Magic forget about areas to recheck dre off merely post pones the recheck operation to a later time Once you ve turned the checker off you have two ways to make sure everything has been rechecked The first is to type the command dre catchup Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking September 19 1990 This command will run the checker and wait until everything has been rechecked and errors are completely up to date When the command completes the checker will still be enabled or disabled just as it was before the command If you get tired of waiting for dre catchup you can always hit the interrupt key to abort the command the recheck areas will be remembered for later To turn the checker back on permanently invoke the command dre on 5 Porting Layouts from Other Systems You should not need to read this section if you ve created your layout from scratch using Magic or have read it from CIF using Magic s CIF or Calma reader However if you are bringing into Magic a layout that was created using a different editor or an old version of Magic
25. extresis Extraction of well connectivity and substrate nodes Checking for global net connectedness in ext2sim 1 New programs ext2spice 1 and extcheck 1 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 1 Introduction This tutorial covers the use of Magic s circuit extractor The extractor computes from the layout the information needed to run simulation tools such as crystal 1 and esim 1 This information includes the sizes and shapes of transistors and the connec tivity resistance and parasitic capacitance of nodes Both capacitance to substrate and several kinds of internodal coupling capacitances are extracted Magic s extractor is both incremental and hierarchical only part of the entire layout must be re extracted after each change and the structure of the extracted circuit parallels the structure of the layout being extracted The extractor produces a separate ext file for each mag file in a hierarchical design This is in contrast to previous extractors such as Mextra which produces a single sim file that represents the flattened fully instantiated layout Sections 2 through 4 introduce Magic s extract command and some of its more advanced features Section 5 describes what information actually gets extracted and discusses limitations and inaccuracies Section 6 talks about extraction styles Although the hierarchical ext 5 format fully describes the circuit implemented by a layout very few tool
26. newPixel oldPixel amp writeMask color amp writeMask The red green and blue intensities displayed for each pixel are not deterimined directly by the value of the pixel they come from a color map that maps the eight bit pixel values into red green and blue intensities Color maps are stored in separate files outline If this field is zero then no outline is drawn If the field is non zero it specifies that outlines are to be drawn around the rectangular areas rendered in this style and the octal value gives an eight bit pattern telling how to draw the outline For example 377 means to draw a solid line 252 means to draw a dotted line 360 specifies long dashes etc This field only indicates which pixels will be modified the writeMask and color fields indicate how the pixels are modified fill This is a text string specifying how the areas drawn in this style should be filled It must have one of the values solid stipple cross outline grid Solid means that every pixel in the area is to modified according to writeMask and color Stipple means that the area should be stippled the stipple pattern given by stipple is used to determine which pixels in the area are to be modified Cross means that an X is drawn in a solid line between the diagonally opposite corners of the area being rendered Outline means that the area should not be filled at all only an outline is drawn if specified by outline Grid is a special style used to d
27. selects the new material just as if you had placed the cursor over it and typed s This makes it easy for you to adjust its position if you didn t get it right initially The stretch command is particularly useful for this In tut3a paint a wire leg in blue from 5 to 6 use flush to reset the cell if you ve made a lot of changes Now type R two or three times to stretch the leg over to the right Middle click over purple material then use W to stretch the contact downward It s often hard to position the cursor so that a wire leg comes out right the first time but it s usually easy to tell whether the leg is right once it s painted If it s wrong then you can use the stretching commands to shift it over one unit at a time until it s correct 2 6 Bundles of Wires Magic provides two additional commands that are useful for running bundles of parallel wires The commands are fill direction layers corner direction direction2 layers To see how they work load the cell tut3b The fill comand extends a whole bunch of 4 Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 paint in a given direction It finds all paint touching one side of the box and extends that paint to the opposite side of the box For example fill left will look underneath the right edge of the box for paint and will extend that paint to the left side of the box The effect is just as if all the colors visible underneath that edge of the b
28. text display Normally Magic is run under a window system such as X11 preferred or Sun Tools The command line switch d can be used to tell Magic which kind of window system you are running although Magic is pretty good at guessing When using serial line terminals the d g and i switches can be used and the file cad lib displays should be created by the system administrator see DISPLAYS 5 manual page Here are the options accepted by Magic T The next argument is the name of a technology The tile types display information and design rules for this technology are read by Magic from a technology file when it starts up The technol ogy defaults to scmos d The next argument is the type of workstation or graphics display being used Magic supports these types NULL A null device for running Magic without using a graphics display X11 X windows version 11 release 3 The is the preferred interface Magic acts as a client to the X window server and interfaces to all graphics terminals supported by the X server The window manager must be configured to pass mouse buttons without interpretation to clients It is recommended that the meta key be used with mouse buttons to communi cate requests to the window manager Standard window manager commands manipulate Magic windows Addition information on Magic s X11 driver including options for Xdefaults files may be found in Magic Maintainer s Man
29. the grid has a one unit spacing Typing grid with no arguments will toggle the grid on and off If a single numerical argument is given the grid will be turned on and the grid lines will be spacing units apart The macro g provides a short form for grid and G is short for grid 2 If you provide two arguments to grid they are the x and y spacings which may be different If you 9 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 provide four arguments the last two specify a reference point through which horizontal and vertical grid lines pass the default is to use 0 0 as the grid origin The command grid off always turns the grid off regardless of whether or not is was previously on When the grid is on a small black box is displayed to mark the 0 0 coordinate of the cell you re editing If you want to create a cell that doesn t fit on the screen you ll need to know how to change the screen view This can be done with three commands zoom factor findbox zoom view If factor is given to the zoom command it is a zoom out factor For example the com mand zoom 2 will change the view so that there are twice as many units across the screen as there used to be Z is a macro for this The new view will have the same center as the old one The command zoom 5 will increase the magnification so that only half as much of the circuit is visible The findbox command is used to change the view accord
30. 6 1 Magic Tutorial 1 6 2 Magic Tutorial 2 6 3 Magic Tutorial 3 6 4 Magic Tutorial 4 6 5 Magic Tutorial 5 6 6 Magic Tutorial 6 6 7 Magic Tutorial 7 6 8 Magic Tutorial 8 6 9 Magic Tutorial 9 Table of Contents Overview Manual Pages Manual Pages Manual Pages Manual Pages Tutorials Section 1 Programs Section 3 Libraries Section 5 File Formats Section 8 System Maintenance Getting Started Basic Painting and Selection Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing Cell Heirarchies Multiple Windows Design Rule Checking Netlists and Routing Circuit Extraction Format Conversion for CIF and Calma 6 10 Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router 6 11 Magic Tutorial 11 Using RSIM with Magic CHAPTER7 Maintainer s Manuals 7 1 Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers 7 1 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File 7 1 Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 The Display Style and Glyph Files 7 1 Magic Maintainer s Manual 4 Using Magic under X Windows CHAPTER 8 Technology Manuals 8 1 Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS 8 1 Magic Technology Manual 2 SCMOS APPENDIX A Other Reports In This Series Overview of the DECWRL Livermore Magic Release This document corresponds to Magic version 6 1 Introduction This version of Magic version 6 gathers together work done by numerous people at several institutions since Magic version 4 was released from Berkeley on the 1
31. HeapInit h initsize descending stringids Heap h int initsize bool descending stringids HeapKill h func Heap h int func h index HeapFreeIdFunc h index Heap h int index HeapEntry HeapRemoveTop h entry Heap h HeapEntry entry HeapAdd h key id Heap h int key char id DESCRIPTION These procedures create manipulate and destroy heaps A heap is essentially an array that automatically sorts itself when items are added to it The items added to the heap consist of an integer key and a one word datum which can either be the address of a NULL terminated string treated specially or any other one word data item Heaps can be sorted in either ascending or descending order The data storage for a heap automatically grows as more elements are added to the heap The HeapEntry structure identifies the integer key value he_key on which the element is sorted and a one word datum he_id Heaps are created by HeapInit which initializes the data storage for h Enough space is left initially for initsize elements although the heap will grow automatically as more elements are added If descending is TRUE the largest element in the heap will be removed first otherwise the smal lest element will be the first to be removed by HeapRemoveTop Each heap entry has an associated datum or id if stringids is TRUE these are considered to be ASCII strings and handled specially by HeapAdd and HeapKill Heap
32. Jeffrey C Mogul Richard F Rashid Michael J Accetta WRL Research Report 87 2 November 1987 Fragmentation Considered Harmful Christopher A Kent Jeffrey C Mogul WRL Research Report 87 3 December 1987 Cache Coherence in Distributed Systems Christopher A Kent WRL Research Report 87 4 December 1987 Register Windows vs Register Allocation David W Wall WRL Research Report 87 5 December 1987 Editing Graphical Objects Using Procedural Representations Paul J Asente WRL Research Report 87 6 November 1987 The USENET Cookbook an Experiment in Electronic Publication Brian K Reid WRL Research Report 87 7 December 1987 MultiTitan Four Architecture Papers Norman P Jouppi Jeremy Dion David Boggs Mich ael J K Nielsen WRL Research Report 87 8 April 1988 Fast Printed Circuit Board Routing Jeremy Dion WRL Research Report 88 1 March 1988 Compacting Garbage Collection with Ambiguous Roots Joel F Bartlett WRL Research Report 88 2 February 1988 The Experimental Literature of The Internet An Annotated Bibliography Jeffrey C Mogul WRL Research Report 88 3 August 1988 Measured Capacity of an Ethernet Myths and Reality David R Boggs Jeffrey C Mogul Christopher A Kent WRL Research Report 88 4 September 1988 Visa Protocols for Controlling Inter Organizati
33. Magic is more stable now this copying is no longer needed Instead each makefile invokes the script instclean after installing a module This script by default doesn t copy the source code but does leave the o files around This cuts down on the disk space needed by a factor of two You can change the script if you want the copying or if you want to delete unused o files to save even more disk space Lots of bug fixes Various Lots of bugs have been fixed in this release We d like to thank every body that has reported bugs in the past If you find a new bug please report it S92 Overview of DECWRL Livermore Magic September 19 1990 as mentioned below 2 Distribution Information This version of Magic is available via FTP Contact magic decwrl dec com for infor mation For a handling fee this version of Magic may be obtained on magnetic tape from EECS ERL Industrial Liaison Program 479 Cory Hall University of California at Berkeley Berkeley CA 94720 3 Bug Reports Maintenance of Magic is a volunteer effort Please send descriptions of bugs via InterNet e mail to magic decwrl dec com or via Uucp e mail to decwrl magic If you develop a fix for the problem please send that too 4 Changes for Magic maintainers Previous releases of Magic expected to find their system files in the home directory of the user cad The default behavior of version 6 is no different but it is possible to put the files
34. Single word can be interpreted e g compared or hashed by user supplied procedures Each entry stores a single word value which may be set or read by the macros HashSetValue or HashGetValue but should not be manipulated directly HashInit is used to allocate space for the initially empty hash table table Enough space is allocated for initsize buckets which should be a power of two although subsequent additions to the hash table can cause the number of buckets to increase Tables can be organized in one of three different ways depend ing on the value of keysize 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 HASH 3 CAD Tool User s Manual HASH 3 If keysize is HT_STRINGKEYS then keys passed to HashFind or HashLookOnly are treated as the addresses of NULL terminated strings The HashEntry structures for this type of key are variable sized sufficient space is allocated at the end of each structure to hold the key string and its trailing NULL byte If keysize is HT_WORDKEYS then keys are single words of data passed directly to HashFind and are compared using strcmp 1 If keysize is HT_STRUCTKEYS or greater keys are multiple words of data but their address is passed to HashFind instead of the actual value as when keysize was HT_WORDKEYS The value of keysize in this case should be the number of words in a key The macro HashSize should be used to produce this number HashSize sizeof struct foo gives the number of words needed if keys are to be
35. The network for this node is output to the file cell res ext See the description for extresist for an explanation of tolerance route option args This command with no option or arg is used to generate routing using the Magic router in the edit cell to make connections specified in the current netlist The box is used to indicate the rout ing area no routing will be placed outside the area of the box The new wires are placed in the edit cell Options and args have the following effects 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 17 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 route end real Print the value of the channel end constant used by the channel router If a value is sup plied the channel end constant is set to that value The channel end constant is a dimen sionless multiplier used to compute how far from the end of a channel to begin prepara tions to make end connections route help Print a short synopsis of all the route command options route jog int Print the value of the minimum jog length used by the channel router If a value is sup plied the minimum jog length is set to that value The channel router makes no vertical jogs shorter than the minimum jog length measured in router grid units Higher values for this constant may improve the quality of the routing by removing unnecessary jogs however prohibiting short jogs may make some channels unroutable route metal Toggle metal maximization on or off The
36. Type y to exit without saving anything Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Commands introduced in this tutorial box clockwise copy erase findbox grid label layers macro move paint redo save select sideways undo upsidedown view what writeall zoom Macros introduced in this tutorial a A c d D e E g G q Q r R s S t T u U v w W z Z 4 1 Cells and Paint In Magic a circuit layout is a hierarchical collection of cells Each cell contains three things colored shapes called paint that define the circuit s structure textual labels attached to the paint and subcells which are instances of other cells The paint is what determines the eventual function of the VLSI circuit Labels and subcells are a conveni ence for you in managing the layout and provide a way of communicating information between various synthesis and analysis tools This tutorial explains how to create and edit paint and labels in simple single cell designs using the basic painting commands Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing describes some more advanced features for manipulating paint For inform
37. User s Manual MAGICUTILS 3 NAME magicutils collection of utility procedures in Imagicutils SYNOPSIS cc I cad sre magic include cad sre magic lib libmagicutils a cc I cad sre magic include cad srce magic lib libmagictrace a cc I cad src magic include pg cad srce magic lib ibmagicutils_p a cc I cad srce magic include pg cad srce magic lib libmagictrace_p a replace cad with the home directory of the user cad MainExit code int code TxError fmt va_alist char fmt va_dcl char TxGetLine buf len char buf int len DESCRIPTION The two libraries libmagicutils a and libmagictrace a include all of the procedures from the utils module used internally by the Magic layout system The first library is for normal use the second library is for use with the tracing option of the new memory allocator See the documentation on the individual pieces of the library for details of the procedures they contain To use these libraries you should compile your programs with the flag I cad src magic include to search the Magic include directory for needed h files The documentation for the various pieces of the libraries lists which h files are needed for which procedures Three default procedures are defined for the library but can be replaced by your own procedures if you so wish The procedures are MainExit which has the same semantics as exit 3 but can be replaced by your own procedure by that name to do additional cleanup
38. X value two succes sive argument strings in the argument list pargc pargv incrementing pargc and pargv by an amount sufficient to step over the flag value pair If there are no more arguments remaining in the list ArgStr prints an error message complaining that argType is required for the flag pargv O SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 CMAP 5 CAD Tool User s Manual CMAP 5 NAME cmap format of cmap files color maps DESCRIPTION Color map files define the mapping between eight bit color numbers and red green and blue intensities used for those numbers They are read by Magic as part of system startup and also by the load and save commands in color map windows Color map file names usually have the form x y z cmapn where x is a class of technology files y is a class of displays z is a class of monitors and n is a version number currently 1 The version number will change in the future if the formap of color map files ever changes Normally x and y correspond to the corresponding parts of a display styles file For example the color map file mos 7bit std cmap1 is used today for most nMOS and CMOS technology files using displays that support at least seven bits of color per pixel and standard phosphor monitors It corresponds to the display styles file mos 7bit dstyle5 Color map files are stored in ASCII form with each line containing four decimal integers separated by white space
39. You can change an id by selecting an instance which must be a child of the edit cell and invok ing the command identify newid where newid is the identifier you would like the instance to have Newid must not already be used as an instance identifier of any subcell within the edit cell Any node or instance can be described uniquely by listing a path of instance identifiers starting from the root cell The standard form of such names is similar to Unix file names For example if id1 is the name of an instance within the root cell id2 is an instance within id1 and node is a node name within id2 then id1 id2 node can be used unambiguously to refer to the node When you select a cell Magic prints out the complete path name of the instance Arrays are treated specially When you use identify to give an array an instance identifier each element of the array is given the instance identifier you specified fol lowed by one or two array subscripts enclosed in square brackets e g id3 2 or id4 3 7 When the array is one dimensional there is a single subscript when it is two dimensional the first subscript is for the y dimension and the second for the x dimension 7 Writing and Flushing Cells When you make changes to your circuit in Magic there is no immediate effect on the disk files that hold the cells You must explicitly save each cell that has changed using either the save command or the writeall command Magic keeps track o
40. a coordinate without sharing a side e g the LHS of one is equal to the RHS of the other but they don t come even close in the vertical dimension A final procedure is provided for high speed reading of ascii files containing descriptions of rectangles GetRect This procedure reads from a stdio opened FILE f which should be positioned so that after skip ping nskip characters it will be at the start of a line containing four ascii numbers that will be stored in r gt r_xbot r gt r_ybot r gt r_xtop and r gt r_ytop It returns TRUE if it successfully recognized a rectangle FALSE on error or end of file GetRect is considerably faster than either fscanf 3s or even fgets 3s fol lowed by manual decoding of the line because it reads data directly from the stdio buffer in its input file As such it depends on the structure of a FILE and may fail to work properly on machines with wildly dif ferent implementations of the stdio library from the standard Berkeley distribution those in which certain fields are nonexistent or renamed MACROS FOR SPEED If speed is essential macros are defined in geofast h to take the place of the several procedures for special cases GEOCLIP is identical to the procedure GeoClip but it returns no value Four macros for manipu lating Transforms GEOTRANSRECT GEOTRANSTRANS GEOINVERTTRANS and GEOTRAN STRANSLATE are similar to their procedural counterparts GeoTransRect GeoTransTrans Geolnvert Trans a
41. an intype and an outtype may appear at most once in a perimcap line Also as for areacap if a combination of intype and outtype does not appear in any perimcap line its perimeter capacitance per unit length is zero The resist keyword is followed by a type list and a resistance as follows resist types R The sheet resistivity of each of the types in types is R milliohms per square Each resist line in fact defines a resistance class When the extractor outputs the area and perimeter of nodes in the ext file it does so for each resistance class Nor mally each resistance class consists of all types with the same resistance However if you wish to obtain the perimeter and area of each type separately in the ext file you should make each into its own resistance class by using a separate resist line for each type In addition to sheet resistivities there are two other ways of specifying resistances Neither is used by the normal Magic extractor but both are used by the resistance extrac tor Contacts have a resistance that is inversely proportional to the number of via holes in the contact which is proportional albeit with quantization to the area of the contact The contact keyword allows the resistance for a single via hole to be specified oe Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 extract style lambda 0 7 lambda 70 step 100 sidehalo 4 resist poly pfet nfet 60000 res
42. and buried contacts The section currently contains three kinds of lines fixed types covered types drag types where types is a type list Table 17 gives this section for the scmos technology file In a fixed line each of types is considered to be fixed size regions consisting of tiles of these types are not deformed by plowing Contact types are always considered to be fixed size so need not be included in types In a covered line each of types will remain covered by plowing If a face of a covered type is covered with a given type before plowing it will remain so afterwards For example if a face of a transistor is covered by diffusion the diffusion won t be allowed to slide along the transistor and expose the channel to empty space Usually you should make all fixed width types covered as well except for contacts In a drag line whenever material of a type in types moves it will drag with it any minimum width material on its trailing side This can be used for example to insure that when a transistor moves the poly overlap forming its gate gets dragged along in its entirety instead of becoming elongated 16 Plot section The plot section of the technology file contains information used by Magic to gen erate hardcopy plots of layouts Plots can be generated in different styles which correspond to different printing mechanisms For each style of printing there is a separate subsection within the plot section
43. and the contact that connects them The macro S short for select more is just like s except that it adds on to the selec tion rather than replacing it Move the cursor over the vertical red bar on the right and type S to see how this works You can also type S multiple times to add regions and nets to the selection If you accidentally type s or S when the cursor is over space you ll select a cell tut2b in this case You can just undo this for now Cell selection will be discussed in Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 You can also select material by area place the box around the material you d like to select and type a short for select area This will select all of the material under neath the box You can use the macro A to add material to the selection by area and you can use the long command select more area layers to select only material on certain layers Place the box around everything in tut2b and type select area metall followed by select more area poly If you d like to clear out the selection without modifying any of the selected material you can use the command select clear or type the macro C You can clear out just a portion of the selection by typing select less or select less area layers the former deselects paint in the order that select selects paint while the latter deselects paint under the box just as s
44. and thereby reduce the sizes of CIF files Reducer must be a positive integer and must evenly divide into every other dimension specified in any statement for this style Reducer must also divide one half of scale If this sounds confusing the easiest thing is to leave reducer unspecified in which case the value 1 is used In addition to specifying a scale factor each style can specify the size in which chunks will be processed when generating CIF hierarchically This is particularly impor tant when the average design size is much larger than the maximum bloat or shrink e g more than 3 orders of magnitude difference The step size is specified by a line of the following form stepsize stepsize where stepsize is in Magic units For example if you plan to generate CIF for designs 15 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 that will typically be 100 000 Magic units on a side it might make sense for stepsize to be 10000 or more 8 3 Layer descriptions The main body of information for each CIF style is a set of layer descriptions Each layer description consists of one or more lines describing how to generate the CIF for a single layer The first line of each description is one of layer name layers or templayer name layers These statements are identical except that templayers are not output in the CIF file They are used only to build up intermediate results used in generating the r
45. anyway or rsim 1 F Don t output nodes that aren t connected to fets floating nodes L Don t produce the label file tchar Trim characters from node names when writing the output file Char should be either myn or f MITILBL SU Select the output format MIT is the traditional sim 5 format LBL is a variant of it understood by gemini 1 which includes the substrate connection as a fourth terminal before length and width SU is the internal Stanford format which is described also in sim 5 and includes areas and perimeters of fet sources drains and substrates The option may be used twice if both characters are desired y num Select the precision for outputing capacitors The default is 1 which means that the capa citors will be printed to a precision of 1 fF J hier flat Select the source drain area and perimeter extraction algorithm If hier is selected then the areas and perimeters are extracted only within each subcell For each fet in a subcell the area and perimeter of its source and drain within this subcell are output If two or more fets share a source drain node then the total area and perimeter will be output in only one of them and the other will have 0 If flat is selected the same rules apply only that the scope of search for area and perimeter is the whole netlist In general flat which is the default will give accurate results it will take into account shared sources drains but hier is provi
46. be a zero sized rectangle located at the origin OPTIONS ACCEPTED BY TPinitialize Typical command line program_name t template s style o output_file input_file a produce Magic format this is the default c produce CIF format V be verbose sequentially label the tiles in the output for debugging purposes also print out infor mation about the number of rectangles processed by mpack s style generate output using the template for this style see TPinitialize for details 0 The next argument is taken to be the base name of the output file The default is the input file name with any extensions removed If there is not input file specified and no o option specified the output will go to stdout 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 20 85 4 MPACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MPACK 3 p pipe mode Send the output to stdout t The next argument specifies the template base name to use This overrides the default supplied by the program A mag extension is automatically added see TPinitialize l name Set the cif output style to name name is the name of a cif output style as defined in Magic s tech nology file If this option is not specified then the first output style in the technology file is used Note In the old tpack system this option set the size of lambda input_file The name of the file that the program should read from such as a truth table file If this filename is omitted then the input is taken from
47. before invoking the label command This feature is used for labelling terminals for the router see below and for labelling tiles used by Mpack the tile packing program Tut2c has examples of point line and rec tangular labels All of the selection commands apply to labels as well as paint Whenever you select paint the labels attached to that paint will also be selected Selected labels are highlighted in white Select some of the chunks of paint in tut2c to see how the labels are selected too When you use area selection labels will only be selected if they are completely contained in the area being selected If you d like to select just a label without any paint make the box into a cross and put the cross on the label s and S will select just the label There are several ways to erase a label One way is to select and then delete it Another way is to erase the paint that the label is attached to If the paint is erased all around the label then Magic will delete the label too Try attaching a label to a red area then paint blue over the red If you erase blue the label stays since it s attached to red but if you erase the red then the label is deleted You can also erase labels using the erase command and the pseudo layer labels The command erase labels will erase all labels that lie completely within the area of the box Finally you can erase a label by making the box into a cross on top of the label then clicking th
48. border Finally Geo Disjoint is used to clip a Rect against another but to apply a procedure to each region in area that lies out side cliparea instead of modifying area The procedure proc it applies should be like the library procedure GeoDummyFunc which accepts a Rect and the cdata argument passed to GeoDisjoint and returns TRUE always If proc returns FALSE GeoDisjoint aborts and returns FALSE itself other wise it returns TRUE GeoDisjoint works in tile space so each rectangle is considered to contain its lower x and y coordinates but not its upper coordinates The discussion earlier on transformation mentioned that transforming the two corner points of a Rect independently could result in a Rect whose lower left was above or to the right of its upper right Geo CanonicalRect can remedy this situation it flips the top and bottom or left and right or both of the Rect rsrc aS necessary to ensure that the upper right is above and to the right of the lower left leaving the canonical Rect in rdst Two procedures compute the relative positions of Points and Rects GeoRectPointSide gives the side GEO_NORTH etc of the Rect r on which the Point p lies p must lie on the boundary of r other wise GEO_CENTER is returned Similarly GeoRectRectSide gives the side of r on which r2 lies or GEO_CENTER if they don t share any side Unfortunately this procedure doesn t detect the case where the Rects share
49. can appear on any plane The types error_p error_s and error_ps record design rule violations The types checkpaint and checksubcell record areas still to be design rule checked Magnet fence and rotate are the types used by designers to indi cate hints for the irouter There is a limit on the maximum number of types in a technology including all the built in types Currently the limit is 80 tile types To increase the limit you ll have to change TT_MAXTYPES in the file database database h and then recompile all of Magic as described in Maintainer s Manual 1 A number of macros in database h also depend on the value of TT_MAXTYPES 32 They are currently set up assuming that TT_MAXTYPES is between 65 and 96 if TT_MAXTYPES is changed to lie out side this region they should be changed See the comments in database h for more infor mation Because there are a number of tables whose size is determined by the square of TT_MAXTYPES it is very expensive to increase TT_MAXTYPES much beyond the 6 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 current limit contact pcontact poly metal ndcontact ndiff metal pdcontact pdiff metal ppcontact ppdiff metal nncontact nndiff metal m2contact metal2 metal pad metal metal2 glass end Table 5 Contact section As mentioned above contacts in Magic are represented on each plane containing material connected by the contact Also m
50. can be run with different graphics hardware The most common configuration is to run Magic under X11 on a workstation Another way to run Magic is on a mainframe with a serial line graphics display The rest of this section concerns X11 Before starting up magic make sure that your DISPLAY variable is set correctly If you are running magic and your X server on the same machine set it to unix 0 setenv DISPLAY unix 0 Under X10 the layout window will appear in the upper left quadrant of your screen The X11 server will normally prompt you for the window s position and size This window is an ordinary X window and can be moved and resized using the window manager For now you can skip to the next major section Running Magic 3 1 Advanced X Use The X11 driver can read in window sizing and font preferences from your Xde faults file The following specifications are recognized magic window 1000x600 10 10 magic newwindow 300x300 400 100 magic small _helvetica8 magic medium helvetica12 magic large helvetical8 magic xlarge helvetica24 magic window is the size and position of the initial window while magic newwindow is the size and position of subsequent windows If these are left blank you will be prompted to give the window s position and size small medium large and xlarge are various fonts magic uses for labels Some X11 servers read the Xdefaults file only when you initially log in you may have to log out and t
51. cell cellName into the edit cell such that the lower left corner of label labelName is at the lower left corner of the box The new material will also be selected This command is similar in form to the getcell command except that it copies the contents of the cell instead of using the cell as a sub cell There are several forms of dump see the man page for details The main purpose of dump is to allow you to create a library of cells representing commonly used structures such as standard transistor shapes or special contact arrange ments You can then define macros that invoke the dump command to place the cells The result is that a single keystroke is all you need to copy one of them into the edit cell As mentioned earlier Magic normally displays the edit cell in brighter colors than non edit cells This helps to distinguish what is editable from what is not but may make it hard for you to view non edit paint since it appears paler If you type the command see allSame you ll turn off this feature all paint everywhere will be displayed in the bright colors The word allSame must be typed just that way with one capital letter If you d like to restore the different display styles type the command see no allSame You can also use the see command to selectively disable display of various mask layers in order to make the other ones easier to see For details read about see in the Magic man page Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Wind
52. clockwise order if it had been specified in clockwise order the result would have been slightly dif ferent Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma September 19 1990 An additional approximation occurs for wires The CIF wire figure assumes that round caps will be generated at each end of the wire In Magic square caps are gen erated instead The top example of the figure above illustrates this approximation 5 Other Problems with Reading and Writing CIF You may have noticed that when you wrote out CIF for tut9a and read it back in again you didn t get back quite what you started with Although the differences shouldn t cause any serious problems this section describes what they are so you ll know what to expect There are three areas where there may be discrepancies labels arrays and contacts These are illustrated in tut9b Load this cell then generate CIF then read the CIF back in again When the CIF is read in you ll get a couple of warning messages because Magic won t allow the CIF to overwrite existing cells it uses new numbered cells instead this is why you should normally read CIF with a clean slate in this case it s convenient to have both the original and reconstructed infromation present at the same time just ignore the warnings The information from the CIF cell appears as a subcell named 1 right on top of the old contents of tut9b select 1 move it below tut9b and expand it so
53. contacts and cost per unit area for distance between a path and magnets help determine the nature of the routes Several search parameters permit tuning to achieve acceptable routes in as short a time as possible Routing can always be inter rupted with C The iroute subcommands are as follows iroute Routes from cursor to inside box iroute contact type parameter value valuen An asterisk can be used for type and parameter This command is for setting and exa mining parameters related to contacts iroute help subcommand Summarizes irouter commands If a subcommand is given usage information for that subcommand is printed iroute layers type parameter value valuen An asterisk can be used for type and parameter This command is for setting and exa mining parameters related to route layers iroute route options Invokes the router Options are as follows 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 13 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 sLayers layers layers route may start on sCursor start route at cursor DEFAULT sLabel name start route at label of given name sPoint x y start route at given coordinates dLayers layers layers route may end on dBox route to box DEFAULT dLabel name route to label of given name dRect xbot ybot xtop ytop route to rectangle of given coordinates dSelection route to selection iroute saveParameters lt filename gt Saves all curr
54. containing that terminal to be selected Three hollow white squares will appear over the layout marking the terminals that are supposed to be wired together into right4 s net Left click over the left3 terminal in the same subcell to select its net then select the right4 net again The right button is used to toggle terminals into or out of the current net If you right click over a terminal that is in the current net then it is removed from the current net If you right click over a terminal that isn t in the current net it is added to the current net A single terminal can only be in one net at a time so if a terminal is already in a net when you toggle it into another net then Magic will remove it from the old net Toggle the terminal top4 in the bottom cell out of then back into the net containing right4 Now toggle left3 in the bottom cell into this net Magic warns you because it had to remove left3 from another net in order to add it to right4 s net Type u to undo this change then left click on left3 to make sure it got restored to its old net by the undo 6 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 All of the netlist editing operations are undo able The middle button is used to merge two nets together If you middle click over a terminal all the terminals in its net are added to the current net Play around with the three buttons to edit the netlist tut7b Note the router does not make connections to
55. description of the previous style and start the description of a new style The Magic command cif ostyle name is typed by users to change the current style used for output The first style in the technology file is used by default for CIF output if the designer doesn t issue a cif style command If the first line of the cifoutput section isn t a style line then Magic uses an initial style name of default 8 2 Scaling Each style must contain a line of the form scalefactor scale reducer that tells how to scale Magic coordinates into CIF coordinates The argument scale indi cates how many hundredths of a micron correspond to one Magic unit Because of cer tain numerical problems with the CIF representation scale must always be an even number except as described below The second parameter reducer is optional If it is specified it may be either the keyword calmaonly or an integer If reducer is calmaonly then this output style can only be used to generate Calma GDS II output not CIF but the restriction that scale must always be an even number is relaxed scale can be any positive integer If reducer is an integer it is used to increase the readability and decrease the size of CIF files Each CIF coordinate is divided by reducer before being written to the CIF file then a uniform upward scalefactor of reducer is specified once for the whole file This has no effect on the CIF except to make the individual CIF numbers smaller
56. drawn as stippled areas instead of colored areas You must be running Suntools in order for Magic to run with this option and the caveats for the SUN160 version also apply to this version The following drivers are available but are seldom used and thus may be in disrepair UCBS512 An old AED512 with the Berkeley microcode ROMs and an attached bitpad Summa Graphics Bitpad One The ROMs are available from AED UCB512N A new Colorware AED512 with the Berkeley microcode ROMs and an attached bitpad SummaGraphics Bitpad One The ROMs are available from AED We do not recom mend the GTCO bitpad since we have heard that their Summagraphics emulation mode can t handle up down button encoding nor double button pushes AED767 An AED767 with a SummaGraphics Mouse Because of missing features in this device programmable cursors and Bit Blt do not work Many thanks to Norm Jouppi and DECWRL for porting Magic to this device UCB1024 An AED1024 with a SummaGraphics Mouse and AED s Magic microcode ROMs that implement the same operations as the UCB512 ROMs Thanks to LSI Logic for this port AED1024 An AED1024 with a SummaGraphics Mouse and rev D roms Because of missing features in this device programmable cursors do not work Many thanks to Peng Ang and LSI Logic Corp for porting Magic to this device other AEDs Other AEDs can be handled by modifying Magic s file grAed1 c There are just too many combinations of options for AEDs
57. each other in the Y dimension by ysep lambda If xlo and xhi are equal xsep is ignored similarly if ylo and yhi are equal ysep is ignored The timestamp line is optional if present it gives the last time this cell was aware that the child filename changed If there is no timestamp line a timestamp of 0 is assumed When the subcell is read in this value is compared to the actual value at the beginning of the child cell If there is a difference the times tamp mismatch message is printed and Magic rechecks design rules around the child The transform line gives the geometric transform from coordinates of the child filename into coordinates of the cell being read The six integers a b c d e and f are part of the following transformation matrix which is used to postmultiply all coordinates in the child filename whenever their coordinates in the parent are required a d 0 b e 0 c fa 1 Finally box gives an estimate of the bounding box of cell filename covering all the elements of the array if an array line was present in coordinates of the cell being read The third kind of line group in a mag file is a list of labels It begins with the line lt lt labels gt gt and is followed by zero or more lines of the following form rlabel layer xbot ybot xtop ytop position text Here layer is the name of one of the layers specified in the technology file for this cell The label is attached to material of this type Layer
58. end in or any of the other special characters discussed below is a local node name It refers to a node within that particular cell Local node names should be unique within the cell there shouldn t be two electrically distinct nodes with the same name On the other hand it is perfectly legal and sometimes advanta geous to give more than one name to the same node It is also legal to use the same local node name in different cells the tools will be able to distinguish between them and will not assume that they are electrically connected The only other labels currently understood by the tools are attributes Attributes are pieces of text associated with a particular piece of the circuit they are not node names and need not be unique For example an attribute might identify a node as a chip input or it might identify a transistor terminal as the source of information for that transistor Any label whose last character is or is an attribute There are three dif ferent kinds of attributes Node attributes are those ending with they are associ ated with particular nodes Transistor source drain attributes are those ending in they are associated with particular terminals of a transistor A source or drain attribute must be attached to the channel region of the transistor and must fall exactly on the source or drain edge of the transistor The third kind of attribute is a transistor gate attri but
59. file changes Users of Magic 4 should have little trouble switching to Magic 6 A new section the mzrouter section needs to be added to your technology files See the mzrouter section of the tutorial Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File for details Display styles must be defined in the tech file for the mzrouter hint layers magnet fence and rotate We suggest copying this information from the styles section of the scmos technology file on the distribution tape You ll also need to include these display styles in your dstyle file 5 Beta test Sites We d like to thank the beta test sites that tried out this version of Magic reported bugs and fixes in a timely manner and ported the code to new machines Mike Chow Apple Computer Arun Rao Arizona State University Richard Hughey Brown University Rick Carley Carnegie Mellon University Hank Walker Carnegie Mellon University Christos Zoulas Cornell University Andreas Andreou John Hopkins University George Entenman The Microelectronics Center of North Carolina Shih Lien Lu The MOSIS Service Jen I Pi The MOSIS Service Guntram Wolski Silicon Engineering Inc Don Stark Stanford University Gregory Frazier University of California at Los Angeles Yuval Tamir University of California at Los Angeles Steven Parkes University of Illinois Larry McMurchie University of Washington Tim Heldt Washington State University David Lee Xerox Palo Alto Research
60. filename is formed by taking the base_name adding any extension indicated by the s option and then adding the mag suffix The t option allows the user to override base_name from the command line Argc and argv should contain the command line arguments Argc is a count of the number of arguments while argv is an array of pointers to strings Strings of length zero are ignored as is the flag consisting of a single space in order to make it easy for the calling program to intercept its own arguments Argc and argv are of the same structure as the two parameters passed to the main program A later section of this manual sum marizes the command line options TPload_tiles file_name 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 20 85 1 MPACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MPACK 3 The given file_name is read and each rectangular label found in the file becomes a tile accessible via TPname_to_tile No extensions are added to file_name TILE TPread_tile file_name A tile is created and file_name is read into it The tile is returned as the value of the func tion TPwrite_tile tile filename The tile tile is written to the file specified by filename with ca or cif extensions added See the description of the o option for information on what file name is chosen if filename is the null string The choice between Magic or CIF format is chosen with the a or c command line options Tile creation deletion and access TPdelete_tile tile The tile
61. has a specific scalefactor you can t use a particular style with a different scalefactor To change the scalefactor you ll have to edit the appropriate style in the cifinput or cifoutput section of the technology file This process is described in Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File 3 Rounding The units used for coordinates in Magic are generally different from those in CIF files In Magic most technology files use lambda based units where one unit is typically half the minimum feature size In CIF files the units are centimicrons hundredths of a micron When reading CIF and Calma files an integer scalefactor is used to convert from centimicrons to Magic units If the CIF file contains coordinates that don t scale exactly to integer Magic units Magic rounds the coordinates up or down to the closest integer Magic units A CIF coordinate exactly halfway between two Magic units is rounded down The final authority on rounding is the procedure CIFScaleCoord in the a ie Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma September 19 1990 file cif CIFreadutils c When rounding occurs the resulting Magic file will not match the CIF file exactly Technology files usually specify geometrical operations such as bloating shrinking and ing and or ing to be performed on CIF geometries when they are read into Magic These geometrical operations are all performed in the CIF coordinate system centimi cron
62. height Grn commands to ensure that the printed version is the size you want Use the mg stipples in Grn No plot parameters are used in Gremlin plotting plot help Print a short synopsis of all the plot command options plot parameters name value If plot parameters is invoked with no additional arguments the values for all of the plot parameters are printed If name and value are provided then name is the name of a plot parameter and value is a new value for it Plot parameters are used to control various aspects of plotting all of them have reasonable initial values Most of the parameters available now are used to control Versatec style plotting They are cellIldFont The name of the font to use for cell instance ids in Versatec plots This must be a file in Vfont format cellNameFont The name of the font to use for cell names in Versatec plots This must be a file in Vfont format color If this is set to true the plot versatec command will generate output suitable for a four color Versatec plotter using the styles defined in the colorversatec style of the plot section of the technology file If color is false the default then plot versatec generates normal black and white plots directory The name of the directory in which to create raster files for the Versatec The raster files have names of the form magicPlotXXXXXX where XXXXXX is a 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 15 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAG
63. information mask layers design rules etc comes from a technology file There is a different technology file for each technology supported by Magic You can run Magic with a different technology by specifying the Trechfile flag on the command line you use to start Magic where techfile is the name of a file of the form techname techn in either the current directory or the library directory cad lib magic sys The n is a numeric suffix to identify the version of the technology file which is currently 26 This tutorial describes the contents of a technology file and gives hints for building a new one It assumes that your current working directory is the Magic source directory either cad sre magic or CAD_HOME sre magic A technology file is organized into sections each of which begins with a line con taining a single keyword and ends with a line containing the single word end If you examine one of the Magic technology files in the directory cad src magic tech e g scmos tech you can see that it contains the following sections tech planes types styles contact compose connect cifoutput cifinput mzrouter drc extract wiring router plowing and plot These sections must appear in this order in all technology files Every technology file must have all of the sections although the sections need not have any lines between the section header and the end line A technology file can contain comments which are blocks of text b
64. just typed the 1 key then type the 1 key 66 99 One of the macros has special meaning in Magic This macro is always defined by the system to be the last long command you typed Whenever you d like to repeat a long command all you have to do is use the dot macro 10 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 11 What the Layers Mean The paint layers available in Magic are different from those that you may be used to in Caesar and other systems because they don t correspond exactly to the masks used in fabrication We call them abstract layers because they correspond to constructs such as wires and contacts rather than mask layers We also call them logs because they look like sticks except that the geometry is drawn fully fleshed instead of as lines In Magic there is one paint layer for each kind of conducting material polysilicon ndiffusion metall etc plus one additional paint layer for each kind of transistor ntransistor ptransistor etc and finally one further paint layer for each kind of contact pcontact ndcontact m2contact etc Each layer has one or more names that are used to refer to that layer in commands To find out the layers available in the current technology type the command layers In addition to the mask layers there are a few pseudo layers that are valid in all technolo gies these are listed in Table I Each Magic technology also has a technology
65. layers Routing layers are defined in Magic s technology file For example in the SCMOS process where the routing layers are metall and metal2 diffu sion may not be used as a terminal since neither of the routing layers will connect directly to it On the other hand a terminal may be attached to diffusion metal1 contact since the metall routing layer will connect properly to it Terminals can have arbitrary Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 Cell Boundary Figure 1 An example of terminal labels Each terminal should be labeled with a line or rectangle along the edge of the cell names except that they should not contain slashes or the substring feedthrough and should not end in or See Tutorial 2 for a complete description of labeling conventions For an example of good and bad terminals edit the cell tut7a The cell doesn t make any electrical sense but contains several good and bad terminals All the terminals with names like bad1 are incorrect or undesirable for one of the reasons given above and those with names like good4 are acceptable NETLIST MENU Label BusBit13 K Current Text 13 S Pumps Placer gt it SEF Netlist K Current Netlist Verify Print Terms Cleanup No Net Show Figure 2 The netlist menu If you cre
66. left clicking on 8 in tut3a moving the cursor over 10 and typing wire ho abbreviations work for wire command options just as they do elsewhere in Magic This command will generate a short horizontal leg instead of a longer vertical one 2 3 Contacts When the wiring tool is active the middle mouse button places contacts Undo all of your changes to tut3a by typing the command flush and answering yes to the ques tion Magic asks This throws away all of the changes made to the cell and re loads it from disk Draw a red wire leg from 1 to 2 Now move the cursor over the blue area and click the middle mouse button This has several effects It places a contact at the end of the current wire leg selects the contact and moves the box over the selection In addi tion it changes the wiring material and thickness to match the material you middle clicked Move the cursor over 3 and right click to paint a blue leg then make a contact to purple by middle clicking over the purple material Continue by drawing a purple leg to 4 Once you ve drawn the purple leg to 4 move the cursor over red material and middle click This time Magic prints an error message and treats the click just like a left click Magic only knows how to make contacts between certain combinations of a ie Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 layers which are specified in the technology file see Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology
67. lines Magic outlines tiles in type list with medium thickness lines and also draws crosses through the tiles if X is given The colorversatec subsection is just like the versatec section except the stipple lines can also specify a color type list color patO pat pat15 where color is one of black cyan magenta or yellow This color is the dye that will be used for the stipple in the plot Multicolored stipples may be obtained by listing the same type list and stipple patterns two or more times each with a different color For versatec plotting there are a number of parameters that can be set directly by users such as the printer width These parameters allow users to reconfigure the system for different kinds of plotters and different spooling mechanisms See the manual page for details You may want to modify your system magic file to set up default parameters for your printer 17 Installing a Technology File As mentioned earlier raw technology files cannot be read directly by Magic The C preprocessor must first be used to eliminate comments and expand macros in a technology file before it gets installed As a consequence the full power of the C prepro cessor is available to the writer of a technology file Not only may macro definitions be made with define but conditional compilation using ifdef and the ability to use 42 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990
68. make a copy of a stack src It leaves dest pointing to the copy If the parameter copystr is TRUE then the elements of src are interpreted as pointers to NULL terminated ASCII strings which are copied into newly allocated memory before the address of the new string is stored in dest oth erwise the elements of src are just copied to dest BUGS There should be a way of declaring a Stack that pushes or pops more than a single word at a time SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 STRING 3 CAD Tool User s Manual STRING 3 NAME string procedures for manipulating strings in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include magic h include utils h typedef struct char d_str LookupTable int Lookup str table char str char table int LookupStruct str table size char str LookupTable table int size int LookupAny c table char c char table int LookupFull name table char name char table char StrDup oldstr str char oldstr str bool StrIsWhite str commentok char str bool commentok bool StrIsInt str char str bool Match pattern string char pattern string char ArgStr pargc pargv argType int pargc char pargv char argType DESCRIPTION This collection of procedures provide a number of useful functions for dealing with strings Lookup searches a table of strings to find one that matches a given string It s useful mostly for comma
69. may be space in which case the label is not considered to be attached to any layer Labels are rectangular The lower left corner of the label the part attached to any geometry if layer is non space is at xbot ybot and the upper right corner at xtop ytop The width of the rectangle or its height may be zero In fact most labels in Magic have a lower left equal to their upper right The text of the label text may be any sequence of characters not including a newline This text is located at one of nine possible orientations relative to the center of the label s rectangle Position is an integer between 0 and 8 each of which corresponds to a different orientation 0 center 1 north 2 northeast 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 MAGIC 5 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 5 east southeast south southwest west northwest AAINAM W A mag file is terminated by the line lt lt end gt gt Everything following this line is ignored Any line beginning with a pound sigh is considered to be a comment and ignored Beware how ever that these comments are discarded by Magic when it reads a cell so if that cell is written again by Magic the comments will be lost NOTE FOR PROGRAMS THAT GENERATE MAGIC FILES Magic s incremental design rule checker expects that every cell is either completely checked or contains information to tell the checker which areas of the cell have yet to be examined for design rule
70. metall plane Type the command watch metall demo Now you can see that there are metall tiles but the polysilicon diffusion and transistor tiles have disappeared The two contacts polycontact and ndcontact still appear to be tiles The reason Magic uses several planes to store mask information is that corner stitching can only represent non overlapping rectangles If a layout were to consist of only a single layer such as polysilicon then only two types of tiles would be necessary polysilicon and space As more layers are added overlaps can be represented by creating a special tile type for each kind of overlap area For example when polysilicon overlaps ndiffusion the overlap area is marked with the tile type ntransistor Although some overlaps correspond to actual electrical constructs e g transistors other overlaps have little electrical significance For example metall can overlap polysilicon without changing the connectivity of the circuit or creating any new devices The only consequence of the overlap is possibly a change in parasitic capacitance To create new tile types for all possible overlapping combinations of metall with polysili con diffusion transistors etc would be wasteful since these new overlapping combina tions would have no electrical significance Instead Magic partitions the layers into separate planes Layers whose overlaps have electrical significance must be stored in a single plane For example p
71. node in the net is The final 3 lines give a brief summary of the total number of nets the nets requiring extraction and the number for which resistors were added to the output Running the resistance extractor also produced the file cell res ext To produce a sim file containing resistors quit magic and type cat tut8r ext tut8r res ext gt tut8r 2 ext ext2sim R t t tut8r 2 Comparing the two files tut8r sim and tut8r 2 sim shows that the latter has the nodes net and net2 split into several parts with resistors added to connect the new nodes together 4 2 2 General Notes on using the resistance extractor To use extresis the circuit must first be extracted using extract and flattened using ext2sim When ext2sim is run do not use the t and t flags i e don t trim the trailing and characters or the R flag because extresis needs the sim and ext names to correspond exactly and it needs the lumped resistance values that the extractor produces Also do not delete or rename the nodes file extresis needs this to run Once the sim and nodes files have been produced type the command extresis while running Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 magic on the root cell As the resistance extractor runs it will identify which nets if any for which it is producing RC networks and will identify what it thinks is the slowest point in the network When it completes it will print a brief sum
72. o installed Most sites don t use this directory If you want it to be used you can modify the script cad src magic instclean If used it contains one subdirectory for each of the source code direc tories Each subdirectory contains safe versions of the source files for that module These files correspond to the installed o files in lib magic This directory is where the modules of Magic are combined together to form an executable version of the system contributed This directory contains Magic source code or programs that were contributed by other people None of it has been tested by any member of the Magic team cadlib This is a symbolic link to the directory where Magic stores cell libraries and official installed versions of technology files and color maps Normally cadlib is a symbolic link to cad lib magic Magic is a relatively large system there are around 575 source files 250 000 lines of C code In order to make all of this manageable we ve organized the sources in a two level structure Each module has its own subdirectory and you can make changes to the module and recompile it by working within that subdirectory In addition to the information in the subdirectory there is an installed version of each module which consists of the files in the lib include and installed subdirectories The installed version of each module is supposed to be stable and reliable At Berkeley when a module is
73. of hue saturation and value Hue selects a color of the spectrum Satura tion indicates how diluted the color is high saturation corresponds to a pure color low saturation corresponds to a color that is diluted with gray and a saturation of 0 results in gray regardless of hue Value indicates the overall brightness a value of 0 corresponds to black regardless of hue or saturation There are several ways to modify the current color First try pressing any mouse button while the cursor is over one of the color bars The length of the bar and the current color will be modified to reflect the mouse position The color map in the display is also changed so the colors will change everywhere on the screen that the current color is displayed Color 0 which you should currently be editing is the back ground color You can also modify the current color by pressing a button while the cur sor is over one of the color pumps next to the bars If you button a pump with in it the value of the bar next to it will be incremented slightly and if you button the pump the bar will be decremented slightly The left button causes a change of about 1 in the value of the bar and the right button will pump the bar up or down by about 5 Try adjusting the bars by buttoning the bars and the pumps If you press a button while the cursor is over the current color box at the top of the window one of two things will happen In eith
74. of similar sizes Speed results from maintaining separate free lists for objects of each size providing fast macros MALLOC and FREE for doing allocation and freeing and clustering objects of the same size on the same page in an attempt to improve locality of reference In addition these procedures provide features to aid in the debugging of programs that do a lot of memory allocation and freeing used in conjunction with prleak 8 they can detect storage leaks and also duplicate attempts to free the same storage location Memory is allocated using either the procedure mallocMagic or the macro MALLOC The former has an interface identical to that of the standard UNIX library procedure malloc 3 namely it returns a pointer to a region of memory sufficiently large to hold size bytes The macro MALLOC is noticeably faster particu larly on machines with brain dead procedure calls such as a certain popular machine made by the second largest U S computer manufacturer Its usage is a bit unusual in that its first argument is a type 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MALLOC 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MALLOC 3 BUGS specification and its second is modified in place For example to allocate an object of type HashEntry that is 20 bytes long and to assign this to the pointer he one could write MALLOC HashEntry he 20 Note that there are no parentheses around the HashEntry above After executing this macro he would point to a HashE
75. of the layout There are scroll bars for both the vertical direction the left scroll bar and the horizontal direction the bottom scroll bar Besides indicating how much is visible the scroll bars can be used to change the view of the window Clicking the middle mouse button in a scroll bar moves the elevator to that position For example if you are viewing the lower half of a chip elevator near the bottom and you click the middle button near the top of the scroll bar the elevator will move up to that position and you will be viewing the top part of your chip The little squares with arrows in them at the ends of the scroll bars will scroll the view by one screenful when the middle button is clicked on them They are useful when you want to move exactly one screenful The scroll command can also be used to scroll the view Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 though we don t think it s as easy to use as the scroll bars See the man page for infor mation on it If you only want to make a small adjustment in a window s view you can use the command center It will move the view in the window so that the point that used to be underneath the cur sor is now in the middle of the window The macro is predefined to center The bull s eye in the lower left corner of a window is used to zoom the view in and out Clicking the left mouse button zooms the view out by a factor of 2 and clicking the right mouse but
76. of type struct foo In general single word keys keysize equal to HT_WORDKEYS are the fastest but the most restrictive A second procedure HashInitClient may be used to initialize a hash table instead of HashInit This second procedure is a more general one in that it allows a fourth value of keysize to be provided HT_CLIENTKEYS along with four client procedures The keys in such a case are single word values passed to HashFind just like keys when keysize is HT_WORDKEYS However they are interpreted using the client procedures passed in the call to HashInitClient These procedures perform four functions if any are NULL then those functions are performed exactly as in the case of HT_WORDKEYS The first compareFn keyl key2 takes two single word key values and returns either 0 if they are equal or 1 if they are not The next procedure copyFn key is called when a new entry is being created for a key it performs whatever processing is needed to ensure that the key can be kept around permanently e g mak ing a copy of it and returns the value that will actually be stored as the key in the hash table e g the copy The third procedure hashFn key is used to produce a single 32 bit value from key It is pri marily useful when key is in fact a pointer to a structure and the contents of the structure rather than its address determine the hash value Finally killFn key is called when the hash table is being freed by Ha
77. on the names of cells they can only contain alphanumeric characters and _ and can be at most 32 characters long If the name of a cell does not meet these limitations calma write converts it to a unique name of the form ___n where n is a small integer To avoid any possible conflicts you should avoid using names like these for your own cells You shouldn t need to know much more than what s above in order to read and write CIF and Stream The sections below describe the different styles of CIF Calma that Magic can generate and the limitations of the CIF Calma facilities you may have noticed that when you wrote and read CIF above you didn t quite get back what you started with Section 3 describes the differences that can occur Although the discus sion mentions only CIF the same features and problems apply to Calma Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma September 19 1990 2 Styles Magic usually knows several different ways to generate CIF Calma from a given layout Each of these ways is called a style Different styles can be used to handle dif ferent fabrication facilities which may differ in the names they use for layers or in the exact mask set required for fabrication Different styles can be also used to write out CIF Calma with slightly different feature sizes or design rules CIF Calma styles are described in the technology file that Magic reads when it starts up the exact numbe
78. pass is of course invoked AFTER routing Type route netlist file to specify a netlist for the routing without having to open up the netlist menu The metal option lets you toggle metal maximization on and off if metal maximization is turned on the router con verts routing from the alternate routing layer poly to the preferred routing layer metal wherever possible The vias option controls metal maximization by specify ing how many grid units of metal conversion make it worthwhile to place vias setting this to 5 means that metal maximization will add extra vias only if 5 or more grid units of poly can be converted to metal View the current technology s router parameters with the tech option The jog obstacle and steady options let you view and change parameters to control the channel router this feature is for advanced users The viamin option invokes a via minimization algorithm which reduces the number of vias in a routed layout This can be used as a post processing step to improve the quality of the routing This may be useful even when using another router to do the actual routing 9 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 Finally show all parameter values with the settings option The options and their actions are summarized in Table IIL Option Action end Print the channel router end constant end
79. pcontact has component types poly and metall Since painting poly doesn t affect either poly or metall it doesn t affect a pcontact either Painting ndiffusion does affect poly it turns it into an ntransistor Hence painting ndiffusion over a pcontact breaks up the contact leaving ntransistor on the active plane and metall on the metall plane The compose and decompose rules are normally sufficient to specify the desired semantics of painting or erasing In unusual cases however it may be necessary to pro vide Magic with explicit paint or erase rules For example to specify that painting pwell over pdiffusion switches its type to ndiffusion the technology file contains the rule paint pdiffusion pwell ndiffusion This rule could not have been written as a decompose rule erasing ndiffusion from pwell does not yield pdiffusion nor does erasing pdiffusion from ndiffusion yield pwell The general syntax for these explicit rules is paint have t result p erase have t result p Here have is the type already present on plane p if it is specified otherwise on the home plane of have Type t is being painted or erased and the result is type result Table 7 gives the compose section for scmos It s easiest to think of the paint and erase rules as being built up in four passes The first pass generates the default rules for all non contact types and the second pass replaces these as specified by the compose decompose etc ru
80. per lambda This is the capacitance associated with an edge with a type in intypes on its inside and a type in outtypes on its outside that overlaps a tile whose type is in ovtypes See Figure 10 Transistors are represented in Magic by explicit tiletypes The extraction of a fet with gate sources and drains from a collection of transistor tiles is governed by the information in a fet line This line has the following format fet types dtypes min nterms name snode stypes gscap gccap Types is a list of those tiletypes that make up this type of transistor Normally there will be only one type in this list since Magic usually represents each type of transistor with a different tiletype Dtypes is a list of those tiletypes that connect to the diffusion terminals of the fet Each transistor of this type must have at least min nterms distinct diffusion terminals otherwise the extractor will generate an error message For example an efet in the scmos technology must have a source and drain in addition to its gate min nterms for this type of fet is 2 The tiletypes connecting to the gate of the fet are the same as those specified in the connect section as connecting to the fet tiletype itself Name is a string used to identify this type of transistor to simulation programs The substrate terminal of a transistor is determined in one of two ways If stypes a comma separated list of tile types is given and a particular transistor overlaps
81. pushed ahead of it if layers is specified then only edges on those layers are moved Each edge that is pushed by the plow pushes other edges ahead of it in a way that preserves design rules connectivity and transistor and contact sizes This means that material ahead of the plow gets com pacted down to the minimum spacing permitted by the design rules and material that crossed the plow s original position gets stretched behind the plow You can compact a cell by placing a large plow off to one side of the cell and plow ing across the whole cell You can open up space in the middle of a cell by dragging a small plow across the area where you want more space To try out plowing edit the cell tut3d place the box over the rectangle that s labelled Plow here and try plowing in various directions Also try plowing only cer tain layers For example with the box over the Plow here label try plow right metal2 Nothing happens This is because there are no metal2 edges in the path of the plow If instead you had typed plow right metall only the metal would have been plowed to the right In addition to plowing with the box you can plow the selection The command to do this has the following syntax plow selection direction distance This is very similar to the stretch command it picks up the selection and the box and moves both so that the lower left corner of the box is at the cursor location U
82. read a CIF file into Magic place the cursor over a layout window and type the command cif read file This will read the file file cif which must be in CIF format generate Magic cells for the hierarchy described in the file make the entire hierarchy a subcell of the edit cell and run the design rule checker to verify everything read from the file Information in the top level cell usually just a call on the main cell of the layout will be placed into the edit cell Start Magic up afresh and read in tut9a cif which you created above It will be easier if you always read CIF when Magic has just been started up if some of the cells already exist the CIF reader will not overwrite them but will instead use numbers for cell names To read and write Stream format files use the commands calma read and calma respectively These commands have the same effect as the CIF commands except that they operate on files with strm extensions Stream is a binary format so you can t examine strm files with a text editor Stream files do not identify a top level cell so you won t see anything on the screen after you ve used the calma read command You ll have to use the load command to look at the cells you read However if Magic was used to write the Calma file being read the library name reported by the calma read command is the same as the name of the root cell for that library Also Calma format places some limitations
83. same name fets to warn about transis tors with fewer than the minimum number of terminals and labels to warn when nodes are not labeled in the area of cell overlap In addition all may be used to refer to all warnings If a warning is preceded by no it is disabled To disable all warnings use extract warn no all To see which warning options are in effect use extract warn extresist cell threshold Postprocessor for improving on the resistance calculation performed by the circuit extractor To use this command you first have to extract the design rooted at cell with extract cell and then flatten the design using ext2sim 1 producing the files cell sim and cell nodes Then run extresist cell to produce a file cell res ext containing differences between the network described by the ext files produced the first time around and a new network that incorporates explicit two point resistors where appropriate see below This file may be appended to cell ext and then ext2simrun for a second time to produce a new network with explicit resistors The threshold parameter is used to control which nodes are turned into resistor networks any node whose total resistance exceeds threshold times the smallest on resistance of any transistor connected to that node will be approximated as a resistor network feedback option args Examine feedback information that is created by several of the Magic commands to report p
84. screen You should usually reset the graph ics hardware manually before invoking this command This command is a way to recover from noise errors on serial lines and thus is ignored on workstations with built in frame buffers scroll direction amount The window under the cursor is moved by amount screenfulls in direction relative to the circuit If amount is omitted it defaults to 0 5 send type command Send a command to the window client named by type The result is just as if command had been typed in a window of type type See specialopen below for the allowable types of windows setpoint x y windowID Fakes the location of the cursor up until after the next interactive command Without arguments just prints out the current point location This command is normally invoked only from command scripts produced by the logcommands command or by wizards that are using Magic without a color display If windowID is given then the point is assumed to be in that window s screen coordinate system rather than absolute screen coordinates This feature is needed for devices like the Sun 160 that have separate coordinate systems for each window To find out a window s ID on such a device 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 23 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 turn on command logging and look at the file produced sleep n Causes Magic to go to sleep for n seconds source filename Each line of filename is read and processed as one c
85. since tut8a is the parent of tut8b To force all cells in the subtree rooted at cell root to be re extracted use extract all Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 sload root extract all Try this also on tut8a You can also use the extract command to extract a single cell as follows extract cell name will extract just the selected current cell and place the output in the file name Select the cell tut8b tut8b_0 and type extract cell differentFile to try this out After this command the file differentFile ext will contain the extracted circuit for the cell tut8b The children of tut8b in this case the single cell tut8d will not be re extracted by this command If more than one cell is selected the upper leftmost one is extracted You should be careful about using extract cell since even though you may only make a change to a child cell all of its parents may have to be re extracted To re extract all of the parents of the selected cell you may use extract parents Try this out with tut8b still selected Magic will extract only the cell tut8a since it is the only one that uses the cell tut8b To see what cells would be extracted by extract parents without actually extracting them use extract showparents Try this command as well 3 Feedback Errors and Warnings When the extractor encounters problems it leaves feedback in the form of stippled white rectangular areas on the screen E
86. slashes and commas have lowest precedence of all Note in the CIF sections of the technology file only simple comma separated names are permitted tildes and parentheses are not understood However everywhere else in the technology file the full generality can be used Sorry for this inconsistency 5 Styles section Magic can be run on several different types of graphical displays Although it would have been possible to incorporate display specific information into the technology file a different technology file would have been required for each display type Instead the technology file gives one or more display independent styles for each type that is to be displayed and uses a per display type styles file to map to colors and stipplings specific to the display being used The styles file is described in Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 Styles and Colors so we will not describe it further here Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 styles styles styletype mos poly 1 ndiff 2 pdiff 4 nfet 6 nfet 7 pfet 8 pfet 9 metal 1 20 metal2 21 pcontact 1 pcontact 20 pcontact 32 ndcontact 2 ndcontact 20 ndcontact 32 pdcontact 4 pdcontact 20 pdcontact 32 m2contact 20 m2contact 21 m2contact 33 end Table 6 Part of the styles section Table 6 shows part of the styles section from the scmos technology file The first line specifies the type of style file for use with thi
87. specified in this section The syntax and function of the lines in the mzrouter section of the technology file are specified in the subsections below Each set of specifications should be headed by a style line Routelayer and routecontact specifications should precede references to them 10 1 Styles The mzrouter is currently used in two contexts interactively via the iroute com mand and as a subroutine to the garouter for stem generation To permit distinct param eters for these two uses the lines in the mzrouter section are grouped into styles The 22 ez Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 mzrouter style irouter layer m2 32 64 256 1 layer ml 64 32 256 1 layer poly 128 128 512 1 contact m2contact metall metal2 1024 contact pcontact metall poly 2056 notactive poly pcontact style garouter layer m2 32 64 256 1 layer ml 64 32 256 1 contact m2contact metall metal2 1024 end Table 11 Mzrouter section for the scmos technology lines pertaining to the irouter should be preceded by style irouter and those pertaining to the garouter should be preceded by the specification style garouter Other styles can be specified but are currently not used Table 11 shows the mzrouter section from the scmos technology 10 2 Layers Layer lines define the route layers available to the maze router in that style They have the following form layer type hCost vCost jogCost hintCost He
88. subcommand As with Magic in general unique abbreviations of subcommands and most of their argu ments are permitted Case is generally ignored 3 Undo and Cntl C As with other Magic commands the results of iroute can be undone with undo and if the Irouter is taking too long it can be interrupted with Cntl C This makes it easy to refine the results of the Irouter by trial and error If you don t like the results of a route undo it tweak the Irouter parameters or hints you are using and try again If the Irouter is taking too long you can very likely speed things up by interrupting it resetting performance related parameters and trying again The details of parameters and hints are described later in this document Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 4 More about Making Connections iroute route Start points for routes can be specified via the cursor labels or coordinates Desti nation areas can be specified via the box labels coordinates or the selection In addition start and destination layers can be specified explicitly For the syntax of all these options type iroute help route When a start point lies on top of existing geometry it is assumed that a connection to that material is desired If this is not the case the desired starting layer must be explicitly specified When routing to the selection it is assumed that connection to the selected material is desired By default rou
89. subdirectories in contributed contains additional code that was contributed by some site outside of Berkeley Each sub directory should contain a file named ReadMe or something similar which explains how to install and use the code If you have any troubles with one of the these drivers you ll have to contact the people that contributed the driver we here at Berkeley don t know anything about them If the contributors wish to be contacted they will identify themselves in the ReadMe file If you need to build a new display driver we recommend starting with the routines for either the AED all the files in graphics with names like grAed1 c or the Sun names like grSunW1I c For stand alone displays the AED routines are probably the easiest to work from for integrated workstations with pre existing window packages the Sun routines may be easiest Copy the files into a new set for your display change the names of the routines and modify them to perform the equivalent functions on your display Write an initialization routine like aedSetDisplay and add information to the display type tables in graphics grMain c At this point you should be all set There shouldn t be any need to modify anything outside of the graphics module 10 Debugging and Wizard Commands Magic seems to work fine under the latest version of dbx such as the dbx found on the DECstation 3100 The Makefiles are set up to compile all files with the g switch which cr
90. terminals in the top level cell It only works with terminals in subcells or sub subcells etc Because of this the netlist editor does not permit you to select terminals in the top level cell If you click over such a terminal Magic prints an error message and refuses to make the selection If you left click over a terminal that is not currently in a net Magic creates a new net automatically If you didn t really want to make a new net you have several choices Either you can toggle the terminal out of its own net you can undo the select operation or you can click the No Net button in the netlist menu you can do this even while the cursor is in the square shape The No Net button removes all terminals from the current net and destroys the net It s a bad idea to leave single net terminals in the netlist the router will treat them as errors There are two ways to save netlists on disk these are similar to the ways you can save layout cells If you type savenetlist name with the cursor over the netlist menu the current netlist will be saved on disk in the file name net If no name is typed the name of the current netlist is used If you type the command writeall then Magic will step through all the netlists that have been modified since they were last written asking you if you d like them to be written out If you try to leave Magic without saving all the modified netlists Magic will warn you and give you a chance to wr
91. the file once for each path entry by prepending the path entry to the origi nal file name This concatenated name is stored in a static string and made available to the caller by setting prealName to point to it if prealName is non NULL and if the open succeeds If the entire path is tried and still nothing works then we try each entry in the library path libpath next The static string will be trashed on the next call to this routine Also no individual file name is allowed to be more than 200 char acters long excess characters are lost 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 PATH 3 CAD Tool User s Manual PATH 3 PaSubsWD replaces all uses of the working directory in a path by some fixed directory It returns a pointer to a path that is just like path except that every implicit or explicit use of the working directory is replaced by the newWD argument The result is a static array which will be trashed on the next call to this procedure PaEnum is used to call a client procedure with each directory in path prepended to the string file The client procedure is of the form func name cdata where name is a directory in the path prepended to file and cdata is the same as cdata passed to PaEnum This client procedure should return 0 normally or 1 to abort the path enumeration If a directory in the search path refers to a non existent user name using the user syntax we skip that component PaEnum returns 0 if al
92. the first style will be named default The keywords areacap perimcap and resist define the capacitance to substrate and the sheet resistivity of each of the Magic layers in a layout All capacitances that appear in the extract section are specified as an integral number of attofarads per unit area or perimeter and all resistances as an integral number of milliohms per square The areacap keyword is followed by a list of types and a capacitance to substrate as follows areacap types C Each of the types listed in types has a capacitance to substrate of C attofarads per square lambda Each type can appear in at most one areacap line If a type does not appear in any areacap line it is considered to have zero capacitance to substrate per unit area Since most analysis tools compute transistor gate capacitance directly from the area of the transistor s gate Magic should produce node capacitances that do not include gate capacitances To ensure this all transistors should have zero areacap values The perimcap keyword is followed by two type lists and a capacitance to substrate as follows perimcap intypes outtypes C Each edge that has one of the types in intypes on its inside and one of the types in out types on its outside has a capacitance to substrate of C attofarads per lambda This can also be used as an approximation of the effects due to the sidewalls of diffused areas As for areacap each unique combination of
93. the name counts when aborting the name search To cancel all name aborts and resume normal name searches type getnode abort getnode will no longer abort the search on any names and it will churn away unless interrupted by the user 5 RSIM Tool You can also use the mouse to help you run RSIM under Magic Instead of typing node names you can just select nodes with the mouse tell RSIM what to do with these nodes and let Magic do the rest Change tools by typing tool rsim or hit the space bar until the cursor changes to a pointing hand The RSIM tool is active when the cursor is this hand The left and right mouse buttons have the same have the same function as the box tool You use these buttons along with the select command to select the nodes The middle button is different from the box tool Clicking the middle button will cause all nodes in the selection to have their logical values displayed in the layout and printed in the text window We need to have RSIM running in order to use 4 Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic September 19 1990 this tool Start RSIM by typing startrsim tutlla rsm The rsm file you simulate must correspond to the root cell of the layout If not Magic will generate node names that RSIM will not understand and things won t work properly If any paint is changed in the circuit the circuit must be re extracted and a new rsm file must be created to reflect the changes in the c
94. the number of kilobytes by which the data segment has grown past its initial size If RS_TINCR is specified the parameters Jastt and deltat are set if they are non NULL Both point to tms structs the one pointed to by deltat is set to the difference between the current user system time and the time given in the tms struct pointed to by lastt the one pointed to by lastt is then set to the current user system time RunStatsRealTime reports the real time both since the first invocation and incremental since the last invo cation It returns a statically allocated string of the form x xx x x xx x where the first number is the amount of elapsed real time since the first call to RunStatsRealTime and the second is the amount of elapsed real time since the latest call BUGS The interfaces to RunStats and RunStatsRealTime should really be consistent SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 SET 3 CAD Tool User s Manual SET 3 NAME set procedures for setting parameters from strings and for printing their values SYNOPSIS Void SetNoisyInt parm valueS file int parm char valueS FILE file Void SetNoisyBool parm valueS file bool parm char valueS FILE file Void SetNoisyDI parm valueS file DoubleInt parm char valueS FILE file DESCRIPTION These procedures interpet a string and set a parameter accordingly Error messages are printed if the string doesn t make sense and in any event the
95. the right layer yourself The second problem is with arrays CIF has no standard array construct so when Magic outputs arrays it does it as a collection of cell instances When the CIF file is read back in each array element comes back as a separate subcell The array of tut9y cells is an example of this Most designs only have a few arrays that are large enough to matter where this is the case you should go back after reading the CIF and replace the multiple instances with a single array Calma format does have an array construct so it doesn t have this problem The third discrepancy is that where there are large contact areas when CIF is read and written the area of the contact may be reduced slightly This happened to the large 5 Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma September 19 1990 poly contact in tut9b The shrink doesn t reduce the effective area of the contact it just reduces the area drawn in Magic To see what s happening here place the box around tut9b and 1 expand everything then type cif see CCP This causes feedback to be displayed showing CIF layer CCP contact cut to poly You may have to zoom in a bit to distinguish the individual via holes Magic generates lots of small contact vias over the area of the contact and if contacts aren t exact multi ples of the hole size and spacing then extra space is left around the edges When the CIF is read back in this extra space isn
96. the subcells separately and generates CIF for them Finally it compares the CIF from the subcells with the CIF from the flattened parent Where there is a difference Magic outputs extra CIF in the parent to compensate Magic s hierarchical approach only works if the overall CIF for the parent ends up covering at least as much area as the CIFs for the individual components so all compen sation can be done by adding extra CIF to the parent In mathematical terms this requires each geometric operation to obey the rule Op A U B gt Op A U Op B The operations and or grow and shrink all obey this rule Unfortunately the and not bloat and squares operations do not For example if there are two partially overlapping tiles in different cells the squares generated from one of the cells may fall in the separa tions between squares in the other cell resulting in much larger areas of material than expected There are two ways around this problem One way is to use the design rules to prohibit problem situations from arising This applies mainly to the squares operator Tiles from which squares are made should never be allowed to overlap other such tiles in different cells unless the overlap is exact so each cell will generate squares in the same place You can use the exact_overlap design rule for this The second approach is to leave things up to the designer When generating CIF Magic issues warnings where there is less material in the c
97. tile is deleted from the database and the space occupied by it is reused TILE TPcreate_tile name A new empty tile is created and given the name name This name is used by the routine TPname_to_tile and in error messages The type TILE returned is a unique ID for the tile not the tile itself Currently this is implemented by defining the type TILE to be a pointer to the internal database representation of the tile int TPtile_exists name TRUE 1 is returned if a tile with the given name exists such as in the template or from a call to TPcreate_tile TILE TPname_to_tile name A value of type TILE is returned This value is a unique ID for the tile that has the name name This name comes from a call to TPcreate_tile or from the rectangular label that defined it in a template that was read in by TPread_tiles or TPinitialize If the tile does not exist then a value of NULL is returned and an error message is printed RECTANGLE TPsize_of_tile tile A rectangle is returned that is the same size as the tile tile The rectangle s lower left corner is located at the coordinate 0 0 All coordinates in mpack are specified in half lambda Painting and Placement Routines RECTANGLE TPpaint_tile from_tile to_tile ll_corner The tile from_tile is painted into the tile to_tile such that its lower left corner is placed at the point _corner in the tile to_tile The location of the newly painted area in the out put tile is returned as
98. to be circuit extracted independently Three kinds of overlaps are flagged as errors by the design rule checker First you may not overlap polysilicon in one subcell with diffusion in another cell in order to create transistors Second you may not overlap transistors or contacts in one cell with different kinds of transistors or contacts in another cell there are a few exceptions to this rule in some technologies Third if contacts from different cells overlap they must be the same type of contact and must coincide exactly you may not have partial overlaps This rule is necessary in order to guarantee that Magic can generate CIF for fabrication You will make life a lot easier on yourself and on Magic if you spend a bit of time to choose a clean hierarchical structure In general the less cell overlap the better If you use extensive overlaps you ll find that the tools run very slowly and that it s hard to make modifications to the circuit Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 6 Instance Identifiers Instance identifiers are used to distinguish the different subcells within a single parent The cell definition names cannot be used for this purpose because there could be many instances of a single definition Magic will create default instance id s for you when you create new instances with the get or copy commands The default id for an instance will be the name of the definition with a unique integer added on
99. tsrc tdst int x y GeoTransTranslate x y tsrc tdst Transform tsrc tdst int x y GeoTransTrans t1 t2 tdst Transform t1 t2 tdst GeoInvertTrans tsrc tinv Transform tsrc tinv int GeoScale t Transform t GeoDecomposeTransform t upsidedown angle Transform t bool upsidedown int angle int GeoNameToPos name manhattan printerrors char name bool manhattan printerrors char GeoPosToName pos int pos int GeoTransPos t pos Transform t int pos bool GeoInclude src dst Rect sre dst bool GeoIncludeAll src dst Rect sre dst bool GeoIncludePoint src dst Point src Rect dst GeoClip r cliparea Rect r cliparea GeoClipPoint p cliparea Point p Rect cliparea 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 GEOMETRY 3 CAD Tool User s Manual GEOMETRY 3 bool GeoDisjoint area cliparea func cdata Rect area cliparea bool func rect cdata ClientData cdata bool GeoDummyFunc rect cdata Rect rect ClientData cdata GeoCanonicalRect rsrc rdst Rect rsrc rdst int GeoRectPointSide r p Rect r Point p int GeoRectRectSide rl r2 Rect r1 r2 bool GetRect f nskip r FILE f int nskip Rect r DESCRIPTION These procedures implement a number of useful geometric primitives a Point which consists of an integer x and y coordinate and a Rect which describes a rectangle by its lower left and upper right Points
100. unnecessary layer changes in all nets in the current netlist to minimize via count The preferred rout ing layer layer1 in the router section of the technology file is favored by the algorithm Note that route viamin is an independent routing postpass that can be applied even if the routing was not generated by the route command provided the layers and widths agree with the router section of the technology file route vias int Print the value of the metal maximization via constant If a value is supplied set the via constant to the value The via constant measured in router grid units represents the tradeoff between metal maximization and the via count In many cases it is possible to convert wiring on the alternate routing layer into routing on the preferred routing layer metal at the expense of introducing one or two vias The via constant specifies the amount of converted wiring that makes it worthwhile to add vias to the routing rsim options filename Runs rsim under Magic See Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic for more informa tion on what options and files are required by rsim Normally IRSIM requires a parameter file for the technology and a sim file describing the circuit The rsim command without any options can be used to interact with a previously started rsim Type rsim and you will see the rsim prompt To get back to magic type q save name Save the edit cell on disk If the edi
101. various folks This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 technology suffix tech26 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking You should also read at least the first and probably all four of the papers on Magic that appeared in the ACM IEEE 21st Design Automation Conference and the paper Magic s Circuit Extractor which appeared in the ACM IEEE 22nd Design Auto mation Conference The overview paper from the DAC was also reprinted in JEEE Design and Test magazine in the February 1985 issue The circuit extractor paper also appeared in the February 1986 issue of JEEE Design and Test magazine Commands covered in this tutorial watch Macros covered in this tutorial none Changes since Magic version 4 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 Support for stacked contacts and more than two metal layers causing slight changes in the semantics of contact definitions Support for new Magic maze router Mzrouter see Tutorial 10 Support for new gate array router Garouter see Tutorial 12 Support for extractor extensions see Tutorial 8 Chunk sizes can now be specified explicitly for DRC and CIF output Unlike CIF calma scalefactors needn t be multiples of 2 any more 1 Introduction Magic is a technology independent layout editor All technology specific
102. you re in the middle of a large series of changes and don t care about design rule violations until the changes are finished You can stop the redisplay using the command see no errors After this command is typed design rule errors will no longer be displayed on the screen The design rule checker will continue to run and will store error information internally but it won t bother you by displaying it on the screen When you re ready to see errors again type see errors There can also be times when it s not the redisplay that s bothersome but the amount of CPU time the checker takes to recheck what you ve changed For example if a large subcell is moved to overlap another large subcell the entire overlap area will have to be rechecked and this could take several minutes If the prompt on the text screen is a character it means that the command has completed but the checker hasn t caught up yet You can invoke new commands while the checker is running and the checker will suspend itself long enough to process the new commands If the checker takes too long to interrupt itself and respond to your commands you have several options First you can hit the interrupt key often C on the keyboard This will stop the checker immediately and wait for your next command As soon as you issue a command or push a mouse button the checker will start up again To turn the checker off altogether type the command
103. you type help in different window types you ll see that the commands are different Some of the commands such as those to manipulate windows are valid in all windows but for other commands you must make sure you re pointing to the right kind of window or the command may be misinterpreted For example the extract command means one thing in a layout window and something totally different in a netlist window 5 Color Editing Special windows of type color are used to edit the red green and blue intensities of the colors displayed on the screen To create a color editing window invoke the com mand specialopen color number Number is optional if present it gives the octal value of the color number whose inten sities are to be edited If number isn t given 0 is used Try opening a color window on color 0 Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 A color editing window contains 6 color bars 12 color pumps one on each side of each bar plus a large rectangle at the top of the window that displays a swatch of the color being edited called the current color from now on The color bars display the components of the current color in two different ways The three bars on the left display the current color in terms of its red green and blue intensities these intensities are the values actually sent to the display The three bars on the right display the current color in terms
104. you can compare its contents to tut9b The first problem area is that CIF normally allows only point labels By default where you have line or box labels in Magic CIF labels are generated at the center of the Magic labels The label in in tut9y is an example of a line label that gets smashed in the CIF processing The command cif arealabels yes sets a switch telling Magic to use an extension to cif to output area labels This is not the default since many programs that take CIF as input do not understand this extension If you are reading a CIF file created by a tool other than Magic there is an addi tional problems with labels The CIF label construct 94 label x y layer has an optional layer field that indicates the layer to which a label is attached If reading a CIF file generated by Magic this field is always present and so a label s layer is unambigu ous However if the field is absent Magic must decide which layer to use It does this by looking to see what Magic layers lie beneath the label after the CIF has been read in When there are several layers it chooses the one appearing LATEST in the types section of the technology file Usually it s possible to ensure that the right layer is used by plac ing signal layers such as metal diffusion and poly later in the types section than layers such as pwell or nplus However sometimes Magic will still pick the wrong layer and it will be up to you to move the label to
105. 05 This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials and man pages to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started X 1 Commands covered in this tutorial none Macros covered in this tutorial none 1 Introduction This document provides information on Magic s X drivers that may be of help to system maintainers 2 Compiling the Correct X Driver for your system Unfortunately it is not possible to link with both the X10 and X11 libraries so you will have to compile Magic differently depending on the version of X that you are run ning 2 1 Compiling for X11 Magic Maintainer s Manual 4 September 19 1990 OONNMNFWNFR Relink magic Add the flag DX11 to misc DFLAGS Add 1X11 to magic LIBS Change the SRCS line in graphics Makefile to BASE_SRCS X11_SRCS Change the OBJS line to BASE_OBJS X11_OBJS Change the POBJS line to BASE_POBJS X11_POBJS Change the HELPER_SRCS line X11HELPER_SRCS Change the HELPER_SRCS line X11HELPER_PROG Compile the module graphics o 2 2 Compiling for X10 OMANINNBWN Relink magic Add the flag DX10 to misc DFLAGS Add 1X10 to magic LIBS Change the SRCS line in graphics Makefile to BASE_SRCS X10_SRCS Change the OBJS line to BASE_SRCS X10_OBJS Change the POBJS line to BASE_SRCS X10_POBJS Change the HELPER_SRCS line X1OHELPER_SRCS Change the HELPER_SRCS line X1O0HELPER_PROG Compile
106. 1 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 Metal Polysilicon P Diffusion N Diffusion Contacts P Fet N Fet x lt Figure 1 An example of how the logs are used The figure on the left shows actual mask layers for an CMOS inverter cell and the figure on the right shows the layers used to represent the cell in Magic An advantage of the logs used in Magic is that they simplify the design rules Most of the formation rules e g contact structure go away since Magic automatically gen erates correctly formed structures when it writes CIF All that are left are minimum size and spacing rules and Magic s abstract layers result in fewer of these than there would be otherwise This helps to make Magic s built in design rule checker very fast see Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking and is one of the reasons plowing is pos sible 12 Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing John Ousterhout Walter Scott Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read f
107. 2 Basic Painting and Selection Commands introduced in this tutorial array edit expand flush getcell identify load path see unexpand Macros introduced in this tutorial x X X 1 Introduction In Magic a layout is a hierarchical collection of cells Each cell contains three things paint labels and subcells Tutorial 2 showed you how to create and edit paint and labels This tutorial describes Magic s facilities for building up cell hierarchies Strictly speaking hierarchical structure isn t necessary any design that can be represented hierarchically can also be represented flat with all the paint and labels in a single cell However many things are greatly improved if you use a hierarchical structure including the efficiency of the design tools the speed with which you can enter the design and the ease with which you can modify it later Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 2 Selecting and Viewing Hierarchical Designs Hierarchical structure means that each cell can contain other cells as com ponents To look at an example of a hierarchical layout enter Magic with the shell com mand magic tut4a The cell tut4a contains four subcells plus some blue paint Two of the subcells are instances of cell tut4x and two are instances of tut4y Initially each subcell is displayed in unexpanded form This means that no details of the subcell are displayed all you see is th
108. 986 VLSI tools tape This is a release of Magic and IRSIM only You ll probably want to obtain other tools by ordering the 1986 VLSI Tools Tape from Berkeley This release has been prepared with the assistance of several groups Much of the new software came from Walter Scott s group at the Lawrence Livermore National Labs LLNL LLNL also provided partial funding to help prepare the release Digital Equip ment Corporation s Western Research Lab DECWRL helped out by providing com puter equipment a place to work and the services of one of us Robert Mayo Don Stark Michael Arnold and Gordon Hamachi also worked on the release at DECWRL Stanford donated significant pieces of new code including a simulation system called IRSIM Other individuals and institutions have also contributed code and assistance in ways too numerous to detail here New features in Magic Version 6 include New and Improved Routing Michael Arnold and Walter Scott of LLNL Three major routing improvements have been made in this version of Magic There is a new improved global router courtesy of Walter Scott of LLNL Walter Scott has also added a gate array router See the garoute command in the manual page for details Michael Arnold of LLNL has writ ten an interactive maze router that allows the user to specify hints to control the routing See the documentation for the iroute command Extractor Enhancements Don Stark of Stanford and Walter Scott o
109. A point is computed such that when added to the point p2 gives the point p p1 is nor mally a corner of a rectangle within a tile and p2 is normally a corner of a tile In this case the point computed can be treated as the location for the placement of the tile For example TPpaint_tile outtile fromtile align rUL rect tLL fromtile will paint the tile fromtile into outtile such that the lower left corner of fromtile is aligned with the upper left corner of rect In this example rect would probably be something returned from a previous TPpaint_tileQ call Point and Rectangle Addition Routines POINT TPadd_pp p p2 POINT TPsub_pp p p2 The points p and p2 are added or subtracted and the result is returned as a point In the subtract case p2 is subtracted from p1 RECTANGLE TPadd_rp 7 p RECTANGLE TPsub_rp v p1 The rectangle rJ has the point p added or subtracted from it This has the effect of displacing the rectangle in the X and or Y dimensions Miscellaneous Functions int TPget_lambda This function returns the current value of lambda in centi microns INTERFACE DATA STRUCTURES In those cases where tiles must be placed using absolute half lambda coordinates it is useful to know that RECTANGLEs and POINTs are defined as typedef struct int x_left x_right y_top y_bot RECTANGLE typedef struct int x y POINT The variable origin_point is predefined to be 0 0 origin_rect is defined to
110. Center Martin Harriman of Silicon Engineering wrote a select less command for Magic during the beta test phase Select less has been a much requested feature In addition to the persons named above there were many other beta test users of Magic at these and other sites too many to list here We appreciate their help We also acknowledge the help of the pre release sites who tested a version that included most of the fixes from the beta test phase EXT2DLYS 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2DLYS 1 NAME ext2dlys create a SCALD wire delays file from a tree of ext files SYNOPSIS ext2dlys d psPerPf l psPerCentimicron m minmult maxmult o outfile t capscale D drivefile I iload L netfile M gt scaldmapfile O oload extcheck options file DESCRIPTION Ext2dlys is used to produce a SCALD wire delays file in dlys 5 format on standard output to be used in simulation and timing verification It computes the wire delay information from capacitance in the circuit extracted from a layout by magic 1 The filename file given to ext2dlys is the name of the root ext file of the extracted circuit and also of the net file The ext files in ext 5 format contain the capacitance to substrate for each electrical node specify the connectivity of the circuit and also give distance information The net file in net 5 format lists the nets and terminals in the circuit that will be pres
111. D Tool User s Manual EXTFLAT 3 typedef struct efnn EFNodeName typedef struct efnhdr EFNodeHdr typedef struct efnode EFNode typedef struct fet Fet DESCRIPTION This module provides procedures for reading flattening and traversing the hierarchical extracted circuits in ext 5 format produced by the Magic circuit extractor To use the procedures in this library a client should first call EFJnit to initialize various hash tables When a client is finally finished with this library and wishes to free up any remaining memory used by it EFDone should be called COMMAND LINE ARGUMENT PROCESSING The procedure EFArgs is provided for parsing of command line flags it should be passed the arguments to main It will scan through them recognizing those specific to extflat see extcheck 1 for a list of these arguments and passing unrecognized arguments to the user supplied procedure argsProc which should update pargc and pargv to point after each argument it recognizes or else print an error message if the argument is unrecognized If it is necessary to pass any additional information to argsProc the cdata argu ment of EFArgs is automatically passed as the third argument to argsProc If argsProc is NULL any arguments not recognized by EFArgs are considered to be errors EFArgs considers any argument not beginning with a dash to be a filename of which there can be at most one The argumen
112. File For this technology Magic doesn t know how to make contacts directly between purple and red 2 4 Wiring and the Box In the examples so far each new wire leg appeared to be drawn from the end of the previous leg to the cursor position In fact however the new material was drawn from the box to the cursor position Magic automatically repositions the box on each button click to help set things up for the next leg Using the box as the starting point for wire legs makes it easy to start wires in places that don t already have material of the right type and width Suppose that you want to start a new wire in the middle of an empty area You can t left click to get the wire started there Instead you can left click some other place where there s the right material for the wire type the space bar twice to get back the box tool move the box where you d like the wire to start hit the space bar once more to get back the wiring tool and then right click to paint the wire Try this out on tut3a When you first start wiring you may not be able to find the right kind of material anywhere on the screen When this happens you can select the wiring material and width with the command wire type layer width Then move the box where you d like the wire to start switch to the wiring tool and right click to add legs 2 5 Wiring and the Selection Each time you paint a new wire leg or contact using the wiring commands Magic
113. IC 1 process specific identifier dotsPerInch Indicates how many dots per inch there are on the Versatec printer This param eter is used only for computing the scale factor for plotting Must be an integer greater than zero labelFont The name of the font to use for labels in Versatec plots This must be a file in Vfont format printer The name of the printer to which to spool Versatec raster files showcellnames If true the default then the name and instance identifier of each unexpanded subcell is displayed inside its bounding box If this parameter is false then only the bounding box of the cell is displayed spoolCommand The command used to spool Versatec raster files This must be a text string con taining two s formatting fields The first s will be replaced with the printer name and the second one will be replaced with the name of the raster file swathHeight How many raster lines of Versatec output to generate in memory at one time The raster file is generated in swaths in order to keep the memory requirements reasonable This parameter determines the size of the swaths It must be an integer greater than zero and should be a multiple of 16 in order to avoid misalignment of stipple patterns width The number of pixels across the Versatec printer Must be an integer greater than 0 and must be an even multiple of 32 plot versatec size ayers Generate a raste
114. IF output If no style argument is provided then Magic prints the names of all CIF output styles defined in the technology file and identifies the current style If style is provided it is made the current style cif read file The file file cif is read in CIF format and converted to a collection of Magic cells The current input style determines how the CIF layers are converted to Magic layers The new cells are marked for design rule checking Any information in the top level CIF cell is copied into the edit cell Note this command is not undo able it would waste too much space and time to save information for undoing cif see layer In this command ayer must be the CIF name for a layer in the current output style 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 6 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 Magic will display on the screen all the CIF for that layer that falls under the box using stippled feedback areas It s a bad idea to look at CIF over a large area since this com mand requires the area under the box to be flattened and therefore is slow cif statistics Prints out statistics gathered by the CIF generator as it operates This is probably not useful to anyone except system maintainers cif write fileName Writes out CIF just as if no arguments had been entered except that the CIF is written into fileName cif instead of using the root cell name for the file name The current output style controls how CIF layers are generated from M
115. Kill deallocates the storage associated with a heap If func is non NULL it is applied to each element in the heap A common use of func is to free the storage associated with string ids in the heap such as is necessary when the heap was created with stringids set to TRUE in the call to HeapInit above A library function HeapFreelIdFunc is provided for this purpose HeapRemoveTop places the top element from h in the HeapEntry pointed to by entry and returns entry However if the heap was empty HeapRemoveTop returns NULL HeapRemoveTop always removes the smallest if keys are ascending or largest if keys are descending element from the heap 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 HEAP 3 CAD Tool User s Manual HEAP 3 HeapAdd is used to add a new entry to h The new entry has an integer key of key and a value of id If the heap was created with stringids to be TRUE in HeapInit then id is interpreted as a NULL terminated ASCII string sufficient additional memory to hold this string is allocated the string is copied into this new memory and a pointer to this new memory is stored with the heap entry Otherwise the value of id is just stored directly in the heap entry BUGS The management of the he_id field should be consistent with the management of keys for hash tables i e multi word structures should be supported along with strings and single word values SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 List 3 CAD Tool Use
116. LAY_STYLES SECTION The first section begins with a line display_styles planes where planes is the number of bits of color infor mation per pixel on the screen between 1 and 8 Each line after that describes one display style and con tains eight fields separated by white space style writeMask color outline fill stipple shortName longName The meanings of the fields are Style The number of this style in decimal Styles 1 through 64 are used to display mask layers in the edit cell The style number s to use for each mask layer is are specified in the technology file Styles 65 128 are used for displaying mask layers in non edit cells If style x is used for a mask layer in the edit cell style x 64 is used for the same mask layer in non edit cells Styles above 128 are used by the Magic code for various things like menus and highlights See the file styles h in Magic for how styles above 128 are used When redisplaying the styles are drawn in order starting at 1 so the order of styles may affect what appears on the screen writeMask This is an octal number specifying which bit planes are to be modified when this style is rendered For example 1 means only information in bit plane 0 will be affected and 377 means all eight bit planes are affected color An octal number specifying the new values to be written into the bit planes that are modified This is used along with writeMask to determine the new value of each pixel that s being modified
117. MMANDS FOR ALL WINDOWS Unique abbreviations are acceptable for all keywords in com mands The commands are addpath searchpath Add more directories to the end of Magic s cell search path See the documentation for the path command for an explanation of the search path array xsize ysize Make many copies of the selection There will be xsize instances in the x direction and ysize instances in the y direction Paint and labels are arrayed by copying them Subcells are not copied but instead each instance is turned into an array instance with elements numbered from 0 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 4 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 to xsize 1 in the x direction and from 0 to ysize 1 in the y direction The spacing between ele ments of the array is determined by the box x and y dimensions array xlo ylo xhi yhi Identical to the form of array above except that the elements of arrayed cells are numbered left to right from xlo to xhi and bottom to top from ylo to yhi It is legal for xlo to be greater than xhi and also for ylo to be greater than yhi box args Used to change the size of the box or to find out its size There are several sorts of arguments that may be given to this command No arguments Show the box size and its location in the edit cell or root cell of its window if the edit cell isn t in that window direction distance Move the box distance units in direction which may be one of left righ
118. Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 Global name Vdd not fully connected One portion contains the names left Vdd The other portion contains the names center Vdd I m merging the two pieces into a single node but you should be sure eventually to connect them in the layout Global name Vdd not fully connected One portion contains the names left Vdd center Vdd The other portion contains the names right Vdd I m merging the two pieces into a single node but you should be sure eventually to connect them in the layout Memory used 56k The warning messages are telling you that the global name Vdd isn t completely wired in the layout The flattener warns you but goes ahead and connects the pieces together anyway to allow you to simulate the circuit as though it had been completely wired The output of ext2sim will be three files tut8n sim tut8n al and tut8n nodes see ext2sim 1 or sim 5 for more information on the contents of these files Magic Tutorial 11 Using RSIM with Magic explains how to use the output of ext2sim with the switch level simulator rsim 1 15 Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Get
119. Mark the area under the box for rechecking in all cells that intersect the box The recheck will occur in background after the command completes This command is not normally necessary since Magic automatically remembers which areas need to be rechecked It should only be needed if the design rules are changed dre count Print the number of errors in each cell under the box Cells with no errors are skipped dre find nth Place the box over the nth error area in the selected cell or edit cell and print out infor mation about the error just as if dre why had been typed If nth isn t given or is less than 1 the command moves to the next error area Successive invocations of dre find cycle through all the error tiles in the cell If multiple cells are selected this command uses the upper leftmost one If no cells are selected this command uses the edit cell drc help Print a short synopsis of all the drc command options dre off Turn off the background checker From now on Magic will not recheck design rules immediately after each command but it will record the areas that need to be rechecked the command drc on can be used to restart the checker drcon Turn on the background checker The checker will check whatever modifications have not already been checked From now on the checker will reverify modified areas as they result from commands The checker is run in the background not synchronously with commands so it may get temporari
120. Name Writes a stream file just as if no arguments had been entered except that the output is written into fileName strm instead of using the root cell name for the file name channels This command will run just the channel decomposition part of the Magic router deriving channels for the area under the box The channels will be displayed as outlined feedback areas over the edit cell cif option args Read or write files in Caltech Intermediate Form CIF If no arguments are given this command generates a CIF file for the window beneath the cursor in file cif where file is the name of the root cell The CIF file describes the entire cell hierarchy in the window Option and args may be used to invoke one of several additional CIF operations cif arealabels yes no Enables disables the cif area label extension If enabled area labels are written via the 95 cif extension If disabled labels are collapsed to points when writing cif and the 94 cif construct is used Area labels are disabled by default many programs don t under stand cif area labels cif help Print a short synopsis of all of the cif command options cif istyle style Select the style to be used for CIF input If no style argument is provided then Magic prints the names of all CIF input styles defined in the technology file and identifies the current style If style is provided it is made the current style cif ostyle style Select the style to be used for C
121. OS Microproces sor with High Ratio of Sustained to Peak Performance Norman P Jouppi and Jeffrey Y F Tang WRL Research Report 89 11 July 1989 The Distribution of Instruction Level and Machine Parallelism and Its Effect on Performance Norman P Jouppi WRL Research Report 89 13 July 1989 Long Address Traces from RISC Machines Generation and Analysis Anita Borg R E Kessler Georgia Lazana and David W Wall WRL Research Report 89 14 September 1989 Link Time Code Modification David W Wall WRL Research Report 89 17 September 1989 Noise Issues in the ECL Circuit Family Jeffrey Y F Tang and J Leon Yang WRL Research Report 90 1 January 1990 Efficient Generation of Test Patterns Boolean Satisfiablilty Tracy Larrabee WRL Research Report 90 2 February 1990 Using Two Papers on Test Pattern Generation Tracy Larrabee WRL Research Report 90 3 March 1990 Virtual Memory vs The File System Michael N Nelson WRL Research Report 90 4 March 1990 Efficient Use of Workstations for Passive Monitor ing of Local Area Networks Jeffrey C Mogul WRL Research Report 90 5 July 1990 A One Dimensional Thermal Model for the VAX 9000 Multi Chip Units John S Fitch WRL Research Report 90 6 July 1990 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic Release Robert N Mayo Michael H Arnold Walter S Scott
122. References 1 M H Arnold and W S Scott An Interactive Maze Router with Hints Proceed ings of the 25th Design Automation Conference June 1988 pp 672 676 Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic Michael Chow Mark Horowitz Computer Systems Laboratory Center for Integrated Systems Stanford University Stanford CA 94305 This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction Commands introduced in this tutorial getnode rsim simcmd startrsim Macros introduced in this tutorial none 1 Introduction This tutorial explains how to use Magic s interface to the switch level circuit simu lators RSIM and IRSIM The interface is the same for both these simulators and except where noted RSIM refers to IRSIM as well This interface eliminates the tedium of mapping node names to objects in the layout and typing node names as RSIM input It allows the user to select nodes using the mouse and apply RSIM commands to them or to display the node values determined by RSIM in the layout itself You should already be familiar with using both RSIM and Magic s circuit extractor Section 2 describes how to prepare the files necessary to simulate a circuit Section 3 describes how to run RSIM interactively under Magic Section 4 explain
123. SIM commands We ll first run RSIM then escape to Magic and then return back to RSIM Type the RSIM command tutlla cmd wow to initialize the simulation Note there is a after the Now type c to clock the cir cuit You should see some information about some nodes displayed followed by the time Set two of the nodes to a logic 1 by typing h RESET_B hold Step the clock again by typing c and RSIM should show that these two nodes now have the value 1 You can return to Magic without quitting RSIM and then later return to RSIM in the same state in which it was left Escape to Magic by typing a single period to the RSIM prompt Next type a few Magic commands to show you re really back in Magic signified by the Magic prompt You can return to RSIM by typing the Magic command rsim without any argu ments Type rsim The RSIM prompt will be displayed again and you are now back in RSIM in the state you left it in Experiment with RSIM by typing some commands To quit RSIM and return to Magic type q in response to the RSIM prompt You ll know you re back in Magic when the Magic prompt is redisplayed If you should interrupt RSIM typing a control C you ll prob ably kill it and then have to restart it RSIM running standalone will also be killed if you interrupt it If you interrupt IRSIM typing a control C the simulator will abort what ever it s doing a long simulation run for example and return t
124. September 1990 WRL Research Report 90 7 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic Release Robert N Mayo Michael H Arnold Walter S Scott Don Stark Gordon T Hamachi djijo i tlal Western Research Laboratory 100 Hamilton Avenue Palo Alto California 94301 USA The Western Research Laboratory WRL is a computer systems research group that was founded by Digital Equipment Corporation in 1982 Our focus is computer science research relevant to the design and application of high performance scientific computers We test our ideas by designing building and using real systems The systems we build are research prototypes they are not intended to become products There is a second research laboratory located in Palo Alto the Systems Research Cen ter SRC Other Digital research groups are located in Paris PRL and in Cambridge Massachusetts CRL Our research is directed towards mainstream high performance computer systems Our prototypes are intended to foreshadow the future computing environments used by many Digital customers The long term goal of WRL is to aid and accelerate the development of high performance uni and multi processors The research projects within WRL will address various aspects of high performance computing We believe that significant advances in computer systems do not come from any single technological advance Technologies both hardware and software do not all advance at the same pace Sy
125. Subs column for all transistors are different Since each transistor in this design has a dif ferent gate attribute attached to it shown in bold in the table e g N1 P2 etc we ll use them in the following discussion The simplest two transistors are N3 and P3 which don t appear in any explicitly drawn wells The substrate terminals for these are GND and Vdd respectively since that s what the technology file says is the default for the two types of transistors N1 and P1 are standard transistors that lie in wells tied to the ground and power rails labelled in this cell as Vss 0 and Vdd 0 respectively They re not labelled GND and Vdd so you ll see the difference between N1 and N3 P2 lies in a well that is tied to a different bias voltage VBias such as might occur in an analog design Finally N2 is in a well that isn t tied to any wire The substrate node appears as Float because that s the label that was attached to the well surrounding N2 The ability to extract transistor substrate nodes allows you to perform a simple check for whether or not transistors are in properly connected e g grounded wells Ina p well CMOS process for example you might set the default substrate node for n channel transistors to be some distinguished global node other than ground e g NSub strateNode You could then extract the circuit flatten it using ext2spice 1 which preserves substrate nodes unlike ext2sim 1 which ignores the
126. TE T1 Each describes one of the terminals of the transistor the first describes the gate and the remainder describe the transistor s non gate terminals e g source and drain Each triple consists of the name of a node connecting to that terminal a terminal length and an attribute list The terminal length is in centimicrons it is the length of that segment of the channel perimeter connecting to adjacent material such as polysilicon for the gate or diffusion for a source or drain The attribute list is either the single token 0 meaning no attributes or a comma separated list of strings The strings in the attribute list come from labels attached to the transistor Any label ending in the character is considered a gate attribute and appears on the gate s attribute list minus the trailing Gate attributes may lie either along the border of a channel or in its inte rior Any label ending in the character is considered a non gate attribute It appears on the list of the terminal along which it lies also minus the trailing Non gate attributes may only lie on the border of the channel The keywords in this section describe information that is not processed hierarchically path lengths and accurate resistances that are computed by flattening an entire node and then producing a value for the flattened node killnode node During resistance extraction it is sometimes necessa
127. Technology File September 19 1990 Parameter Meaning typel Material on first side of edge type2 Material on second side of edge d Distance to check on second side of edge OKTypes List of layers that are permitted within d units on second side of edge OKTypes 0 means never OK cornerTypes List of layers that cause corner extension cornerTypes 0 means no corner extension cornerDist Amount to extend constraint area when cornerTypes matches plane Plane on which to check constraint region defaults to same plane as type and type2 and cornerTypes Table 13 The parts of an edge based rule edge4way nfet ndiff 2 ndiff ndc ndiff 2 Diffusion must overhang transistor by at least 2 Not only are edge4way rules checked in all four directions but the corner extension is performed on both sides of the edge For example when checking a rule from left to right the corner extension is performed both to the top and to the bottom Edge4way rules take twice as much time to check as edge rules so it s to your advantage to use edge rules wherever you can edge4way ppcont ppd ndiff ndc nfet 3 ndiff ndc nfet ndiff ndc nfet 3 Ndiff must be 3 wide if it abuts ppcont or ppd MOSIS rule edge4way allPoly Poly contact must be at least 3 from other poly MOSIS rule 5B 4 5 edge4way allPoly Via must be on a flat surface MOSIS rule 8 4 5 metal2
128. The first three integers are red green and blue intensities and the fourth field is a color number For current displays the intensities must be integers between 0 and 255 The color numbers must increase from line to line and the last line must have a color number of 255 The red green and blue intensities on the first line are used for all colors from 0 up to and including the color number on that line For other lines the intensities on that line are used for all colors starting one color above the color number on the previous line and continuing up and through the color number on the current line For example consider the color map below 255 0 0 2 0 0 255 3 255 255 255 256 This color map indicates that colors 0 1 and 2 are to be red color 3 is to be blue and all other colors are to be white SEE ALSO magic 1 dstyle 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 DISPLAYS 5 CAD Tool User s Manual DISPLAYS 5 NAME displays Display Configuration File DESCRIPTION FILES The interactive graphics programs Caesar Magic and Gremlin use two separate terminals a text terminal from which commands are issued and a color graphics terminal on which graphical output is displayed These programs use a displays file to associate their text terminal with its corresponding display device The displays file is an ASCII text file with one line for each text terminal graphics terminal pair Each line contains 4 items separated by spac
129. There s no existing contact between glass and metal2 so the image on the oxide plane must be generated automati cally by Magic However there is already a contact that connects the component types metall and metal2 namely m2c so this is used as the image of pad on the metall plane 4 Specifying Type lists In several places in the technology file you ll need to specify groups of tile types For example in the connect section you ll specify groups of tiles that are mutually con nected These are called type lists and there are several ways to specify them The sim plest form for a type list is a comma separated list of tile types for example poly ndiff pcontact ndc The null list no tiles at all is indicated by zero i e 0 There must not be any spaces in the type list Type lists may also use tildes to select all tiles but a specified set and parentheses for grouping For example pcontact ndc selects all tile types but pcontact and ndc When a contact name appears in a type list it selects all images of the contact unless a is used to indicate a particular one The example above will not select any of the images of pcontact or ndc Slashes can also be used in conjunction with parentheses and tildes For example pcontact ndc active metal1 selects all of the tile types on the active plane except for pcontact and ndc and also selects metall Tildes have higher operator precedence than
130. There is another way to reduce the number of jogs introduced by plowing Instead of avoiding jogs in the first place plowing can introduce them freely but clean them up as much as possible afterward This results in more dense layouts but possibly more jogs than if you had enabled plow nojogs To take advantage of this second method for jog reduction re enable jog insertion plow jogs and enable jog cleanup with the com mand plow straighten From now on Magic will attempt to straighten out jogs after each plow operation To disable straightening use the command plow nostraighten It might seem pointless to disable jog introduction with plow nojogs at the same time straightening is enabled with plow straighten While it is true that plow nojogs won t introduce any new jogs for plow straighten to clean up plowing will straighten out any existing jogs after each operation In fact there is a separate command that is sometimes useful for cleaning up layouts with many jogs namely the command straighten direction where direction is a Manhattan direction e g up down right or left This command will start from one side of the box and pull jogs toward that side to straighten them Load the cell tut3g place the box over the label put box here and type straighten left Undo the last command and type straighten right instead Play around with the straighten command There is one more feature of plowing that i
131. These procedures implement a simple stack mechanism allowing stacks containing an arbitrary number of one word elements to be created manipulated and destroyed StackNew creates and returns a new Stack This stack grows automatically as new items are pushed on it The number of new elements for which space is added each time the stack grows is specified by sincr When the stack is through being used StackFree frees it Elements can be pushed on the stack using StackPush The top of the stack can be viewed without remov ing it by using StackLook or removed by StackPop Both return the top element from the stack or NULL if the stack is empty Fast macro versions exist for each of these functions STACKPUSH STACKLOOK and STACKPOP To test whether stack is empty one can call StackEmpty which returns TRUE if the stack is empty or FALSE if it contains any entries 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic STACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual STACK 3 StackEnum visits all the elements in stack without popping them It applies func to each element The arguments to func are item the stack element being visited i its index on the stack 1 for the top of the stack increasing as one moves down the stack and the same cdata as was passed to StackEnum If func returns a non zero value the enumeration of the stack aborts and StackEnum returns 1 otherwise StackEnum returns 0 after visiting all elements in the stack StackCopy is used to
132. This is primarily useful when extracting subcells where the transistors driving a given signal may be located in a different cell 4 2 4 Technology File Changes Certain changes must be made in the extract section of the technology file to sup port resistance extraction These include the fetresist and contact lines plus a small change to the fet line Full details can be found in Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The only thing to note is that contrary to the documentation the gecap and gscap parts of the fet line MUST be set the resistance extractor uses them to calculate RC time constants for the circuit 5 Extraction Details and Limitations This section explores in greater depth what gets extracted by Magic as well as the limitations of the circuit extractor A detailed explanation of the format of the ext files output by Magic may be found in the manual page ext 5 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File describes how extraction parameters are specified for the extractor Figure 1 Each node extracted by Magic has a lumped resistance R and a lumped capaci tance C to the substrate These lumped values can be interpreted as in the diagram above in which each device connected to the node is attached to one of the points Z 2 N 5 1 Nodes Magic approximates the pieces of interconnect between transistors as nodes A node is like an equipotential region but also includes a lumped
133. TraceInit to create the trace file name Tracing won t actually begin however until you call mallocTraceEnable From that point until mallocTraceDisable all calls to malloc Magic or freeMagic or their corresponding macro versions MALLOC and FREE will be logged to the trace file Calls to mallocTraceDisable and mallocTraceEnable may be nested only the outermost malloc TraceEnable has any effect If more selective tracing is desired you can specify that trace information is to be output only for certain addresses Calling mallocTraceOnlyWatched with only equal to TRUE causes this to happen An address addr is added to the list of addresses to trace by calling mallocTraceWatch or removed from this list by calling mallocTraceUnWatch When mallocTraceOnlyWatched is called with only equal to FALSE operation reverts to the normal mode of tracing all addresses When you are finished with all memory allocation tracing and want to flush all results out to the trace file call mallocTraceDone Subsequent calls to the memory allocator will not be traced The MALLOC and FREE macros are syntactically clumsy but unfortunately some C optimizers have trou ble with syntactically cleaner forms 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 MALLOC 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MALLOC 3 The ability to trace specific addresses is only useful if you know which ones to watch A more generally useful facility would probably be to watch certain sizes of objects or to all
134. Unfortunately there is no way to check this rule in Magic without being extremely conservative the rule would have to require no poly whatsoever on the diffu sion side even if the poly was connected to the buried contact So for now this rule is not checked Be careful Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 2 7 Transistor Spacings Diffusion Efet x a Efet Dfet Dcap aa r Transistors must be spaced at least 1 unit from any contact to metal in order to keep the contact from shorting the transistor In addition buried contacts must be at least 4 units from enhancement transistors in the diffusion direction This rule applies only to the side of buried contact where diffusion leaves the contact 2 8 Hierarchical Constraints The design rule checker enforces several constraints on how subcells may overlap The general rule is that overlaps may be used to connect portions of cells but the over laps must not change the structure of the circuit Thus for example it is acceptable for poly in one cell to overlap poly metal contact in another cell but it is not acceptable for poly in one cell to overlap diffusion in another thereby forming a transistor For contacts there are additional restrictions A contact in one cell may not overlap a contact in any other cell unless the two contacts have same type and they occupy exactly the same area Partial overlaps are not per
135. Y 3 CAD Tool User s Manual GEOMETRY 3 The first four forms correspond to clockwise rotations of 0 90 180 and 270 degrees and the second four correspond to the same four orientations flipped upside down mirror across the x axis after rotating The above rotations or mirrorings with a scale factor of 1 exist as predefined transforms Geoldenti tyTransform is the identity transformation i e no transformation at all or the first transform listed above Geo90Transform Geo180Transform and Geo270Transform correspond to the next three transformations or clockwise rotations of 90 180 and 270 degrees respectively GeoUpsideDownTransform is the next transform mirroring across the x axis GeoSidewaysTransform is the seventh transform corresponding to mirroring across the y axis The remaining two transforms above the sixth and eighth don t have any predefined transforms but can be built by composing predefined transforms using GeoTransTrans see below A number of macros exist for determining relationships between Points and Rects GEO_OVERLAP is TRUE if two rectangles share some area in common GEO_TOUCH is TRUE if two rectangles share some area or any part of their perimeters including touching only at a corner GEO_SURROUND is TRUE if rl completely surrounds r2 where the boundaries of r and r2 are allowed to touch GEO_SURROUND_STRONG is like GEO_SURROUND but is only TRUE if r7 completely surrounds r2 without their borders touchi
136. a character from Magic over file descriptor requestFD If this character is an EOF then the program terminates If this character is an A then grSunProg responds with a P and the current mouse coordinates over file descriptor pointFD This string is followed by a newline Example P 101 23 means that the mouse is currently at location 101 23 SEE ALSO magic 1 grsunprog2 1 AUTHOR Robert N Mayo 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 NAME magic VLSI layout editor SYNOPSIS magic T technology d device_type g graphics_port m monitor_type i tablet_port D E object_file save_file file DESCRIPTION Magic is an interactive editor for VLSI layouts that runs under 4 3 BSD Unix as well as derivatives such as Digital s Ultrix and Sun s SunOS This man page is a reference manual if you are a first time user you should use the Magic tutorials in The 1989 Livermore DEC WRL Magic Release to get acquainted with the system Magic runs in two different configurations For workstations with an integrated color display one window of the screen is used to display text Commands and Magic s responses and other windows are used for displaying layouts in color In older systems using serial line terminals Magic uses two terminals one for text and a separate color display for displaying layouts In these systems you should run Magic from the
137. a value of type RECTANGLE The tile to_tile is often an empty tile made by TPcreate_tile The point _corner is almost never provided directly it is usually generated by routines such as align TPdisp_tile from_tile ll_corner A rectangle the size of from_tile with the lower left corner located at i_corner is returned Note that this routine behaves exactly like the routine TPpaint_tile except that no output tile is modified This routine in conjunction with the align routine is useful 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 20 85 2 MPACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MPACK 3 for controlling the overlap of tiles RECTANGLE TPpaint_cell from_tile to_tile ll_corner This routine behaves like TPpaint_tile except that the from_tile is placed as a subcell rather than painted into place The tile from_tile must exist in the file system i e it must have been read in from disk or have been written out to disk Label Manipulation Routines TPplace_label tile rect label_name A label named abel_name is place in the tile tile The size and location of the label is the given by the RECTANGLE rect int TPfind_label tile amp rectl str amp rect2 The tile tile is searched for a label of name str The location of the first such label found is returned in the rectangle rect2 The function returns 1 if such a label was found and 0 otherwise The rectangle pointer amp rect1 if non NULL restricts the search to an area of the tile TP
138. abel layer subcell Subcell layer Layer masks may be formed by constructing comma separated lists of individual layer names The indivi dual layer names may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviations are unique For example to indicate polysilicon and n diffusion use poly ndiff or ndiff poly The special character causes all subsequent layers to be subtracted from the layer mask For example p means all layers but polysilicon The special character reverses the effect of a previous all subsequent layers are once again added to the layer mask SEE ALSO magicusage 1 ext2sim 1 sleeper 1 fsleeper 1 rsleeper 1 cmap 5 dstyle 5 ext 5 glyphs 5 magic 5 displays 5 net 5 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection etc Magic Technology Manual 2 SCMOS etc 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 27 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 FILES Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers etc cad lib magic sys magic startup file to create default macros magic user specific startup command file cad lib magic nmos some standard nmos cells cad lib magic scmos some standard scmos cells cad lib magic sys cmap colormap files see CMAP 5 man page cad lib magic sys dstyle display style files see DSTYLE 5 man page cad lib magic sys glyphs cursor and window bitmap files see GLYPH 5 ma
139. ability if there is mask material in the routing areas the router can work under over or around that material to complete the connections This means that you can pre route key signals by hand and have Magic route the less important signals automatically In addition you can route power and ground by hand right now we don t have any power ground routing tools so you have to route them by hand The router only makes connections between subcells to make point to point con nections between pieces of layout within a single cell you should use the wiring com mand described in Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing or the maze router described in Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router If you only need to make a few connections you are probably better off doing them manually The first step in routing is to tell Magic what should be connected to what This information is contained in a file called a netlist Sections 2 3 4 and 5 describe how to create and modify netlists using Magic s interactive netlist editing tools Once you ve created a netlist the next step is to invoke the router Section 6 shows how to do this and gives a brief summary of what goes on inside the routing tools Unless your design is very simple and has lots of free space the routing probably won t succeed the first time Section 7 describes the feedback provided by the routing tools Sections 8 and 9 discuss how you ca
140. ach area covers the portion of the layout that caused the error Each area also has an error message associated with it which you can see by using the feedback command Type feedback help while in Magic for assis tance in using the feedback command The extractor will always report extraction errors These are problems in the layout that may cause the output of the extractor to be incorrect The layout should be fixed to eliminate extraction errors before attempting to simulate the circuit otherwise the results of the simulation may not reflect reality Extraction errors can come from violations of transistor rules There are two rules about the formation of transistors no transistor can be formed and none can be des troyed as a result of cell overlaps For example it is illegal to have poly in one cell overlap diffusion in another cell as that would form a transistor in the parent where none was present in either child It is also illegal to have a buried contact in one cell overlap a transistor in another as this would destroy the transistor Violating these transistor rules will cause design rule violations as well as extraction errors These errors only relate to circuit extraction the fabricated circuit may still work it just won t be extracted correctly In general it is an error for material of two types on the same plane to overlap or abut if they don t connect to each other For example in CMOS it is illegal for p diffu
141. agic doesn t know which serial line to use To learn how to fix this read about the g switch in the magic 1 manual page Also read the displays 5 manual page 5 The Box and the Cursor Two things called the box and the cursor are used to select things on the color display As you move the mouse the cursor moves on the screen The cursor starts out with a crosshair shape but you ll see later that its shape changes as you work to provide feedback about what you re doing The left and right mouse buttons are used to position the box If you press the left mouse button and then release it the box will move so that its lower left corner is at the cursor position If you press and release the right mouse button the upper right corner of the box will move to the cursor position but the lower left corner will not change These two buttons are enough to position the box anywhere on the screen Try using the buttons to place the box around each of the colored rectan gles on the screen Sometimes it is convenient to move the box by a corner other than the lower left To do this press the left mouse button and hold it down The cursor shape changes to show you that you are moving the box by its lower left corner While holding the button down move the cursor near the lower right corner of the box and now click the right mouse button i e press and release it while still holding down the left button The cursor s shape will c
142. agic layers cif flat fileName Writes out CIF as in the cif write command but flattens the design first e g creates an internal version with the cell hierarchy removed This is useful if one wishes to use the and not feature of the CIF output styles but is having problems with interactions of overlapping cells clockwise degrees Rotate the selection by 90 180 or 270 degrees After the rotation the lower left corner of the selection s bounding box will be in the same place as the lower left corner of the bounding box before the rotation Degrees defaults to 90 If the box is in the same window as the selection it is rotated too Only material in the edit cell is affected copy direction amount copy tox y If no arguments are given a copy of the selection is picking up at the point lying underneath the box lower left corner and placed so that this point lies at the cursor position If direction is given it must be a Manhattan direction e g north see the DIRECTIONS section below The copy of the selection is moved in that direction by amount If the box is in the same window as the selection it is moved too Amount defaults to 1 The second form of the command behaves as though the cursor were pointing to x y in the edit cell a copy of the selection is picked up by the point beneath the lower left corner of the box and placed so that this point lies at x y corner direction direction2 layers This comma
143. al Layouts The design rule checker works on hierarchical layouts as well as single cells There are three overall rules that describe the way that Magic checks hierarchical designs 1 The paint in each cell must obey all the design rules by itself without considering the paint in any other cells including its children 2 The combined paint of each cell and all of its descendants subcells sub subcells etc must be consistent If a subcell interacts with paint or with other subcells in a way that introduces a design rule violation an error will appear in the parent In designs with many levels of hierarchy this rule is applied separately to each cell and its descendants 3 Each array must be consistent by itself without considering any other subcells or paint in its parent If the neighboring elements of an array interact to produce a design rule violation the violation will appear in the parent To see some examples of interaction errors edit the cell tut6b This cell doesn t make sense electrically but illustrates the features of the hierarchical checker On the left are two subcells that are too close together In addition the subcells are too close to the red paint in the top level cell Move the subcells and or modify the paint to make the errors go away and reappear On the right side of tut6b is an array whose elements interact to produce a design rule violation Edit an element of the array to make the vio lation go awa
144. al number its default value is 1 0 D drivefile Also used to turn capacitance into delay but on a per net basis Each line of the file drivefile con sists of a hierarchical pin name of an output driver and its associated drive factor equivalent to delay in the d flag above namely the number of picoseconds per picofarad for the net driven by that output pin Nets driven by a pin listed not in this file use the default delay specified by d above If this file isn t given we don t know for certain which pins are the drivers in each net so we arbitrarily pick one pin per net and assume it is the driver I iload In addition to the capacitance reported in the sim file for each net add an additional iload attofarads of capacitance for each input on a given net to the total capacitance for that net Inputs are counted only if they appear in the net file The default value of iload is 0 0 since it varies so much from one technology to the next This option is provided to account for extra transistor capacitance not computed by the extractor such as when the technology of the circuit being extracted is non MOS e g bipolar 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 EXT2DLYS 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2DLYS 1 L netfile Instead of using file net as the netlist file use netfile net instead M scaldmap If specified then scaldmap is read note no suffix implied to obtain a translation between Magic terminal names
145. ally the mhint fhint and rhint planes are used for by the interactive router the iroute command for designer specified 4 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 planes well w active diffusion polysilicon a metall m1 metal2 m2 oxide ox end Table 2 Planes section graphic hints There is a limit on the maximum number of planes in a technology including the internal planes This limit is currently 15 To increase the limit it is necessary to change MAXPLANES in the file database database h and then recompile all of Magic as described in Maintainer s Manual 1 Each additional plane involves additional storage space in every cell and some additional processing time for searches so we recommend that you keep the number of planes as small as you can do cleanly types active polysilicon red poly p active ndiffusion green ndiff active pdiffusion brown pdiff metall metall m1 blue metal2 metal2 m2 purple well pwell pw well nwell nw active polycontact pcontact pc active ndcontact ndc active pdcontact pdc metall m2contact m2c via v active ntransistor nfet active ptransistor pfet active psubstratepcontact ppcontact ppcont psc ppc pwe pwcontact active nsubstratencontact nncontact nncont nsc nnc nwe nwcontact active psubstratepdiff psd ppdiff ppd pohmic active nsubstratendiff nsd nndiff nnd nohmic metal2 pad oxide glass end Table 3 Ty
146. alue you can now simulate the counter Set RESET_B to a 1 by selecting it the red square and then typing simemd h Step the clock by typing simcmd c Using the same procedure set the node hold the blue square to a 0 We ll watch the output bits of this counter as it runs Place the box around all four outputs purple strips at the bottom and zoom in so their labels are visible Select one of the outputs by placing the cursor over it and typing s Add the other three outputs to the selection by placing the cursor over each and typing S These four nodes should be the only ones in the selection Click the middle mouse button to display the node values Step the clock by typing simemd c Click the middle button again to check the nodes Repeat stepping the clock and displaying the outputs several times and you ll see the outputs sequence as a counter If you also follow the text on the screen you ll also see that the outputs are also being watched You may have noticed that the results are printed very quickly if the middle button is clicked a second time without changing the selection This is because the node names do not have to be recomputed if the selection remains unchanged Thus you can increase the performance of this tool by minimizing selection changes This can be accomplished by adding other nodes to the current selection that you are intending to check To erase all the RSIM value labels from the layout clear the selectio
147. ame field is just a human readable description of the stipple it isn t used by Magic FILES cad lib magic sys mos 7bit dstyleS SEE ALSO magic 1 cmap 5 glyphs 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXT 5 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT 5 NAME ext format of ext files produced by Magic s hierarchical extractor DESCRIPTION Magic s extractor produces a ext file for each cell in a hierarchical design The ext file for cell name is name ext This file contains three kinds of information environmental information scaling timestamps etc the extracted circuit corresponding to the mask geometry of cell name and the connections between this mask geometry and the subcells of name A ext file consists of a series of lines each of which begins with a keyword The keyword beginning a line determines how the remainder of the line is interpreted The following set of keywords define the environmental information tech techname Identifies the technology of cell name as techname e g nmos cmos timestamp time Identifies the time when cell name was last modified The value time is the time stored by Unix i e seconds since 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 Note that this is not the time name was extracted but rather the timestamp value stored in the mag file The incremental extractor compares the timestamp in each ext file with the timestamp in each mag file in a design if they differ that cell is re extracted version versi
148. ample the bold lines show the CIF that would be generated by a squares operation The squares of material are always centered so that the borders on opposite sides are the same The last geometric operation is called squares It examines each tile on the CIF plane and replaces that tile with one or more squares of material Each square is size CIF units across and squares are separated by separation units A border of at least border units is left around the edge of the original tile if possible This operation is used to generate contact vias as in Figure 3 If only one argument is given in the squares SIT Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 statement then separation defaults to size and border defaults to size 2 If a tile doesn t hold an integral number of squares extra space is left around the edges of the tile and the squares are centered in the tile If the tile is so small that not even a single square can fit and still leave enough border then the border is reduced If a square won t fit in the tile even with no border then no material is generated The squares operation must be used with some care in conjunction with the design rules For example if there are several adjacent skinny tiles there may not be enough room in any of the tiles for a square so no material will be generated at all Whenever you use the squares operator you should use design rules to prohibit adjacent contact tile
149. an nel may contain terminals in its interior garoute generate type file Provides a primitive form of channel decomposition for regular structures such as gate array or standard cell layouts Generates a collection of garoute channel commands either to the standard output or to file if the latter is specified The type parameter must be either h or v The entire area contained within the box is turned into routing channels Each cell inside this area has its bounding box computed for purposes of routing by look ing only at those layers considered to be obstacles to routing see Tutorial 7 Net lists and Routing for details The bounding box just computed is then extended all the way to the sides of the area of the box tool vertically if type is h or horizontally if type is v This extended area is then marked as belonging to a river routing channel of type type adjacent channels of this type are merged into a single channel After all cells are processed the areas not marked as being river routing channels are output as normal channels garoute help Print a short synopsis of all the garoute command options garoute nowarn If a given terminal appears in more than one place inside a cell the router can leave feed back if it is not possible to route to all of the places where the terminal appears The garoute nowarn command instructs the router to leave feedback only if it is not possible to route to any of the l
150. and SCALD pin names Each line in scaldmap contains a Magic name followed by aSCALD name The Magic name is terminated by the first blank the SCALD name continues from the next non blank character to the end of the line possibly including embedded blanks When writing the output file the corresponding SCALD name is used instead of the Magic name for each pin in a net See dlys 5 for more details of the output file format O oload In addition to the capacitance reported in the sim file for each net add an additional oload attofarads of capacitance for each output on a given net to the total capacitance for that net The default value of oload is 0 0 If only I and not O is specified ext2dlys treats this as though both I and O had been specified with the same values inputs and outputs are not distinguished In addition all of the options of extcheck 1 are accepted SEE ALSO extcheck 1 ext2sim 1 ext2spice 1 magic 1 dlys 5 ext 5 AUTHOR Walter Scott 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXT2SIM 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2SIM 1 NAME ext2sim convert hierarchical ext 5 extracted circuit files to flat sim 5 files SYNOPSIS ext2sim a aliasfile l labelsfile o simfile A B F L t extcheck options y num f mit lbl su J hier flat j device sdRclass subRclass J defaultSubstrate root DESCRIPTION Ext2sim will convert an extracted
151. appears in different cells in the hierarchy depending on what kind of error was found Errors resulting from paint in a single cell cause error paint to appear in that cell Errors resulting from interactions and arrays appear in the parent of the interacting cells or array Because of the way Magic makes interaction checks errors can sometimes bubble up through the hierarchy and appear in multiple cells When two cells overlap Magic checks this area by copying all the paint in that area from both cells and their descendants into a buffer and then checking the buffer Magic is unable to tell the difference between an error from one of the subcells and an error that comes about because the two subcells overlap incorrectly This means that errors in an interaction a ie Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking September 19 1990 area of a cell may also appear in the cell s parent Fixing the error in the subcell will cause the error in the parent to go away also 4 Turning the Checker Off We hope that in most cases the checker will run so quickly and quietly that you hardly know it s there However there will probably be some situations where the checker is irksome This section describes several ways to keep the checker out of your hair If you re working on a cell with lots of design rule violations the constant redisplay caused by design rule checking may get in your way more than it helps This is particu larly true if
152. aps The color map sources are also contained in the source directory graphics Color maps have names like mos 7bit std cmap where mos is the name of the technology style to which the color map applies 7bit is the display style and std is a type of monitor If monitors have radically different phosphors they may require different color maps to achieve the same affects Right now we only support the std kind of monitor When Magic executes it looks for color maps in cadlib sys make install in graphics will copy them there Although color map files are textual you shouldn t edit them by hand use Magic s color map editing window instead 9 New Display Drivers The most common kind of change that will be made to Magic is probably to adapt it for new kinds of color displays Each display driver contains a standard collection of procedures to perform basic functions such as placing text drawing filled rectangles or changing the shape of the cursor A table defined in graphics grMain c holds the addresses of the routines for the current display driver At initialization time this table is DA Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 filled in with the addresses of the routines for the particular display being used All graphics calls pass through the table If you have a display other than an AED or an X11 workstation the first thing you should do is check the directory contributed Each of the
153. arameter i e it is interactively set and examined via iroute wizard not iroute search If no search line is given for a style the overall mzrouter defaults are used 10 6 Width Appropriate widths for route types are normally derived from the dre section of the technology file These can be overridden with width specifications of the following form width route type width Here width is a positive integer 10 7 Spacing Minimum spacings between routing on a route type and other types are derived from the design rules These values can be overridden by explicit spacing specifications in the mzrouter section Spacing specifications have the following form spacing routetype typel spacing typen spacingn Spacing values must be nonnegative integers or NIL The special type SUBCELL can be used to specify minimum spacing to unexpanded subcells 11 Dre section The design rules used by Magic s design rule checker come entirely from the tech nology file We ll look first at two simple kinds of rules width and and spacing Most of the rules in the dre section are one or the other of these kinds of rules 24 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 define allDiff ndiff pdiff ndc a pdc a ppcont a nncont a pfet nfet psd nsd define extPoly poly pcontact define extM1 metal1 pcontact m1 ndc m1 ppcont m1 pdc m1 nncont m1 define extM2 metal2 m2contact m2 Table 12a Abbreviations for s
154. arameters are as follows bloom Takes on a non negative integer value This controls the amount of compulsory searching from a focus before the next focus is picked based on the cost function and window position In practice 1 the default value seems to be the best value This parameter may be removed in the future boundsIncrement Takes on the value AUTOMATIC or a positive integer Determines in what size chunks the layout is preprocessed for routing This preprocessing blockage genera tion takes a significant fraction of the routing time thus performance may well be improved by experimenting with this parameter estimate Takes on a boolean value If ON the default an estimation plane is generated prior to each route that permits cost to completion estimates to factor in subcells and fence regions This can be very important to efficient routing Its rarely useful to turn estimation off expandDests Takes on a boolean value If ON not the default destination areas are expanded to include all of any nodes they overlap This is particularly useful if the Irouter is being invoked from a script since it is difficult to determine optimal destination areas automatically penalty Takes on a rational value default is 1024 0 It is not strictly true that the router Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 searches only within its window Paths behind the window are also considered but with cost penalized by th
155. archical it can take a long time for long complex wires such as power and ground nets This feature is still experi mental and subject to change Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 4 2 Resistance Magic provides for more accurate resistance extraction using the extresis com mand extresis provides a detailed resistance capacitance description for nets where parasitic resistance is likely to significantly affect circuit timing 4 2 1 Tutorial Introduction To try out the resistance extractor load in the cell tut8r Extract it using extract pause magic and run ext2sim on the cell with the command ext2sim tut8r This should produce tut8r sim tut8r nodes and tut8r al Restart magic and type extresis tolerance 10 extresis This will extract interconnect resistances for any net where the interconnect delay is at least one tenth of the transistor delay Magic should give the messages extresis tolerance 10 extresis Adding net2 Tnew 0 428038ns Told 0 3798ns Adding net1 Tnew 0 529005ns Told 0 4122ns Total Nets 7 Nets extracted 2 0 285714 Nets output 2 0 285714 These may vary slightly depending on your technology parameters The Adding net lines describe which networks for which magic produced resistor networks Tnew is the estimated delay on the net including the resistor parasitics while Told is the delay without parasitics The next line describes where magic thinks the slowest
156. at there s space left by Magic between the subcells and the channels this space is used by the stem gen erator 8 What to do When the Router Fails Don t be surprised if the router is unable to make all the connections the first time you try it on a large circuit Unless you have extra routing space in your chip you may have to make slight re arrangements to help the router out The paragraphs below describe things you can do to make life easier for the router This section is not very well developed so we d like to hear about techniques you use to improve routability If you discover new techniques send us mail and we ll add them to this section 8 1 Channel Structure One of the first things to check when the router fails is the channel structure If using the Magic router type channel to look at the channels One common mistake is to have some of the desired routing area covered by subcells Magic only runs wires where there are no subcells Check to be sure that there are channels everywhere that you re expecting wires to run If you place cells too close together there may not be enough room to have a channel between the cells when this happens Magic will route willy nilly across the tops of cells to bring terminals out to channels and will probably generate shorts or design rule violations To solve the problem move the cells farther apart If there are many skinny channels it will be difficult for the router to produce
157. at to do Much of the configuration is done with compilation flags See a later section of this manual for a full listing of them make magic Make a version of Magic All sub modules are remade if needed and then the final magic binary is produced make everything Same as make magic Both options make auxilary pro grams like ext2sim make force Force recompilation Like a make everything except that object files are first removed to force recompilation make clean Delete files that can be remade such as binaries make install Install the Magic binaries in cad or CAD_HOME if you have that set Putting together a runnable Magic system proceeds in two steps after a source file has been modified First the source file is compiled and all the files in its module are linked together into a single file xyz o where xyz is the name of the module Then all of the modules are linked together to form an executable version of Magic The command make in each source directory will compile and link the module locally make install will compile and link it and also install it in the include lib and installed directories All makefiles are set up to use the compiler flags found in cad src magic misc DFLAGS and cad src magic misc CFLAGS A list of flags appears later in this manual The command make in the subdirectory magic will produce a runnable version of Magic in that directory using the installed versions of all modules To work wi
158. ate two or more terminal labels with the same name in the same cell the router will assume that they are electrically equivalent connected together within the cell Because of this when routing the net it will feel free to connect to whichever one of the terminals is most convenient and ignore the others In some cases the router may take advantage of electrically equivalent terminals by using feed throughs entering a cell at one terminal to make one connection and exiting through an equivalent terminal on the way to make another connection for the same net 3 Menu for Label Editing Magic provides a special menu facility to assist you in placing terminal labels and editing netlists To make the menu appear invoke the Magic command Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 Button Action Left click prompt for more labels Curl Right click advance to next label Placer Left click place label Right click change label text position Puri Left click decrement number p Right click increment number Search under box highlight labels Find matching current text Left click prompt for new netlist name Cure Right click use edit cell name as netlist name Check that wiring matches netlist same as Verify typing verify command 3 Print names of all terminals in selected net Print same as typing print command Place feedback areas on screen to identify all terminals Te
159. ation on how to build up cell hierarchies see Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 2 Painting and Erasing Enter Magic to edit the cell tut2a type magic tut2a to the Unix shell follow the directions in Tutorial 1 Getting Started if you have any problems with this The tut2a cell is a sort of palette it shows a splotch of each of several paint layers and gives the names that Magic uses for the layers The two basic layout operations are painting and erasing They can be invoked using the paint and erase long commands or using the buttons The easiest way to paint and erase is with the mouse buttons To paint position the box over the area you d like to paint then move the cursor over a color and click the middle mouse button To erase everything in an area place the box over the area move the cursor over a blank spot and click the middle mouse button Try painting and erasing various colors If the screen gets totally messed up you can always exit Magic and restart it While you re painting white dots may occasionally appear and disappear These are design rule viola tions detected by Magic and will be explained in Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking You can ignore them for now It s completely legal to paint one layer on top of another When this happens one of three things may occur In some cases the layers are i
160. aturation spectral purity vs dilution with white and value light vs dark The value of a color is changed by pointing inside the region spanned by one of the color bars and clicking any mouse button The color bar will change so that it extends to the point selected by the crosshair when the button was pressed The color can also be changed by clicking a button over one of the pumps next to a color bar A left button click makes a 1 increment or decrement and a right button click makes a 5 change The color being edited can be changed by pressing the left button over the current color box in the editing window then moving the mouse and releasing the button over a point on the screen that contains the color to be edited A color value can be copied from an existing color to the current color by pressing the right mouse button over the current color box then releasing the button when the cursor is over the color whose value is to be copied into the current color COMMANDS FOR COLORMAP WINDOWS 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 26 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 These commands work if you are pointing to the interior of a colormap window The commands are color number Load number as the color being edited in the window Number must be an octal number between 0 and 377 it corresponds to the entry in the color map that is to be edited If no number is given this command prints out the value of the color currently
161. ave at least two dif fusion terminals A diffusion terminal is a contiguous region along the perimeter of the transistor channel that connects to diffusion as shown below terminal 1 poly gt diff terminal 2 T fet 2 diff terminals terminal 2 terminal terminal 3 3 diff terminals A transistor may have more than two diffusion terminals in which case it is modeled as a collection of two terminal transistors If only one diffusion terminal is present the the extractor flags this as an error and outputs a transistor with the source and drain shorted together Transistors of the special type dcap may have as few as one diffusion terminal Although their normal use is as capacitors the extractor will output them as though they Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 were a dfet It is up to simulation programs to compute the capacitance of a decap from the area and perimeter of its channel The NMOS technology file currently contains little information on parasitic cou pling capacitances As a result overlap capacitance and sidewall overlap capacitance will always be zero Magic Technology Manual 2 Scalable CMOS Shih Lien Lu Information Sciences Institute University of Southern California 4676 Admiralty Way Marina del Rey CA 90291 John Ousterhout Computer Science Division E
162. aving to go back and forth to the menu look up the send command in the man page to see how to do this The top half of the menu is for placing labels and the bottom half is for editing netlists This section describes the label facilities and Section Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 4 describes the netlist facilities The label menu makes it easy for you to enter lots of labels particularly when there are many labels that are the same except for a number e g bus1 bus2 bus3 etc There are four sections to the label menu the current text the placer two pumps and the Find button To place labels first click the left mouse button over the current text rectangle Then type one or more labels on the keyboard one per line You can use this mechanism to enter several labels at once Type return twice to signal the end of the list At this point the first of the labels you typed will appear in the current text rectangle To place a label position the box over the area you want to label then click the left mouse button inside one of the squares of the placer area A label will be created with the current text Where you click in the placer determines where the label text will appear relative to the label box for example clicking the left center square causes the text to be centered just to the left of the box You can place many copies of the same label by moving the box and clicking the placer area again You can r
163. ay accidentally short a terminal to nearby hand routing SSS MLL MLL Figure 3 When placing hand routing it is best to place wires with their left and bottom edges along grid lines and contacts centered on the wires In this fashion the hand routing will block as few routing grid lines as possible 12 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 When placing hand routing you can get better routing results by following the advice illustrated in Figure 3 First display the routing grid For example if the router is using a 8 unit grid which is true for the standard SCMOS technology type grid 8 Then place all your hand routing with its left and bottom edges along the grid lines Because of the way the routing tools work this approach results in the least possible amount of lost routing space 9 More Netlist Commands In addition to the netlist menu buttons and commands described in Section 4 there are a number of other netlist commands you can invoke by typing in the netlist window Many of these commands are textual equivalents of the menu buttons However they allow you to deal with terminals by typing the hierarchical name of the terminal rather than by pointing to it If you don t know where a terminal is or if you have deleted a label from your design so that there s nothing to point to you ll have to use the textual commands Commands that don t just duplicat
164. being edited load techStyle displayStyle monitorType Load a new color map If no arguments are specified the color map for the current technology style e g mos display style e g 7bit and monitor type e g std is re loaded Otherwise the color map is read from the file techStyle displayStyle monitorType cmap in the current directory or in the system library directory save techStyle displayStyle monitorType Save the current color map If no arguments are specified save the color map in a file determined by the current technology style display style and monitor type as above Otherwise save it in the file techStyle displayStyle monitorType emap in the current directory or in the system library directory DIRECTIONS Many of the commands take a direction as an argument The valid direction names are north south east west top bottom up down left right northeast ne southeast se northwest nw southwest sw and center In some cases only Manhattan directions are permitted which means only north south east west and their synonyms are allowed LAYERS The mask layers are different for each technology and are described in the technology manuals The layers below are defined in all technologies F All mask layers Does not include special layers like the label layer and the error layer see below All layers underneath the cursor errors Design rule violations useful primarily in the see command labels L
165. c and then a simple translation by x and y storing its result in tdst GeoTran sTranslate composes first a simple translation by x and y followed by the Transform tsrc also storing its result in tdst Finally GeoTransTrans composes two arbitrary transforms t and f2 leaving its result in tdst Transforms that adhere to one of the eight rotation formats described above are always invertible The inverse of such a transform can be computed by GeolnvertTrans which leaves the inverse of tsrc in tinv Two procedures extract useful information from Transforms GeoScale returns the scale factor associated with the Transform t GeoDecomposeTransform breaks up a transform into an optional mirror about the X axis 1 e flipping upside down followed by an optional counterclockwise rotation It sets upsidedown to TRUE if the transform requires flipping upside down before rotation and sets angle to the degrees of rotation 0 90 180 or 270 Three procedures manipulate positions such as GEO_NORTH GeoNameToPos maps the ASCII name for a position e g north top or left west etc into the internal position number If name is ambiguous 1 is returned if name is unrecognized 2 is returned If manhattan is TRUE only the direc tions corresponding to GEO_NORTH GEO_SOUTH GEO_WEST or GEO_EAST are accepted If prin terrors is TRUE GeoNameToPos will print an error message on the standard output in ad
166. c to keep track of design changes and enable fast cell read in Thus whenever you change one cell you ll generally need to write out new copies of its parents and grandparents If you don t write out the parents or if you edit a child out of context by itself without the parents loaded then you ll incur extra overhead the next time you try to edit the parents Timestamp mismatch warnings are printed when you ve edited cells out of context and then later go back and read in the cell as part of its parent These aren t serious problems they just mean that Magic is doing extra work to update information in the parent to reflect the child s new state 8 Search Paths When many people are working on a large design the design will probably be more manageable if different pieces of it can be located in different directories of the file sys tem Magic provides a simple mechanism for managing designs spread over several directories The system maintains a search path that tells which directories to search when trying to read in cells By default the search path is which means that Magic looks only in the working directory You can change the path using the command path searchpath where searchpath is the new path that Magic should use Searchpath consists of a list of directories separated by colons For example the path ouster x a b means that if Magic is trying to read in a cell
167. cal routes see the layer parameter section below This is so that a preferred routing direction can be esta blished for each layer When two good route layers are available as in a two layer metal process interference between routes can be minimized by assigning opposite pre ferred directions to the layers The rotate layer locally inverts the preferred directions An example use of the rotate layer might involve an L shaped bus The natural preferred directions on one leg of the L are the opposite from the other and thus one leg needs to be marked with the rotate layer Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 6 Subcells As with painting and other operations in Magic the Irouter s output is written to the cell being edited What the router sees that is which features act as obstacles is deter mined by the window the route is issued to or other designated reference window see the wizard section The contents of subcells expanded in the route window are visible to the Irouter but it only sees the bounding boxes of unexpanded subcells These bounding boxes appear on a special SUBCELL pseudo layer The spacing parameters to the SUBCELL layer determine exactly how the Irouter treats unexpanded subcells See the section on spacing parameters below By default the spacings to the SUBCELL layer are large enough to guarantee that no design rules will be violated regardless of the con tents of unexpanded subcell
168. can be recovered with the command source file feedback why Prints out the explanations associated with all feedback areas underneath the box fill direction layers Direction is a Manhattan direction see the section DIRECTIONS below The paint visible under one edge of the box is sampled Everywhere that the edge touches paint the paint is extended in the given direction to the opposite side of the box For example if direction is north then paint is sampled under the bottom edge of the box and extended to the top edge If layers is specified then only the given layers are considered if layers isn t specified then all layers are considered findbox zoom Center the view on the box If the optional zoom argument is present zoom into the area specified by the box This command will complain if the box is not in the window you are point ing to flush cellname Cell cellname is reloaded from disk All changes made to the cell since it was last saved are dis carded If cellname is not given the edit cell is flushed garoute option args This command with no option or arg is like the route command it generates routing in the edit cell to make connections specified in the current netlist See the route command for further information Unlike the route command this command is intended to be used for routing types of circuits such as gate arrays whose routing channels can be determined in advance and which require the abilit
169. circuit from the hierarchical ext 5 representation produced by Magic to the flat sim 5 representation required by many simulation tools The root of the tree to be extracted is the file root ext it and all the files it references are recursively flattened The result is a single flat representa tion of the circuit that is written to the file root sim a list of node aliases written to the file root al and a list of the locations of all nodenames in CIF format suitable for plotting to the file rootnodes The file root sim is suitable for use with programs such as crystal 1 esim 1 or sim2spice 1 The following options are recognized a aliasfile Instead of leaving node aliases in the file root al leave it in aliasfile l labelfile Instead of leaving a CIF file with the locations of all node names in the file root nodes leave it in labelfile 0 outfile Instead of leaving output in the file root sim leave it in outfile A Don t produce the aliases file B Don t output transistor or node attributes in the sim file This option will also disable the output of information such as the area and perimeter of source and drain diffusion and the fet substrate For compatibitlity reasons the latest version of ext2sim outputs this information as node attibutes This option is necessary when preparing input for pro grams that don t know about attributes such as sim2spice 1 which is actually made obsolete by ext2spice 1
170. color map Unfortunately some monitors have slightly different phosphors than others this will result in different colors if the same intensity values are used for them To compensate for monitor differences Magic supports multiple color maps for each display style depending on the monitor being used The monitor type can be specified with the m command line switch to Magic with std as the default Color map files have names of the form x y z emap1 where x and y have the same meaning as for display styles and z is the monitor type Over the last few years monitor phosphors appear to have standardized quite a bit so almost all moni tors now work well with the std monitor type The color map mos 7bit std cmapl1 is the standard one used at Berkeley 4 Transparent and Opaque Layers One of the key decisions in defining a set of display styles for a color display is how to use the bits of a pixel this section doesn t apply to black and white displays One option is to use a separate bit of each pixel called a bit plane for each mask layer The advantage of this is that each possible combination of layer overlaps results in a different pixel value and hence a different color if you wish Thus for example if metal and poly are represented with different bit planes poly without metal metal without poly poly and metal and neither poly nor metal will each cause a different value to be stored in the pixel A different color can be used to di
171. cros Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 q w e and r are defined to move the selection left down up and right respectively by one unit The stretch command is similar to move except that it stretches and erases as it moves stretch does not operate diagonally so if you use the cursor to indicate where to stretch to Magic will either stretch up down left or right whichever is closest The stretch command moves the selection and also does two additional things First for each piece of paint that moves stretch will erase that layer from the region that the paint passes through as it moves in order to clear material out of its way Second if the back edge of a piece of selected paint touches non selected material one of the two pieces of paint is stretched to maintain the connection The macros Q W E and R just like the macros q etc described above for move The macro T is predefined to stretch To see how stretching works select the horizontal piece of the green wire in tut2b and type W then E Stretching only worries about material in front of and behind the selection it ignores material to the sides try the Q and R macros to see You can use plowing described in Tutorial 3 if this is a problem The command upsidedown will flip the selection upside down and sideways flips the selection sideways Both commands leave the selection so it occupies the same total area as before but wit
172. ctively For example for NMOS the sim node GND corresponds to spice node 0 Vdd corresponds to spice node 1 and BULK corresponds to spice node 2 The defs file for this set up would look like this set GND 0 nmos set Vdd 2 nmos set BULK 3 nmos A definition also allows you to set a correspondence between sim transistor types and and spice transistor types The form of this definition is def sim_trans spice_trans tech Again the tech field is optional For NMOS these definitions would look as follows def e ENMOS nmos def d DNMOS nmos Definitions may also be placed in the cadrc file but the definitions in the defs file overrides those in the cadre file SEE ALSO ext2sim 1 magic 1 spice 1 cadrce 5 ext 5 sim 5 AUTHOR BUGS Dan Fitzpatrick CMOS fixes by Neil Soiffer The only pre defined technologies are nmos cmos pw and cmos the same as cmos pw Only one definition file is allowed 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 11 17 82 1 SLEEPER 1 CAD Tool User s Manual SLEEPER 1 NAME sleeper acquire a graphics terminal and hang around SYNOPSIS sleeper DESCRIPTION Certain programs such as magic 1 can require the use of a graphics terminal separate from the terminal used to run the program If the graphics terminal has an ordinary login process running on it it is neces sary to run sleeper to acquire ownership of the terminal set up its modes appropriately and prevent
173. cwrl wrl techreports To obtain more details on ordering by electronic mail send a message to one of these addresses with the word help in the Subject line you will receive detailed instruc tions 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic Release Robert N Mayo Michael H Arnold Walter S Scott Don Stark Gordon T Hamachi September 1990 Prepared with the assistance of Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory Palo Alto California Lawrence Livermore National Labs O Division Livermore California Stanford University Center for Integrated Systems Palo Alto California University of California Department of EECS Berkeley California d il li ftali Western Research Laboratory 100 Hamilton Avenue Palo Alto California 94301 USA Copyright C 1985 1989 1990 Regents of the University of California Lawrence Livermore National Labs Stanford University and Digital Equipment Corporation Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies The copyright holders make no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Export of this software outside of the United States of America may require an export license CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 6
174. d Closing Windows Initially Magic displays one large window The openwindow cel name command opens another window and loads the given cell To give this a try start up Magic with the command magic tut5a Then point anywhere in a Magic window and type the command openwindow tut5b make sure you re pointing to a Magic window A new window will appear and it will contain the cell tut5b If you don t give a cellname argument to openwindow it will open a new window on the cell containing the box and will zoom in on the box The macro o is predefined to openwindow Try this out by placing the box around an area of tut5b and then typing o Another window will appear You now have three windows all of which display pieces of layout There are other kinds of windows in Magic besides layout windows you ll learn about them later Magic doesn t care how many windows you have within reason nor how they overlap To get rid of a window point to it and type closewindow or use the macro O Point to a portion of the original window and close it 2 2 Resizing and Moving Windows If you have been experimenting with Magic while reading this you will have noticed that windows opened by openwindow are all the same size If you d prefer a different arrangement you can resize your windows or move them around on the screen The techniques used for this are different however depending on what kind of display you re using If you are using a w
175. d in the cost parame ters If the router is taking too long to complete try increasing rate If the router is choosing poor routes try decreasing rate The window width should probably be at least twice the rate The subcommand has this form iroute search parameter value If value is omitted the current value is printed if parameter is omitted as well both parameter values are printed 11 Messages iroute verbosity The number of messages printed by the Irouter is controlled by iroute verbosity value Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 If verbosity is set to 0 only errors and warnings are printed A value of 1 the default results in short messages A value of 2 causes statistics to be printed 12 Version iroute version The subcommand siroute version prints the Irouter version in use 13 Saving and Restoring Parameters iroute save The command siroute save file ir saves away the current settings of all the Irouter parameters in file file ir Parameters can be reset to these values at any time with the command source file ir This feature can be used to setup parameter sets appropriate to different routing contexts Note that the extension ir is recommended for Irouter parameter files 14 Wizard Parameters iroute wizard Miscellaneous parameters that are probably not of interest to the casual user are accessed via the wizard subcommand The p
176. d in with the above programs Contains code to read the extract sections of technology files and to generate hierarchical circuit descriptions ext files from Magic layouts Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers fsleeper garouter gcr graphics grouter irouter macros magicusage main misc mpack mzrouter net2ir netlist netmenu parser plot plow September 19 1990 Like ext2sim this directory is a self contained program that allows a graphics terminal attached to one machine to be used with Magic running on a different machine See the manual page fsleeper 1 Contains the gate array router from Lawrence Livermore National Labs Contains the channel router which is an extension of Rivest s greedy router that can handle switchboxes and obstacles in the channels This is the lowest level graphics module It contains driver rou tines for X11 as well as less used drivers for the AED family of displays and for Sun Windows The code here does basic clip ping and drawing If you want to make Magic run on a new kind of display this is the only module that should have to change The files in this module implement the global router which computes the sequence of channels that each net is to pass through Contains the interactive router written by Michael Arnold at Lawrence Livermore National Labs This router allows the user to route nets interactively using special hint laye
177. d list of one or more CIF layer names Calma layers are specified via calma lines which should appear at the end of the cifinput section They are of the form calma cifLayer calmaLayers calmaTypes The cifLayer is one of the CIF types mentioned in the cifinput section Both cal maLayers and calmaTypes are one or more comma separated integers between 0 and 63 The interpretation of a calma line is that any Calma geometry whose layer is any of the layers in calmaLayers and whose type is any of the types in calmaTypes should be treated as the CIF layer cifLayer Either or both of calmaLayers and calmaTypes may be the character instead of a comma separated list of integers this character means all layers or types respectively It is commonly used for calmaTypes to indicate that the Calma type of a piece of geometry should be ignored Just as for CIF Magic also issues warnings if it encounters unknown Calma layers while reading Stream files If there are layers that you d like Magic to ignore without issuing warnings assign them to a dummy CIF layer and ignore the CIF layer 10 Mzrouter section This section defines the layers and contacts available to the Magic maze router mzrouter and assigns default costs for each type Default widths and spacings are derived from the dre section of the technology file described below but can be overrid den in this section Other mzrouter parameters for example search rate and width can also be
178. d read at least the first and perhaps all four of the papers on Magic that appeared together in the 1984 Design Automation Conference In addition the following portions of magic have their own papers extractor 1985 Design Automation Conference page 286 channel router 1985 Chapel Hill Conference on VLSI page 145 Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 irouter and mzrouter 1988 Design Automation Conference page 672 resistance extractor 1987 Design Automation Conference page 570 2 Installing Magic If you ve received Magic on the 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic tape then it shouldn t take much work to get it running You should first pick a location for Magic s directory tree Normally cad is chosen but you might want to pick some other location to start If you do pick another location set your shell environment variable CAD_HOME to that location and mentally translate the cad references in this docu ment to the location you chose After reading the tape in there will be a DECstation 3100 binary version of Magic in cad bin and a set of library subdirectories in cad lib magic If this isn t so then at the very least you ll need to get a Magic system library set up in cad lib magic sys this directory contains information like technology files and colormaps and Magic can t run at all without it If you re running on a DECstation 3100 you shouldn t need to do anything beside
179. ded for backwards compatibility with version 6 4 5 On top of this selec tion you can individually control how a terminal of a specific fet will be extracted if you put a source drain attribute ext aph makes the extraction for that specific terminal hierarchical and ext apf makes the extraction flat see the magic tutorial about attaching attribute labels Additionaly to ease extraction of bipolar transistors the gate attribute 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 EXT2SIM 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2SIM 1 ext aps forces the output of the substrate area and perimeter for a specific fet in flat mode only j device sdRclass subRclass defaultSubstrate Gives ext2sim information about the source drain resistance class of the fet type device Makes device to have sdRclass source drain resistance class subRclass substrate well resistance class and the node named defaultSubstrate as its default substrate The defaults are nfet 0 Gnd and pfet 1 6 Vdd which correspond to the MOSIS technology file but things might vary in your site Ask your local cad administrator The way the extraction of node area and perimeter works in magic the total area and perimeter of the source drain junction is summed up on a single node That is why all the junction areas and perimeters are summed up on a single node this should not affect simulation results however Special care must be taken when the substrate of a fet is tied to a node other than the default s
180. di ately adjacent It merely requires that any type in the set types must be separated by a Manhattan distance of at least distance units from any type in the set types2 that is not immediately adjacent to the first type See Figure 5 for an explanation of Manhattan dis tance for design rules As an example consider the metall separation rule spacing allPoly allPoly 2 touching_ok Polysilicon spacing must be at least 2 MOSIS rule 3 2 This rule is symmetric types is equal to types2 and requires for example that a pcon tact be separated by at least 2 units from a piece of polysilicon However this rule does not prevent the pcontact from touching a piece of poly In touching_ok rules all of the layers in both types and types2 must be stored on the same plane Magic will substitute different contact images if necessary 296s Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 tI 12 t2 Figure 6 The touching_ok rules cancels spacing checks if the material is touching This means that even distant material won t be checked for spacing If the rule applied at edge A is a touching_ok rule between material t1 and t2 then no check will be made between the t1 material and the t2 material on the far right side of the diagram If this check was desired it could be accomplished in this case by a edge4way check from edge B This would not work in general though beca
181. displays file tells which color display port to use for which text terminal port and also tells what kind of display is attached Once this file is set up users can run Magic without worrying about the system configuration See the manual page for displays 5 One last note if you re running on an AED display you ll need to set communica tion switches 3 4 5 to up down up 3 Source Directory Structure There are approximately 45 source subdirectories in Magic Most of these consist of modules of source code for the system for example database main and utils See Section 4 of this document for brief descriptions of what s in each source directory Besides the source code the other subdirectories are Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 doc Contains sources for all the documentation including man pages tutorials and maintenance manuals Subdirectories of doc e g doc scmos contain the technology manuals The Makefile in each directory can be used to run off the documenta tion The tutorials maintenance manuals and technology manuals all use the Berkeley Grn Ditroff package which means that you can t run them off without Grn Ditroff unless you change the sources include Contains installed i e safe versions of all the header files h from all the modules lib Contains installed i e safe versions of each of the compiled and linked modules
182. dition to return ing 1 or 2 The inverse of GeoNameToPos is GeoPosToName which returns the ASCII string for a given position pos GeoTransPos applies the Transfor t to the position pos and returns the new position Only the rotational part of t is relevant the translation is ignored 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 4 GEOMETRY 3 CAD Tool User s Manual GEOMETRY 3 The next collection of procedures manipulate Points and Rects Geolnclude and GeolncludeAll extend whichever sides of the Rect dst that are necessary to include the area of the Rect src Both return TRUE if dst was enlarged If src is considered to be zero size see below dst is unchanged If dst is zero size it is set to src if src is not also zero size The two procedures differ in that Geolnclude considers zero area rectangles to be zero size while GeolncludeAll only considers rectangles whose bottom is actu ally above their top or whose LHS is to the right of their RHS to be zero size GeolncludePoint is like Geolnclude except src is a Point instead of a Rect Three procedures are provided for clipping GeoClip determines the portion of the Rect r that overlaps the Rect cliparea and replaces r with the new Rect If r and cliparea don t overlap at all r is turned inside out r_xbot gt r_xtop or r_ybot gt r_ytop GeoClipPoint moves the Point p to the closest point on the boundary of the Rect cliparea if it isn t already contained in cliparea or on its
183. duce the size of Magic 7 0 4 Debugging Compiletime Options CELLDEBUG Debugging flag for the database module COUNTWIDTHCALLS Debugging flag for the plow module DEBUGWIDTH Debugging flag for the plow module DRCRULESHISTO Debugging tuning flag for the drec module FREEDEBUG Memory allocation debugging flag MALLOCMEASURE Memory allocation debugging flag MALLOCTRACE Memory allocation debugging flag NOMACROS Memory allocation debugging flag PAINTDEBUG Debugging flag for the database painting routines PARANOID Flag to enable consistency checking With a system the complexity of Magic you should always leave this flag turned on 8 Technology and Other Support Files Besides the source code files there are a number of other files that must be managed by Magic maintainers including color maps technology files and other stuff Below is a listing of those files and where they are located 10 Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 8 1 Technology Files See Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File for information on the contents of technology files The sources for technology files are contained in the sub directory tech in files like semos tech and nmos tech The technology files that Magic actually uses at runtime are kept in the directory cadlib sys make install in tech will copy the sources to cadlib sys Technology file formats have evolved ra
184. e poly OKTypes not poly poly space poly a b Figure 8 If only the simple rules from Figure 7 are used errors may go unnoticed in corner regions For example the polysilicon spacing rule in a will fail to detect the error in b Edge rules are specified in the technology file using the following syntax edge types types2 d OKTypes cornerTypes cornerDist error plane Both types and types2 are type lists An edge rule is generated for each pair consisting of a type from types and a type from types2 All the types in types types2 and corner Types must lie on a single plane See Figure 9 for an example edge rule It is sometimes 298 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 useful to specify a null list i e 0 for OKTypes or CornerTypes Null OKTypes means no edges between types and types2 are OK Null CornerTypes means no corner exten sions are to be checked corner extensions are explained below cornerTypes 2 cornerTypes not poly OKTypes alin lt not poly tl poly space lt gt lt _ gt d 2 a b poly poly gt gt lt not poly lt not poly c d Figure 9 The complete design rule format is illustrated in a Whenever an edge has typel on its left side and type2 on its right side the area A is checked to be sure that on
185. e It ends in and is attached to the channel region of the transistor To see exam ples of attributes and node names edit the cell tut2d in Magic Special conventions apply to labels for routing terminals The standard Magic router invoked by route ignores all labels except for those on the edges of cells This restriction does not apply to the gate array router Garoute or to the interactive router Iroute If you expect to use the standard router to connect to a particular node you should place the label for that node on its outermost edge The label should not be a point label but should instead be a horizontal or vertical line covering the entire edge of the wire The router will choose a connection point somewhere along the label A good rule of thumb is to label all nodes that enter or leave the cell in this way For more details on how labels are used by the standard router see Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing Other labeling conventions are used by the Garouter and Irouter consult their respective tutorials for details 8 Files and Formats Magic provides a variety of ways to save your cells on disk Normally things are saved in a special Magic format Each cell is a separate file and the name of the file is just the name of the cell with mag appended For example the cell tut2a is saved in file tut2a mag To save cells on disk invoke the command writeall This command will run through each o
186. e a one dimensional array of cells that alternates between two cell types A and B ABABA BABABAB One way to do this is first to make an array of A instances with large gaps between them A A A A A A then make an array of B instances with large gaps between them B B B B B B and finally place one array on top of the other so that the B s nestle in between the A s The problem with this approach is that the two arrays overlap almost completely so Magic will have to go to a lot of extra work to han dle the overlaps in this case there isn t much overlap of actual paint but Magic won t know this and will spend a lot of time worrying about it A better solution is to create a new cell that contains one instance of A and one instance of B side by side Then make an array of the new cell This approach makes it clear to Magic that there isn t any real overlap between the A s and B s If you do create overlaps you should use the overlaps only to connect the two cells together and not to change their structure This means that the overlap should not cause transistors to appear disappear or change size The result of overlapping the two sub cells should be the same electrically as if you placed the two cells apart and then ran wires to hook parts of one cell to parts of the other The convention is necessary in order to be able to do hierarchical circuit extraction easily it makes it possible for each subcell
187. e argu ments to capProc are the HierNames hn and hn2 of the two nodes between which the capacitor sits the capacitance cap in attofarads type double from 6 5 and later and the client data cdata with which EFVisitCaps was called If it s necessary to obtain a pointer to the flat EFNode structures to which hn or hn2 refer they can be passed to EFHNLook see below EF VisitFets visits each of the transistors in the circuit applying fetProc to each The arguments to fetProc are the transistor structure itself fet the hierarchical path prefix that should be prepended to the node names of all the fet s terminals a geometric transform that must be applied to all coordinates in the fet to convert them to root coordinates the computed length and width w of the transistor channel taking into account substitution of symbolic values with the s flag and the client data cdata with which EF VisitFets 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 EXTFLAT 3 CAD Tool User s Manual EXTFLAT 3 was called EFVisitNodes visits each of the flat nodes in the circuit applying nodeProc to each The arguments to nodeProc are the flat EFNode node its lumped resistance r and capacitance to substrate c r type is integer and c type is double from 6 5 and later and the client data cdata with which EF VisitNodes was called An auxiliary procedure EF NodeResist is provided to compute the lumped resistance of a node from the per imeter and area information stor
188. e box The expand command will recursively expand every cell that intersects the box until there are no unexpanded cells left under the box The unexpand command will unexpand every cell whose area intersects the box but doesn t completely contain it The macro x is equivalent to expand and X is equivalent to unexpand Try out the various expansion and unexpan sion facilities on tut4a 3 Manipulating Subcells There are a few other commands in addition to the selection commands already described that you ll need in order to manipulate subcells The command getcell name will find the file name mag on disk read the cell it contains and create an instance of that cell with its lower left corner aligned with the lower left corner of the box Use the getcell command to get an instance of the cell tut4z After the getcell command the new instance is selected so you can move it or copy it or delete it The getcell command recognizes additional arguments that permit the cell to be positioned using labels and or explicit coordinates See the man page for details To turn a normal instance into an array select the instance and then invoke the sarray command It has two forms sarray xsize ysize sarray xlo xhi ylo yhi In the first form xsize indicates how many elements the array should have in the x direction and ysize indicates how many elements it should have in the y direction The spacing between elements is controlled by the b
189. e cell s bounding box plus two names inside the bounding box The top name is the name of the subcell the name you would type when invoking Magic to edit the cell The cell s contents are stored in a file with this name plus a mag extension The bottom name inside each bounding box is called an instance identifier and is used to distinguish different instances of the same subcell Instance id s are used for routing and circuit extraction and are discussed in Section 6 Subcells can be manipulated using the same selection mechanism that you learned in Tutorial 2 To select a subcell place the cursor over the subcell and type f find cell which is a macro for select cell You can also select a cell by typing s when the cursor is over a location where there s no paint f is probably more convenient particu larly for cells that are completely covered with paint When you select a cell the box will be set to the cell s bounding box the cell s name will be highlighted and a message will be printed on the text display All the selection operations move copy delete etc apply to subcells Try selecting and moving the top subcell in tut4a You can also select subcells using area selection the a and A macros any unexpanded subcells that inter sect the area of the box will be selected To see what s inside a cell instance you must expand it Select one of the instances of tut4y then type the command expand togg
190. e cell while getcell simply makes a reference to the original cell Cellname must not be the edit cell or one of its ancestors 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 12 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 getnode alias on alias off getnode abort str Getnode prints out the node names used by the extractor for all selected paint If aliasing turned on getnode prints all the names it finds for a given node It may not print every name that exists however When turned off it just prints one name The abort option allows the user to tell get node that it is not important to completely search nodes that have certain names For example getnode abort Vdd will tell getnode not to continue searching the node if it determines that one of its names is Vdd A getnode abort without a string argument will erase the list of names pre viously created by calling getnode abort with string arguments Getnode can be safely aborted at any time by typing the interrupt character usually C See Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic for more information on this command grid xSpacing ySpacing xOrigin yOrigin grid off If no arguments are given a one unit grid is toggled on or off in the window underneath the cur sor Grid off always turns the grid off regardless of whether it was on or off previously If numerical arguments are given the arguments determine the grid spacing and origin for the win dow under the cursor In its most g
191. e contains the pattern Pattern matching is done in the same way as in csh using the special characters lt V P and P Try this on tut7a enter sood into the current text area place the box around the whole cell then click on the Find button For each of the good labels a feedback area will be created with white stripes to highlight the area The feedback find command can be used to step through the areas and feedback clear will erase the feedback information from the screen The feedback command has many of the same options as dre for getting information about feedback areas see the Magic manual page for details or type feedback help for a synopsis of the options Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 4 Netlist Editing After placing terminal labels the next step is to specify the connections between them this is called netlist editing The bottom half of the netlist menu is used for editing netlists The first thing you must do is to specify the netlist you want to edit Do this by clicking in the current netlist box If you left click Magic will prompt you for the netlist name and you can type it at the keyboard If you right click Magic will use the name of the edit cell as the current netlist name In either case Magic will read the netlist from disk if it exists and will create a new netlist if there isn t currently a netlist file with the given name Netlis
192. e material in the CIF layer in other words any CIF material that doesn t lie under material in layers is removed from the CIF layer And not finds all areas covered by layers and erases current CIF material from those areas Grow and shrink will uniformly grow or shrink the current CIF layer by amount units where amount is specified in CIF units not Magic units The three bloat operations provide selective forms of growing In these statements all the layers must be Magic layers Each operation examines all the tiles in layers and grows the tiles by a different distance on each side depending on the rest of the line Each pair layers2 amount specifies some tile types and a distance in CIF units Where a 16 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 E B E B E B B A C B A C B A C D D D bloat or A 100 C E 200 bloat max A 100 C E 200 bloat min A 100 C E 200 Figure 2 The three different forms of bloat behave slightly differently when two different bloat distances apply along the same side of a tile In each of the above examples the CIF that would be generated is shown in bold outline If bloat or is specified a jagged edge may be generated as on the left If bloat max is used the largest bloat distance for each side is applied uniformly to the side as in the center If bloat min is used the smallest bloat distance
193. e menu buttons are described below see the magic manual page for details on the others The netlist command sextract will generate a net from existing wiring It looks under the box for paint then traces out all the material in the edit cell that is connected electrically to that paint Wherever the material touches subcells it looks for terminals in the subcells and all the terminals it finds are placed into a new net Warning there is also an extract command for layout windows and it is totally different from the extract command in netlist windows Make sure you ve got the cursor over the netlist window when you invoke this command The netlist editor provides two commands for ripping up existing routing or other material They are ripup ripup netlist The first command starts by finding any paint in the edit cell that lies underneath the box It then works outward from that paint to find all paint in the edit cell that is electrically connected to the starting paint All of this paint is erased ripup isn t really necessary since the same effect can be achieved by selecting all the paint in the net and deleting the selection it s a hangover from olden days when there was no selection The second form of the command ripup netlist is similar to the first except that it starts from each of the terminals in the current netlist instead of the box Any paint in the edit cell that is electrically connected to a terminal is e
194. e middle button with the cursor over empty space Technically this will erase all paint layers and labels too However since the box has zero area erasing paint has no effect only the labels are erased 7 Labelling Conventions When creating labels Magic will permit you to use absolutely any text whatsoever However many other tools and even parts of Magic expect label names to observe cer tain conventions Except for the special cases described below labels shouldn t contain any of the characters Spaces control characters or parentheses within labels are probably a bad idea too Many of the programs that process Magic output have their own restrictions on label names so you should find out about the restrictions that apply at your site Most labels are node names each one gives a unique identification to a set of 6 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 things that are electrically connected There are two kinds of node names local and glo bal Any label that ends in is treated as a global node name it will be assumed that all nodes by this name anywere in any cell in a layout are electrically connected The most common global names are Vdd and GND the power rails You should always use these names exactly since many other tools require them Nobody knows why GND is all in capital letters and Vdd isn t 66979 Any label that does not
195. e of the tut4x instances nothing will be changed Section 4 tells how to switch the edit cell Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 Place the cursor over one of the tut4x array elements again At this point the cur sor is actually over three different cells tut4x an element of an array instance within tut4y tut4y an instance within tut4a and tut4 Even the topmost cell in the hierarchy is treated as an instance by Magic When you press the s key to select a cell Magic ini tially chooses the smallest instance visible underneath the cursor tut4x in this case However if you invoke the s macro again or type select without moving the cursor Magic will step through all of the instances under the cursor in order Try this out The same is true of the f macro and select cell When there are many different expanded cells on the screen you can use the selec tion commands to select paint from any of them You can select anything that s visible regardless of which cell it s in However as mentioned above you can only modify paint in the edit cell If you use move or upsidedown or similar commands when you ve selected information outside the edit cell the information outside the edit cell is removed from the selection before performing the operation There are two additional commands you can use for expanding and unexpanding cells expand unexpand Both of these commands operate on the area underneath th
196. e orient the text of a label by clicking the right mouse button inside the placer area For example if you would like to move a label s text so that it appears centered above the label place the box over the label and right click the top center placer square If you entered several labels at once only the first appears in the current text area However you can advance to the next label by right clicking inside the current text area In this way you can place a long series of labels entirely with the mouse Try using this mechanism to add labels to tut7a The two small buttons underneath the right side of the current text area are called pumps To see how these work enter a label name containing a number into the current text area for example busl When you do this the l appears in the left pump Right clicking the pump causes the number to increment and left clicking the pump causes the number to decrement This makes it easy for you to enter a series of num bered signal names If a name has two numbers in it the second number will appear in the second pump and it can be incremented or decremented too Try using the pumps to place a series of numbered names The last entry in the label portion of the menu is the Find button This can be used to locate a label by searching for a given pattern If you click the Find button Magic will use the current text as a pattern and search the area underneath the box for a label whose nam
197. e plot The special layer labels will enable label plotting The second form is for driving printers like color Versatecs It is enabled by setting the color plot parameter to true A table of stipples for the primary colors black cyan 8 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 magenta abd yellow is given in the technology file When the plot command is given four rasters one for each of the colors are generated separated with the proper control sequences for the printer Otherwise operation is exactly as for the black and white case The third form of plotting is for generating Gremlin format files which can then be edited with the Gremlin drawing system or included in documents processed by Grn and Ditroff The command to get Gremlin files is plot gremlin file layers It will generate a Gremlin format file in file that describes everything underneath the box If layers is specified it indicates which layers are to appear in the file otherwise every thing visible on the screen is output The Gremlin file is output without any particular scale use the width or height commands in Grn to scale the plot when it s printed You should use the mg stipples when printing Magic Gremlin plots these will produce the same stipple patterns as plot versatec Finally the pixels style of plotting generates a file of pixel values for the region to be plotted This can be useful for in
198. e product of their distance to the window and the penalty factor It was originally thought that small penalties might be desirable but experi ence so far has shown that large penalties work better In particular it is important that the ratio between the actual cost of a route and the initial estimate is less than the value of penalty otherwise the search can explode take practically forever If you suspect this is happening you can set verbosity to 2 to check or just increase the value of penalty In summary it appears that the value of penalty doesn t matter much as long as it is large but not so large as to cause overflows It will probably be removed in the future penetration This parameter takes the value AUTOMATIC or a positive integer It determines how far into a blocked area the router will penetrate to make a connection Note however the router will in no case violate spacing constraints to nodes not involved in the route window This parameter takes the value COMMAND the default or a window id small integers It determines the reference window for routes The router sees the world as it appears in the reference window e g it sees the contents of subcells expanded in the reference window If window is set to COMMAND the reference window is the one that contained the cursor when the route was invoked To set the reference window to a fixed window place the cursor in that window and type siroute wizard window 15
199. e quotes Position tells where the text should be displayed relative to the point of the label It may be any of north south east west top bottom left right up down center northeast ne southeast se southwest sw northwest nw For example if ne is given the text will be displayed above and to the right of the label point If no position is given Magic will pick a position for you Layer 5 Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 tells which paint layer to attach the label to If layer covers the entire area of the label then the label will be associated with the particular layer If layer is omitted or if it doesn t cover the label s area Magic initially associates the label with the space layer then checks to see if there s a layer that covers the whole area If there is Magic moves the label to that layer It is generally a bad idea to place labels at points where there are several paint layers since it will be hard to tell which layer the label is attached to As you edit Magic will ensure that labels are only attached to layers that exist everywhere under the label To see how this works paint the layer pdiff brown over the label you just created the label will switch layers Finally erase poly over the area and the label will move again Although many labels are point labels this need not be the case You can label any rectangular area by setting the box to that area
200. e same type 11 5 Background checker step size Magic s background design rule checker breaks large cells up into smaller pieces checking each piece independently For very large designs the number of pieces can get to be enormous If designs are large but sparse the performance of the design rule checker can be improved tremendously by telling it to use a larger step size for breaking up cells This is done as follows 31 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 stepsize stepsize which causes each cell to be processed in square pieces of at most stepsize by stepsize units It is generally a good idea to pick a large stepsize but one that is small enough so each piece will contain no more than 100 to 1000 rectangles 12 Extract section The extract section of a technology file contains the parameters used by Magic s circuit extractor Each line in this section begins with a keyword that determines the interpretation of the remainder of the line Table 14 gives an example extract section This section is like the cifinput and cifoutput sections in that it supports multiple extraction styles Each style is preceded by a line of the form 239 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 style stylename All subsequent lines up to the next style line or the end of the section are interpreted as belonging to extraction style stylename If there is no initial style line
201. e that was used to produce the original ext files to see whether transistor gate capacitance is included or excluded see Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File for details attr name xl yl xh yh type text One of these lines appears for each label ending in the character that was attached to geometry in the node name The location of each attribute label xl yl xh yh and the type of material to which it was attached type are given along with the text of the label minus the trailing character text equiv nodel node2 Defines two node names in cell name as being equivalent node and node2 In a collection of node names related by equiv lines exactly one must be defined by a node line described above fet type xl yl xh yh area perim sub GATE T1 T2 Defines a transistor in name The kind of transistor is type a string that comes from the technol ogy file and is intended to have meaning to simulation programs The coordinates of a square entirely contained in the gate region of the transistor are xl yl for its lower left and xh yh for its upper right All four coordinates are in the name s coordinate space and are subject to scaling as described in scale above The gate region of the transistor has area area square centimicrons and perimeter perim centimicrons The substrate of the transistor is connected to node sub The remainder of a fet line consists of a series of triples GA
202. e two original shapes in a belong to different cells and if CIF is generated separately in each cell the result will be the same as in a Magic handles this by outputting additional infor mation in the parent of the subcells to fill in the gap between the shapes 18 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 8 6 Hierarchy Hierarchical designs make life especially difficult for the CIF generator The CIF corresponding to a collection of subcells may not necessarily be the same as the sum of the CIF s of the individual cells For example if a layer is generated by growing and then shrinking nearby features from different cells may merge together so that they don t shrink back to their original shapes see Figure 4 If Magic generates CIF separately for each cell the interactions between cells will not be reflected properly The CIF generator attempts to avoid these problems Although it generates CIF in a hierarchical representa tion that matches the Magic cell structure it tries to ensure that the resulting CIF patterns are exactly the same as if the entire Magic design had been flattened into a single cell and then CIF were generated from the flattened design It does this by looking in each cell for places where subcells are close enough to interact with each other or with paint in the parent Where this happens Magic flattens the interaction area and generates CIF for it then Magic flattens each of
203. eNumber type list X type list B The first form of line associates a Gremlin stipple number with all Magic layers in type list When Gremlin files are generated all areas covered by type list will appear as stip pled areas filled with stipple stippleNumber and bordered with thin solid lines The second form is designed for contacts It causes each tile in type list to be outlined with a medium thickness line with an additional medium thickness X drawn between oppo site corners The B specification is identical to X except that only the border is drawn without the diagonal X Within the versatec subsection lines may also be in either of three forms type list patO pat patl5 type list X type list B In the first case the material of types type list is rendered with a stipple pattern given by 16 hexadecimal numbers Each number contains four hex digits the result is a 16 by 16 bit pattern of 1 s and 0 s A one means that the corresponding bit of the output file is set and a zero means that the bit is not modified when this layer is rendered thus the patterns from different type lists will OR together PatO specifies the top line of the stipple pat tern within each pattern the most significant bit corresponds to the leftmost bit within the line of the stipple pattern Stippled areas area also bordered by thin solid lines The second and third forms X and B are similar to the second and third forms for gremlin
204. eal layers In each case name is the CIF name to be used for the layer If layers is specified it con sists of a comma separated list of Magic layers and previously defined CIF layers in this style these layers form the initial contents of the new CIF layer note the layer lists in this section are less general than what was described in Section 4 tildes and parentheses are not allowed If layers is not specified then the new CIF layer is initially empty The following statements are used to modify the contents of a CIF layer before it is output After the layer or templayer statement come several statements specifying geometrical operations to apply in building the CIF layer Each statement takes the current contents of the layer applies some operation to it and produces the new contents of the layer The last geometrical operation for the layer determines what is actually out put in the CIF file The geometrical operations are or layers and layers and not layers grow amount shrink amount bloat or layers layers2 amount layers2 amount bloat max layers layers2 amount layers2 amount bloat min layers layers2 amount layers2 amount squares size squares border size separation The operation or takes all the layers which may be either Magic layers or previously defined CIF layers and or s them with the material already in the CIF layer The opera tion and is similar to or except that it and s the layers with th
205. eates debugging information in dbx s format Because of the size of Magic and the way Unix handles debugging symbols it s slow to compile a complete version of Magic with debugging information for everything and the executable file ends up being enormous To solve this problem the Makefiles are set up to strip off debugging information before installing Thus you have to link with uninstalled versions to get debugging information In most cases debugging information is only needed for a few modules at a time namely the modules you re currently modify ing The database module is set up to install with debugging symbols since it seems to be involved in almost all debugging If you try to use older versions of dbx you ll discover that Magic has too many pro cedures for the default table sizes dbx runs out of space and dies The solution is either to recompile dbx with larger tables or throw away pieces of Magic to reduce the number of procedures we recommend the first alternative There are a number of commands that we implemented in Magic to assist in debug ging These commands are called wizard commands and aren t visible to normal Magic users They all start with To get terse online help for the wizard commands type help wizard to Magic The wizard commands aren t documented very well Some of the more useful ones are watch plane This causes Magic to display on the screen the corner stitched tile structure
206. ech section Magic stores the technology of a cell in the cell s file on disk When reading a cell back in to Magic from disk the cell s technology must match the name of the current technology which appears as a single word in the tech section of the technology file See Table 1 for an example tech scmos end Table 1 Tech section It may seem that storing the technology name as part of the technology file is redun dant since the name of the file is probably the same as the name of the technology e g scmos tech26 for technology semos or nmos tech26 for technology nmos This feature is leftover from olden days when slight variants of a technology would be created by having a new technology file with a different file name but the same official name given in the tech section This has the advantage that cells designed with one variant could be edited with any of the other files implementing the same technology without having to modify the technology names in the mag files The disadvantage of this approach however is that it defeats Magic technology defaulting mechanism if no explicit technology is specified when Magic starts up it reads the technology from the mag file being edited and looks for a technology file by this name If there are several variants of the same technology Magic will pick the one with the desired technology file name Anyhow we recommend that the internal names of techn
207. ed Finally the length option determines whether or not pathlengths in the root cell are com puted see extract length below extract help Prints a short synopsis of all the extract command options extract length option args Provides several options for controlling which point to point path lengths are extracted explicitly The extractor maintains two internal tables one of drivers or places where a signal is generated and one of receivers or places where a signal is sent The com ponents of each table are hierarchical label names defined by means of the two com mands extract length driver namel name2 and extract length receiver namel name2 If extraction of pathlengths is enabled extract do length then when the root cell in an extract command is being extracted the extractor will compute the shortest and longest path between each driver and each receiver on the same electrical net and output it to the ext file for the root cell Normally one should create a file of these Magic commands for the circuit drivers and receivers of interest and use source to 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 9 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 read it in prior to circuit extraction Extract length clear removes all the entries from both the driver and receiver tables extract parents Extract the currently selected cell and all of its parents All of its parents must be loaded in order for this to work correct
208. ed by others too Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 1 What is Magic Magic is an interactive system for creating and modifying VLSI circuit layouts With Magic you use a color graphics display and a mouse or graphics tablet to design basic cells and to combine them hierarchically into large structures Magic is different from other layout editors you may have used The most important difference is that Magic is more than just a color painting tool it understands quite a bit about the nature of circuits and uses this information to provide you with additional operations For example Magic has built in knowledge of layout rules as you are editing it continu ously checks for rule violations Magic also knows about connectivity and transistors and contains a built in hierarchical circuit extractor Magic also has a plow operation that you can use to stretch or compact cells Lastly Magic has routing tools that you can use to make the global interconnections in your circuits Magic is based on the Mead Conway style of design This means that it uses simplified design rules and circuit structures The simplifications make it easier for you to design circuits and permit Magic to provide powerful assistance that would not be pos sible otherwise However they result in slightly less dense circuits than you could get
209. ed in it it returns the resistance estimate in milliohms EFVisitResists visits each of the explicit resistors in the circuit applying resProc to each The arguments to resProc are similar to those of capProc the HierNames hn and hn2 of the two terminals of the resistor its resistance res and the client data cdata with which EF VisitResists was called A final procedure is provided for looking up distance information EFLookDist searches to find if there was a distance measured between the points with the HierNames hnl and hn2 If there was a distance found it returns TRUE and leaves pMinDist and pMaxDist set respectively to the minimum and max imum measured distance between the two points otherwise it returns FALSE NODE ORGANIZATION Each electrical node in the circuit is represented by an EFNode structure which points to a NULL terminated list of EFNodeNames each of which in turn points to the HierName list representing the hierarchical name EFNodes contain capacitance perimeter and area information for a node If this infor mation is not required an application may use EFNodeHadr structures in place of EFNodes in many cases an EFNodeHdr consists of just the first few fields of an EFNode Each EFNodeName is pointed to by a HashEntry in a hash table of all flattened node names HIERARCHICAL NAME MANIPULATION Hierarchical node names are represented as lists of HierName structures These structures store a hierarch ical pathname s
210. eginning with the characters and ending with the characters Comments are ignored when processing a technology file In scmos tech you can see several lines just before the con nect section near the beginning of the technology file that are of the form define These lines are definitions of macros that may be used in subsequent lines in the technol ogy file The form of comments and macro definitions should look familiar to C program mers for good reason the C macro preprocessor is used to expand macros and elim inate comments Technology files cannot be read directly by Magic in their raw form the C preprocessor is run to produce a Magic readable version of the technology file The last section in this tutorial describes how to install technology files Each section in a technology file consists of a series of lines Each line consists of a series of words separated by spaces or tabs If a line ends with the character the V is ignored and the following newline is treated as an ordinary blank For example Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 width allDiff 2 Diffusion width must be at least 2 is treated as though it had all appeared on a single line with no intervening The rest of this part of the tutorial will describe each of the technology file sections in turn 2 T
211. elect area selects paint under the box For a synopsis of all the options to the select command type select help 5 Operations on the Selection Once you ve made a selection there are a number of operations you can perform on it delete move direction distance stretch direction distance scopy upsidedown sideways clockwise degrees The delete command deletes everything that s selected Watch out delete is different from erase which erases paint from the area underneath the box Select the red bar on the right in tut2b and type d which is a macro for delete Undo the deletion with the u macro The move command picks up both the box and the selection and moves them so that the lower left corner of the box is at the cursor location Select the red bar on the right and move it so that it falls on top of the vertical part of the blue L You can use t translate as a macro for move Practice moving various things around the screen The command copy and its macro are just like move except that a copy of the selec tion is left behind at the original position There is also a longer form of the move command that you can use to move the selection a precise amount For example move up 10 will move the selection and the box up 10 units The direction argument can be any direction like left south down etc See the Magic manual page for a complete list of the legal directions The ma
212. elow Some of the options can be invoked via mouse buttons when the wiring tool is active wire help Print out a synopsis of the various wiring commands wire horizontal Just like wire leg except that the new segment is forced to be horizontal wire leg 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 21 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 Paint a horizontal or vertical segment of wire from one side of the box over to the cursor s x or y location respectively The direction horizontal or vertical is chosen so as to produce the longest possible segment The segment is painted in the current wir ing material and thickness The new segment is selected and the box is placed at its tip wire switch layer width Switch routing layers and place a contact at the box location The contact type is chosen to connect the old and new routing materials The box is placed at the position of the contact and the contact is selected If layer and width are specified they are used as the new routing material and width respectively If they are not specified the new material and width are chosen to correspond to the material underneath the cursor wire type ayer width Pick a material and width for wiring If layer and width are not given then they are chosen from the material underneath the cursor a square chunk of material is selected to indicate the layer and width that were chosen and the box is placed over this chunk If layer and width are give
213. en the label is attached to the layer under the box or space if no layer covers the entire area of the box If layer is specified but layer doesn t cover the entire area of the box the label will be moved to another layer or space Labels attached to space will be considered by CIF processing programs to be attached to all layers overlapping the area of the label Pos is optional and specifies where the label text is to be displayed relative to the box e g north If pos isn t given Magic will pick a position to ensure that the label text doesn t stick out past the edge of the cell layers Prints out the names of all the layers defined for the current technology load file Load the cell hierarchy rooted at file mag into the window underneath the cursor If no file is sup plied a new unnamed cell is created The root cell of the hierarchy is made the edit cell unless there is already an edit cell in a different window move direction amount 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 14 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 move to x y If no arguments are given the selection is picked up by the point underneath the lower left corner of the box and moved so that this point lies at the cursor location If direction is given it must be a Manhattan direction e g north The selection is moved in that direction by amount If the box is in the same window as the selection it is moved too Amount defaults to 1 Selected mate
214. eneral form grid takes four integer arguments XOrigin and yOrigin specify an origin for the grid horizontal and vertical grid lines will pass through this point XSpacing and ySpacing determine the number of units between adjacent grid lines If xOrigin and yOrigin are omitted they default to 0 If ySpacing is also omitted the xSpacing value is used for both spacings Grid parameters will be retained for a window until explicitly changed by another grid command When the grid is displayed a solid box is drawn to show the origin of the edit cell identify instance_id Set the instance identifier of the selected cell use to instance_id Instance_id must be unique among all instance identifiers in the parent of the selected cell Initially Magic guarantees uniqueness of identifiers by giving each cell an initial identifier consisting of the cell definition name followed by an underscore and a small integer iroute subcommand args This command provides an interactive interface to the Magic maze router Routing is done one connection at a time Three internal hint layers magnet fence and rotate allow the user to guide routing graphically Routes are chosen close to magnets if possible routing does not cross fence boundaries and rotate areas reverse the preferred routing directions for each layer The maze router seeks to find a lowest cost path Parameters specifying costs for horizontal and verti cal routing on each layer cost for jogs and
215. ent in the dlys file All terminals in the net file are by default considered to be inputs receivers unless explicitly identified as drivers in the drivefile given with the D option see the description below In addition to identifying the terminals of interest the net file gives the signal name associated with each net as a comment line immediately prior to the list of termi nals in the net The remaining arguments to ext2dlys tell how this capacitance and distance information is to be converted into delay as well as specifying the use of alternate files d psPerPf Used to turn capacitance into delay one picofarad is equal to psPerPf picoseconds of delay The default value is 100 0 or roughly what one would expect if using 100 ohm drivers The value of psPerPf is used only for drivers whose effective on resistance hasn t been given explicitly in the drivefile specified with the D flag see below I psPerCentimicron Used to turn distance into delay one centimicron of distance is equal to psPerCentimicron picoseconds of delay m minmult maxmult Multipliers to convert estimated delays into best case minmult and worst case maxmult Both are 1 0 by default 0 outfile Write the output to outfile note that no suffix is implied instead of to the standard output t capscale Gives a scale factor by which units of capacitance in the sim file will be multiplied in order to give femtofarads Capscale may be a re
216. ent irouter parameter settings The parameters can be restored to these values with the command source filename iroute search searchParameter value Allows parameters controlling the search to be modified If routing is too slow try increasing rate If the router is producing bad results try reducing rate Its a good idea to make width at least twice as big as rate iroute spacings route type type spacing typen spacingn Default minimum spacings between a route type placed by the router and other types are derived from the dre section of the technology file The defaults can be overridden by this command The special type SUBCELL is used to specify minimum spacing to unexpanded subcells iroute verbosity level Controls the number of messages printed during routing 0 errors and warnings only 1 brief 2 lots of statistics iroute version Prints irouter version information iroute wizard wizardparameter value Used to examine and set miscellaneous parameters Most of these are best left alone by the unadventurous user label string pos layer A label with text string is positioned at the box location Labels may cover points lines or areas and are associated with specific layers Normally the box is collapsed to either a point or to a line when labeling terminals on the edges of cells Normally also the area under the box is occupied by a single layer If no layer argument is specified th
217. entData cdata EF ReadFile name char name EFFlatBuild rootName flags char rootName int flags EFFlatDone EF VisitCaps capProc cdata int capProc hn1 hn2 double cap cdata ClientData cdata EF VisitFets fetProc cdata int fetProc fet prefix trans cdata ClientData cdata EF VisitNodes nodeProc cdata int nodeProc node int r double c cdata ClientData cdata int EFNodeResist node EFNode node EF VisitResists resProc cdata int resProc hn1 hn2 res cdata 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic EXTFLAT 3 EXTFLAT 3 CAD Tool User s Manual ClientData cdata bool EFLookDist hn1 hn2 pMinDist pMaxDist HierName hn1 hn2 int pMinDist pMaxDist char EFHNToStr hn HierName hn HierName EFStrToHN prefix suffixStr HierName prefix char suffixStr HierName EFHNConcat prefix suffix HierName prefix suffix HashEntry EFHNLook prefix suffixStr errorStr HierName prefix char suffixStr char errorStr HashEntry EFHNConcatLook prefix suffix errorStr HierName prefix suffix char errorStr EFHNOut hn outf HierName hn FILE outf EFHNFree hn prefix type HierName hn prefix int type bool EFHNBest hn1 hn2 HierName hn1 hn2 bool EFHNIsGND hn HierName hn bool EFHNIsGlob hn HierName hn typedef struct hiername HierName 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic EXTFLAT 3 EXTFLAT 3 CA
218. entioned above though each tile type defined in the types section appears on exactly one plane This seeming conflict is resolved by having Magic automatically generate new tile types for each of the planes on which a contact appears The contact section lets Magic know which types are contacts and the adjacent planes and component types to which they are connected Each line in the contact section begins with a tile type base which is thereby defined to be a contact This type is also referred to as a contact s base type The remainder of each line is a list of two or three non contact tile types that are connected by the contact These tile types are referred to as the component types of the contact and are the layers that would be present if there were no electrical connection i e no via hole In Table 5 for example the type pcontact is the base type of a contact connecting the component layers polysilicon on the active plane with metall1 on the metal1 plane The home plane of one of the component types should be the same as that of the base type active in the case of pcontact and the other type s must be on planes adja cent to that of the base If two planes appear on subsequent lines in the planes section then they are considered to be adjacent Hence the active plane is adjacent to the well and metall planes but not to the metal2 plane The above scheme allows you to define contacts that connect at most three layers togethe
219. enty modifications are recorded for undoing updatedisplay Update the display This command is normally invoked only from command scripts produced by the logcommands command Command scripts that do not contain this command update the screen only at the end of the script view Choose a view for the window underneath the cursor so that everything in the window is visible windscrollbars onloff Set the flag that determines if new windows will have scroll bars windowpositions file Write out the positions of the windows in a format suitable for the source command If file is specified then write it out to that file instead of to the terminal zoom factor Zoom the view in the window underneath the cursor by factor If factor is less than 1 we zoom in if it is greater than one we zoom out MOUSE BUTTONS FOR NETLIST WINDOWS When the netlist menu is opened using the command special netlist a menu appears on the screen The colored areas on the menu can be clicked with various mouse buttons to perform various actions such as placing labels and editing netlists For details on how to use the menu see Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing The menu buttons all correspond to commands that could be typed in netlist or layout win dows 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 24 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 COMMANDS FOR NETLIST WINDOWS The commands described below work if you are pointing to the interior of the netli
220. er case nothing happens until you release the button Before releasing the button move the cursor so it is over a different color somewhere on the screen If you pressed the left button then when the button is released the color underneath the cursor becomes the new current color and all future editing operations will affect this color Try using this feature to modify the color used for win dow borders If you pressed the right button then when the button is released the value of the current color is copied from whatever color is present underneath the cursor There are only a few commands you can type in color windows aside from those that are valid in all windows The command color number will change the current color to number If no number is given this command will print out the current color and its red green and blue intensities The command save techStyle displayStyle monitorType will save the current color map in a file named techStyle displayStyle monitorType cmap where techStyle is the type of technology e g mos displayStyle is the kind of display specified by a styletype in the style section of a technology file e g 7bit and monitor Type is the type of the current monitor e g std If no arguments are given the current technology style display style and monitor type are used The command sload techStyle displayStyle monitorType Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 will load t
221. er empty space This com mand has the same effect as clicking on the Show menu button showterms Find the labels corresponding to each of the terminals in the current netlist and generate a feed back area over each This command has the same effect as clicking on the Terms menu button trace name This command is similar to shownet except that instead of starting from a piece of paint under the box it starts from each of the terminals in the net containing name or the current net if no name is given All connected paint in all cells is highlighted verify Compare the current netlist against the wiring in the edit cell to make sure that the nets are imple mented exactly as specified in the netlist If there are discrepancies feedback areas are created to describe them This command can also be invoked by clicking the Verify menu button writeall Scan through all the netlists that have been read during this editing session If any have been modified ask the user whether or not to write them out MOUSE BUTTONS FOR COLORMAP WINDOWS Color windows display two sets of colored bars and a swatch of the color being edited The left set of color bars is labeled Red Green and Blue these correspond to the proportion of red green and blue in the color being edited The right set of bars is labeled Hue Saturation and Value these correspond to the same color but in a space whose axes are hue spectral color s
222. erminal from its net extract Pick a piece of paint in the edit cell that lies under the box Starting from this trace out all the electrically connected material in the edit cell Where this material touches subcells find any ter minals in the subcells and make a new net containing those terminals Note this is a different command from the extract command in layout windows find pattern layers Search the area beneath the box for labels matching pattern which may contain the regular expression characters lt P T and V as matched by csh 1 see the description of the find button in Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing For each label found leave feed back whose text is the layer on which the label appears followed by a semicolon followed by the full hierarchical pathname of the label The feedback surrounds the area of the label by one unit on all sides The reason for the one unit extension is that feedback rectangles must have positive area while labels may have zero width or height If layers are given only labels attached to those layers are considered flush netlist The netlist named netlist is reloaded from the disk file netlist net Any changes made to the netlist since the last time it was written are discarded If netlist isn t given the current netlist is flushed join term term2 Join together the nets containing terminals term and term2 The result is a sin
223. es the name of the port attached to a text terminal the name of the port attached to the associated graphics terminal the phosphor type of the graphics terminal s monitor and the type of graphics terminal An applications program may use the phosphor type to select a color map tuned to the monitor s charac teristics Only the std phosphor type is supported at UC Berkeley The graphics terminal type specifies the device driver a program should use when communicating with its graphics terminal Magic supports types UCB512 AED1024 and SUN120 Other programs may recog nize different display types See the manual entry for your specific application for more information A sample displays file is dev ttyil dev ttyi0 std UCB512 dev ttyj0 dev ttyj1 std UCB512 dev ttyjf dev ttyhf std UCB512 dev ttyhb dev ttyhe std UCB512 dev ttyhc dev ttyhb std UCB512 in 0 5i In this example dev ttyil connects to a text terminal An associated UCB512 graphics terminal with stan dard phosphor is connected to dev ttyi0 Magic uses the displays file cad lib displays Gremlin looks in usr local displays SEE ALSO magic 1 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 19 85 1 DLYS 5 CAD Tool User s Manual DLYS 5 NAME dlys format of dlys files read by the SCALD simulator and timing verifier DESCRIPTION The SCALD simulator and timing verifier can accept information about the actual delays of wires in a cir cuit This delay informa
224. es the previous ones just as if they were painted by hand similar to the cifoutput section It can contain several styles with a line of the form style name used to end the description of the previous style if any and start a new CIF input style called name If no initial style name is given the name default is assigned Each style must have a statement of the form 20 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 scalefactor centimicrons to indicate how many hundredths of a micron correspond to one unit in Magic Like the cifoutput section each style consists of a number of layer descriptions A layer description contains one or more lines describing a series of geometric operations to be performed on CIF layers The result of all these operations is painted on a particu lar Magic layer just as if the user had painted that information by hand A layer descrip tion begins with a statement of the form layer magicLayer layers In the layer statement magicLayer is the Magic layer that will be painted after perform ing the geometric operations and layers is an optional list of CIF layers If layers is specified it is the initial value for the layer being built up If layers isn t specified the layer starts off empty As in the cifoutput section each line after the layer statement gives a geometric operation that is applied to the previous contents of the layer being built in order to generate new c
225. esistor between nodes node and node2 of resistance res ohms This con struct is only interpreted by a few programs N node darea dperim parea pperim marea mperim As an alternative to computed capacitances some tools expect the total perimeter and area of the polysilicon diffusion and metal in each node to be reported in the sim file The N construct associates diffusion area darea in square centimicrons and diffusion perimeter dperim in cen timicrons with node node polysilicon area parea and perimeter pperim and metal area marea and perimeter mperim This construct is technology dependent and obsolete 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 SIM 5 CAD Tool User s Manual SIM 5 A node attr Associates attribute attr for node node The string attr should contain no blanks nodel node2 Each node in a sim file is named implicitly by having it appear in a transistor definition All node names appearing in a sim file are assumed to be distinct Some tools such as esim 1 recognize aliases for node names The construct allows the name node2 to be defined as an alias for the name nodel Aliases defined by means of this construct may not appear anywhere else in the sim file SEE ALSO crystal 1 esim 1 ext2sim 1 sim2spice 1 ext 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 vdmpc 5 CAD Tool User s Manual vdmpc 5 NAME vdmpc format of vdmpc color bitmaps raster images for printing SYNTAX none DESCRIPTION
226. esistors specifying this flag turns this feature off extout on off Turns on and off the writing of the root res ext file The default value is on lumped on off Turns on the writing of root res lump This file contains an updated value of the lumped resistance for each net that extresis extracts silent on off This option suppresses printing of the name and location of nets for which resistors are produced skip mask Specifies a list of layers that the resistance extractor is to ignore help Print brief list of options Attribute labels may also be used to specify certain extractor options For a descrip tion of attributes and how they work see tutorial 2 Following is a description of extresis attributes res skip Causes this net to be skipped This is useful for avoiding extraction of power supplies or other DC signals that are not labeled Vdd or GND res force Forces extraction of this net regardless of its lumped resistance value Nets with both skip and force labels attached will cause the extractor to complain res min value Sets the smallest resistor size for this net The default value is the resistance of the largest driving transistor divided by the tolerance described above Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 res drive Nets with no driving transistors will normally not be extracted This option allows the designer to specify from where in the net the signal is driven
227. est way is to find a piece of material of the right type and width point to it with the cur sor and click the left mouse button Try this in tut3a by pointing to the label 1 and left clicking Magic prints out the material and width that it chose selects a square of that material and width around the cursor and places the box around the square Try pointing to various places in tut3a and left clicking Once you ve selected the wiring material the right button paints legs of a wire Left click on label 1 to select the red material then move the cursor over label 2 and right click This will paint a red wire between 1 and 2 The new wire leg is selected so that you can modify it with selection commands and the box is placed over the tip of the leg to show you the starting point for the next wire leg Add more legs to the wire by right clicking at 3 and then 4 Use the mouse buttons to paint another wire in blue from 5 to 6 to 7 Each leg of a wire must be either horizontal or vertical If you move the cursor diagonally Magic will still paint a horizontal or vertical line whichever results in the longest new wire leg To see how this works left click on 8 in tut3a then right click on 9 You ll get a horizontal leg Now undo the new leg and right click on 10 This time you ll get a vertical leg You can force Magic to paint the next leg in a particular direc tion with the commands wire horizontal wire vertical Try out this feature by
228. ets of tile types width pwell 6 P Well width must be at least 6 MOSIS rule 1 1 width nwell 6 N Well width must be at least 6 MOSIS rule 1 1 width allDiff 2 Diffusion width must be at least 2 MOSIS rule 2 1 width allPoly 2 Polysilicon width must be at least 2 MOSIS rule 3 1 Table 12b Some width rules in the dre section 11 1 Width rules The minimum width of a collection of types taken together is expressed by a width rule Such a rule has the form width type list width error where type list is a set of tile types see Section 4 for syntax width is an integer and error is a string enclosed in double quotes that can be printed by the command dre why if the rule is violated A width rule requires that all regions containing any types in the set types must be wider than w in both dimensions For example in Table 12b the rule width nwell 6 N Well width must be at least 6 MOSIS rule 1 1 means that nwells must be at least 6 units wide whenever they appear The type list field may contain more than a single type as in the following rule width allDiff 2 Diffusion width must be at least 2 MOSIS rule 2 1 which means that all regions consisting of the types containing any kind of diffusion be at least 2 units wide Because many of the rules in the dre section refer to the same sets of layers the define facility of the C preprocessor is used t
229. f LLNL The new extresis command developed by Don Stark provides substan tially better resistance extraction Magic s normal extraction extract lumps resistances on a node into a single value In branching networks this approxi mation is often not acceptable Resis was written to solve this problem Walter Scott added accurate path length extraction an important feature when dealing with high speed circuits such as ECL New contact structure Walter Scott and Michael Arnold of LLNL and Don Stark of Stanford Overview of DECWRL Livermore Magic September 19 1990 Multilayer contacts are handled better In the previous version of Magic there needed to be a separate contact type for each possible combination of contact layers over a given point This caused a combinatorial explosion of tile types for multi layer technologies with stacked contacts Under the new scheme there are only a couple of tile types for each layer one that connects up one that connects down and one that connects in both directions Simulator Interface to IRSIM Stanford A simulator interface is provided courtesy of Stanford See the commands startrsim simcmd and rsim The irsim simulator Stanford s much improved rewrite of esim is included in this distribution Credit goes to Mike Chow Arturo Salz and Mark Horowitz New device machine Support Various X11 is fully supported in this release and is the preferred interface Older driver
230. f acommand After each screenful of help information help stops and prints More If you type a space the next screenful of data will be output and if you type q the rest of the output will be skipped If you re interested in information about a particular subject you can type shelp subject This command will print out each command description that contains the subject string Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 If you have a question or problem that can t be answered with any of the above approaches you may contact the Magic authors by sending mail to magic ucbarpa Berkeley EDU or ucbvax ucbarpa magic This will log your mes sage in a file so we can t forget about it and forward the message to the Magic main tainers Magic maintenance is a mostly volunteer effort so when you report a bug or ask a question please be specific Obviously the more specific you are the more likely we can answer your question or reproduce the bug you found We ll tend to answer the specific bug reports first since they involve less time on our part Try to describe the exact sequence of events that led to the problem what you expected to happen and what actually happened If possible find a small example that reproduces the problem and send us the relevant small files so we can make it happen here Or best of all send us a bug fix along with a small example of the problem 3 Graphics Configuration Magic
231. f the cells that have changed since the last time they were saved on disk If you try to leave Magic without saving all the cells that have changed the system will warn you and give you a chance to return to Magic to save them Magic never flushes cells behind your back and never throws away definitions that it has read in Thus if you edit a cell and then use load to edit another cell the first cell is still saved in Magic even though it doesn t appear anywhere on the screen If you then invoke load a second time to go back to the first cell you ll get the edited copy If you decide that you d really like to discard the edits you ve made to a cell and recover the old version there are two ways you can do it The first way is using the flush option in writeall The second way is to use the command flush cellname If no cellname is given then the edit cell is flushed Otherwise the cell named cellname is flushed The flush command will expunge Magic s internal copy of the cell and replace it with the disk copy Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 When you are editing large chips Magic may claim that cells have changed even though you haven t modified them Whenever you modify a cell Magic makes changes in the parents of the cell and their parents and so on up to the root of the hierarchy These changes record new design rule violations as well as timestamp and bounding box information used by Magi
232. f the byte SEE ALSO vdmpc 8 AUTHOR Bob Mayo 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 PRLEAK 8 CAD Tool User s Manual PRLEAK 8 NAME prleak aid for debugging programs using malloc free SYNOPSIS prleak a d objfile tracefile DESCRIPTION FILES Prleak is a tool for use in debugging programs that make use of Magic s versions of malloc and free It examines the trace file produced by special versions of malloc and free produced when they are compiled with the DMALLOCTRACE flag The output of prleak is the average allocation size a list of leaky allocations blocks still allocated at program exit if l is specified a list of duplicate frees blocks that the program attempted to free after they had already been deallocated if d is specified and a list of all calls to malloc and free if a is specified If no switches are given the default action is as though l and d were in effect For each entry output both the address of the allocated block and a stack backtrace at the time of the call to malloc or free are printed Prleak attempts to use the namelist from objfile a out if no file is given to pro duce a symbolic backtrace If no namelist can be found the backtrace is printed in hex If tracefile is specified the malloc trace is read from it otherwise it is read from the file malloc out in the current direc tory An example output might be as follows Average alloca
233. f the cells that you have modified in this editing session and ask you what to do with the cell Normally you ll type write or just hit the BGs Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 return key in which case the cell will be written back to the disk file from which it was read if this is a new cell then you ll be asked for a name for the cell If you type autowrite then Magic will write out all the cells that have changed without asking you what to do on a cell by cell basis Flush will cause Magic to delete its internal copy of the cell and reload the cell from the disk copy thereby expunging all edits that you ve made Skip will pass on to the next cell without writing this cell but Magic still remembers that it has changed so the next time you invoke writeall Magic will ask about this cell again Abort will stop the command immediately without writing or checking any more cells IMPORTANT NOTE Unlike vi and other text editors Magic doesn t keep checkpoint files This means that if the system should crash in the middle of a session you ll lose all changes since the last time you wrote out cells It s a good idea to save your cells frequently during long editing sessions You can also save the cell you re currently editing with the command save name This command will append mag to name and save the cell you are editing in that location If you don t provide a name Magic wil
234. f the form o hi before the following slash Such a use id is interpreted as the elements lo through hi inclusive of a one dimensional array An element of a two dimensional array may be subscripted with two such ranges first the y range then the x range Whenever one path in a merge line contains such a subscript range the other must contain one of compar able size For example merge sub id 1 4 2 8 a sub id 2 5 1 7 b is acceptable because the range 1 4 is the same size as 2 5 and the range 2 8 is the same size as 1 7 When a connection occurs between nodes in different cells it may be that some resistance and capacitance has been recorded redundantly For example polysilicon in one cell may overlap polysilicon in another so the capacitance to substrate will have been recorded twice The values C al p1 etc in a merge line pro vide a way of compensating for such overlap Each of a1 p1 etc usually negative are added to the area and perimeter for material of each resistance class to give an adjusted area and perimeter for the aggregate node The value C attofarads also usually negative is added to the sum of the capacitances to substrate of nodes path and path2 to give the capacitance of the aggregate node 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 EXT 5 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT 5 cap nodel node2 C Defines a capacitor between the nodes node and node2 with capacitance C This construct is used to specify both internodal ca
235. factor To change the scalefactor you ll have to edit the appropriate style in the extract section of the technol ogy file This process is described in Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File 7 Flattening Extracted Circuits Unfortunately very few tools exist to take advantage of the ext 5 format files pro duced by Magic s extractor To use these files for simulation or timing analysis you will most likely need to convert them to a flattened format such as sim 5 or spice 5 There are several programs for flattening ext 5 files Ext2sim 1 produces sim 5 files suitable for use with crystal 1 esim 1 or rsim 1 Ext2spice 1 is used to pro duce spice 5 files for use with the circuit level simulator spice 1 Finally extcheck 1 can be used to perform connectivity checking and will summarize the number of flattened nodes transistors capacitors and resistors in a circuit All of these programs make use of a library known as extflat 3 so the conventions for each and the checks they perform are virtually identical The documentation for extcheck covers the options common to all of these programs To see how ext2sim works load the cell tut8n and expand all the tutm subcells Notice how the GND bus is completely wired but the Vdd bus is in three disconnected pieces Now extract everything with extract then exit Magic and run ext2sim tut8n You ll see the following sort of output 14
236. final parameter value is printed If valueS is NULL the parame ter value is not changed If file is NULL the result is printed with TxPrintf Magic s standard print func tion otherwise it is printed on the specified file SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 SHOW 3 CAD Tool User s Manual SHOW 3 NAME show procedure for displaying rects as feedback for debugging printing their values SYNOPSIS Void ShowRect def r style CellDef def Rect r int style DESCRIPTION Highlights the specified area in the specified cell and the specified style See the Magic garouter module for example uses SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 STACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual NAME stack procedures for managing stacks in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include magic h include stack h Stack StackNew sincr int sincr StackFree stack Stack stack ClientData StackPop stack Stack stack ClientData StackLook stack Stack stack StackPush arg stack ClientData arg Stack stack StackEnum stack func cdata Stack stack int func item i cdata ClientData item cdata int i StackCopy src dest copystr Stack src dest bool copystr bool StackEmpty stack Stack stack ClientData STACKPOP stack Stack stack ClientData STACKLOOK stack Stack stack STACKPUSH lt arg stack ClientData arg Stack stack DESCRIPTION STACK 3
237. for each side is applied uniformly to the side as on the right tile of type layers abuts a tile of type layers2 the first tile is grown on that side by amount The result is or ed with the current contents of the CIF plane The layer may be used as ayers2 to indicate all tile types Where tiles only have a single type of neighbor on each side all three forms of bloat are identical Where the neighbors are different the three forms are slightly different as illustrated in Figure 2 Note all the layers specified in any given bloat operation must lie on a single Magic plane For bloat or all distances must be positive In bloat max and bloat min the distances may be negative to provide a selective form of shrinking In retrospect it s not clear that bloat max and bloat min are very useful operations The problem is that they operate on tiles not regions This can cause unexpected behavior on concave regions For example if the region being bloated is in the shape of a T a single bloat factor will be applied to the underside of the horizontal bar If you use bloat max or bloat min you should probably specify design rules that require the shapes being bloated to be convex separation yt gee border _ gt lt lt ft size Figure 3 The squares operator chops each tile up into squares as determined by the bord er size and separation parameters In the ex
238. for one of the planes of the edit cell For example watch subcell will display the structure 12 Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 of the subcell tile plane including the address of the record for each tile and the values of its corner stitches Without this command it would have been virtually impossible to debug the database module profile onloff If you re using the Unix profiling tools to figure out where the cycles are going this command can be used to turn profiling off for everything except the particular operation you want to measure This command doesn t work on many systems because the operating system doesn t support selective enabling and disabling of profiling runstats This command prints out the CPU time usage since the last invocation of this com mand and also the total since starting Magic seeflags flag If you re working on the router this command allows you to see the various channel router flags by displaying them as feedback areas The cursor should first be placed over the channel whose flags you want to see 13 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File Walter Scott Special Studies Program Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory PO Box 808 L 270 Livermore CA 94550 wss mordor s1 gov John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by
239. for us to be able to supply drivers for all of them SUN120 A Sun Microsystems workstation model Sun2 120 with the SunColor option dev cgone0 and the Sun optical mouse Also works on some old Sun1s with the Sun2 brain transplant You must be running Suntools on the black and white display If no device is specified Magic tries to guess which driver is appropriate by checking the environment variables and by poking around in dev Types listed in cad lib displays override the default type 8 m The next argument is the name of the device to use for communication with the graphics display This is usually of the form dev ttyxx for displays connected by RS232 lines such as the AED family or for some workstations the name of the frame buffer device The next argument is used to select the right color map for the monitor s phosphors Std works well for most monitors This option is seldom used anymore now that monitors are manufactured 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 with more consistent phosphors i The next argument is the name of the port to use for input from the tablet This defaults to what ever port is being used for the graphics output and thus only needs to be specified under unusual circumstances Only used for serial line graphics terminals not workstations D System maintainers only Run Magic in debug mode This is intended for u
240. g attribute list may be absent i e there may be no g field at all The attribute lists gattrs etc are comma separated lists of labels The label names should not include any spaces although some tools can accept label names with spaces if they are enclosed in double quotes In version 6 4 5 and later the default format produced by ext2sim is SU In this format the attribute of the gate starting with S_ is the substrate node of the fet The attributes of the gate and source and substrate starting with A_ P_ are the area and perimeter summed for that node only once of the source and drain respectively This addition to the format is backwards compatible C nl n2 cap Defines a capacitor between nodes n and n2 The value of the capacitor is cap femtofarads NOTE since many analysis tools compute transistor gate capacitance themselves from the transistor s area and perimeter the capacitance between a node and substrate GND normally does not include the capacitance from transistor gates connected to that node If the sim file was produced by ext2sim 1 check the technology file that was used to produce the original ext files to see whether transistor gate capacitance is included or excluded see Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File for details R node res Defines the lumped resistance of node node to be res ohms This construct is only interpreted by a few programs r nodel node2 res Defines an explicit r
241. gle net containing all the terminals from both the old nets netlist name Select a netlist to work on If name is provided read name net if it hasn t already been read before and make it the current netlist If name isn t provided use the name of the edit cell instead print name Print the names of all the terminals in the net containing name If name isn t provided print the 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 25 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 terminals in the current net This command has the same effect as clicking on the Print menu button ripup netlist This command has two forms If netlist isn t typed as an argument then find a piece of paint in the edit cell under the box Trace out all paint in the edit cell that is electrically connected to the starting piece and delete all of this paint If netlist is typed find all paint in the edit cell that is electrically connected to any of the terminals in the current netlist and delete all of this paint savenetlist file Save the current netlist on disk If file is given write the netlist in file net Otherwise write the netlist back to the place from which it was read shownet Find a piece of paint in any cell underneath the box Starting from this paint trace out all paint in all cells that is electrically connected to the starting piece and highlight this paint on the screen To make the highlights go away invoke the command with the box ov
242. good routing Try to re arrange the cell structure to line up edges of nearby cells so that there are as few channels as possible and they are as large as possible before doing this you ll probably want to get rid of the existing routing by undo ing or by flushing the edit cell 8 2 Stems Another problem has to do with the stem generator Stems are the pieces of wiring that connect terminals up to grid points on the edges of channels The current stem gen eration code doesn t know about connectivity or design rules It simply finds the nearest routing grid point and wires out to that point without considering any other terminals If a terminal is not on the edge of the cell the stem runs straight across the cell to the nearest channel without any consideration for other material in the cell If two terminals are too close together Magic may decide to route them both to the same grid point When this happens you have two choices Either you can move the cell so that the ee bl Ee Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 terminals have different nearest grid points for example you can line its terminals up with the grid lines or if this doesn t work yov ll have to modify the cell to make the ter minals farther apart The place where stems cause the most trouble is in PLAs many of which have been optimized to space the outputs as closely together as possible In some cases the outputs are closer together tha
243. h the appropriate endpoints via Net2ir For details on Net2ir see the manual page ne 2ir 1 This tutorial provides detailed information on the use of the Irouter On line help Irouter subcommands Irouter parameters and hint layers are explained 2 Getting Started Cntl R Cntl N iroute and iroute help To make a connection with the Irouter place the cursor over one end of the desired connection the start point and the box at the other end the destination area Then type Cntl R Note that the box must be big enough to allow the route to terminate entirely within it A design rule correct connection between the cursor and the box should appear The macro Cntl R and the long commands siroute siroute route are all equivalent They invoke the Irouter to connect the cursor with the interior of the box Note that the last connection is always left selected This allows further terminals to be connected to the route with the second Irouter macro Cntl N Try typing Cntl N A connection between the cursor and the previous route should appear In general Cntl N routes from the cursor to the selection There are a number of commands to set parameters and otherwise interact with the router These commands have the general form siroute subcommand arguments For a list of subcommands and a short description of each type iroute help Usage information on a subcommand can be obtained by typing iroute help
244. h the contents flipped The command clockwise will rotate the selection clockwise leaving the lower left corner of the new selection at the same place as the lower left corner of the old selection Degrees must be a multiple of 90 and defaults to 90 At this point you know enough to do quite a bit of damage to the tut2b cell Exper iment with the selection commands Remember that you can use undo to back out of trouble 6 Labels Labels are pieces of text attached to the paint of a cell They are used to provide information to other tools that will process the circuit Most labels are node names they provide an easy way of referring to nodes in tools such as routers simulators and timing analyzers Labels may also be used for other purposes for example some labels are treated as attributes that give Crystal the timing analyzer information about the direc tion of signal flow through transistors Load the cell tut2c and place a cross in the middle of the red chunk to make a cross position the lower left corner of the box with the left button and then click the right button to place the upper right corner on top of the lower left corner Then type type the command label test A new label will appear at the position of the box The complete syntax of the label command is slabel text position layer Text must be supplied but the other arguments can be defaulted If text has any spaces in it then it must be enclosed in doubl
245. hange to indicate that you are now moving the box by its lower right corner Move the cursor to a different place on the screen and release the left button The box should move so that its lower right corner is at the cursor position Try using this feature to move the box so that it is almost entirely off screen to the left Try moving the box by each of its corners You can also reshape the box by corners other than the upper right To do this press the right mouse button and hold it down The cursor shape shows you that you are 5 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 reshaping the box by its upper right corner Now move the cursor near some other corner of the box and click the left button all the while holding the right button down The cursor shape will change to show you that now you are reshaping the box by a different corner When you release the right button the box will reshape so that the selected corner is at the cursor position but the diagonally opposite corner is unchanged Try reshaping the box by each of its corners 6 Invoking Commands Commands can be invoked in Magic in three ways by pressing buttons on the mouse by typing single keystrokes on the text keyboard these are called macros or by typing longer commands on the text keyboard these are called Jong commands Many of the commands use the box and cursor to help guide the command To see how commands can be invoked from the buttons f
246. he color map from the file named techStyle displayStyle monitorType cmap as above If no arguments are given the current technology style display style and moni tor type are used When loading color maps Magic looks first in the current directory then in the system library Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Commands introduced in this tutorial dre Macro introduced in this tutorial y 1 Continuous Design Rule Checking When you are editing a layout with Magic the system automatically checks design rules on your behalf Every time you paint or erase and every time you move a cell or change an array structure Magic rechecks the area you changed to be sure you haven t violated any of the layout rules If you do violate rules Magic will display little white dots in the vicinity of the violation This error paint will stay around until you fix the problem when the violation is corrected the error paint will go away automatically Error paint is written to disk with your cells and will re appear the next time the cell is read in There is no way to get rid of it except to fi
247. he value field of this HashEntry obtained through HashGetValue is a pointer to an EFNodeName which in turn points to the EFNode for this name EFHNLook returns NULL if there wasn t an entry in the node hash table by this name and also prints an error message of the form errorStr node prefix suffixStr not found EFHNConcatLook performs a similar function but its second argument is a HierName instead of a string EFHNOut writes the HierName An to the output FILE outf The t flag can be passed to EFArgs to request suppression of trailing or characters in node names when they are output by EFHNOut 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 4 EXTFLAT 3 CAD Tool User s Manual EXTFLAT 3 Three predicates are defined for HierNames EFHNBest returns TRUE if hn is preferred to hn2 or FALSE if the opposite is true Global names ending in are preferred to ordinary names which are preferred to automatically generated names ending in Among two names of the same type the one with the least number of pathname components is preferred If two names have the same number of com ponents the one lexicographically earliest is preferable EFHNIsGND returns TRUE if its argument is the ground node GND EFHNIsGlob returns TRUE if its argument is a global node name i e ends in an exclamation point SEE ALSO extcheck 1 ext2dlys 1 ext2sim 1 ext2spice 1 magic 1 mag
248. he writer of a technology file via edge rules These rules are applied at boundaries between material of two different types in any of four directions as shown in Figure 7 The design rule table contains a separate list of rules for each possible combination of materials on the two sides of an edge 27 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 tl t2 t2 tl Hy aan eee u lt a lt a 12 11 Figure 7 Design rules are applied at the edges between tiles in the same plane A rule is specified in terms of type t and type 72 the materials on either side of the edge Each rule may be applied in any of four directions as shown by the arrows The simplest rules re quire that only certain mask types can appear within distance d on 12 s side of the edge In its simplest form a rule specifies a distance and a set of mask types only the given types are permitted within that distance on type2 s side of the edge This area is referred to as the constraint region Unfortunately this simple scheme will miss errors in corner regions such as the case shown in Figure 8 To eliminate these problems the full rule format allows the constraint region to be extended past the ends of the edge under some circumstances See Figure 9 for an illustration of the corner rules and how they work Table 13 gives a complete description of the information in each design rul
249. hen back in again for the changes to take effect Under X11 Magic can run on a display of any depth for which there are colormap and dstyle files Monochrome 4 bit 6 bit and 7 bit files for Mos are distributed in this release You can explicitly specify how many planes Magic is to use by adding a suffix a ie Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 numeral between 1 and 7 to XWIND when used with Magic s d option For exam ple magic d XWINDI1 runs magic on a monochrome display and magic d XWIND7 runs magic on a 7 plane display If this number is not specified magic checks the depth of the display and picks the largest number in the set 1 4 6 7 that the display will support The X10 driver only supports monochrome and 7 bit displays 3 2 Serial line Displays If you are running Magic on a mainframe each station consists of a standard video terminal called the text display and a color display You use the keyboard on the text display to type in commands and Magic uses its screen to log the commands and their results The color display is used to display one or more portions of the circuit you are designing You will use a graphics tablet or mouse to point to things on the color display and to invoke some commands If there is a keyboard attached to the color display as for example with AED512 displays it is not used except to reset the display The current version of Magic supports the AED family of di
250. hildren than the parent The designer can locate these problems and eliminate the interactions that cause the trouble Warning Magic does not check the squares operations for hierarchical consistency so you absolutely must use exact_overlap design rule checks Right now the cifoutput section of the technology is one of the trickiest things in the whole file particularly since errors here may not show up until your chip comes back and doesn t work Be extremely careful when writing this part 9 Cifinput section In addition to writing CIF Magic can also read in CIF files using the cif read file command The cifinput section of the technology file describes how to convert from CIF mask layers to Magic tile types In addition it provides information to the Calma reader to allow it to read in Calma GDS II Stream format files The cifinput section is very 19 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 cifinput style lambda 1 0 gen scalefactor 100 layer ml CMF labels CMF layer ndiff CSN and CAA layer nsd CWN and CSN and CAA layer nfet CPG and CAA and CSN layer ndc CCA grow 100 and CAA and CWP and CSN and CMF layer nncont CCA grow 100 and CAA and CSN and CWN and CMF calma CAA calma CCA 2 calma CMF 4 calma CPG 7 calma CSN 8 calma CWN 11 calma CWP 12 end Table 10 Part of the cifinput section The order of the layers is important since each Magic layer overrid
251. ial is selected This behavior allows entire regions of material to be moved even if see has been used to turn off the display of some of the layers sideways 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 20 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 Flip the selection left to right about a vertical axis running through the center of the selection s area If the box is in the same window as the selection it is flipped too Selected material not in the edit cell is not affected simemd cmd Sends the command cmd to rsim for execution See Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic for more information snap on snap off Control whether the box and point are snapped to the grid selected for the windows in which they appear the grid was set by the grid command or to the standard 1x1 grid The default is for snapping to be off i e snapping to a 1x1 grid With no arguments snap prints whether snapping is enabled or not startrsim options filename Similar to the rsim command except it returns to Magic as soon as rsim is started See Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic for more information straighten direction Straighten jogs in wires underneath the box by pulling them in direction Jogs are only straightened if doing so will cause no additional geometry to move stretch direction amount This command is identical to move except that simple stretching occurs as the selection is moved Each piece of paint in the selecti
252. ics uses three sorts of commands Pressing a mouse button is one sort of command You can also enter commands by typing a or character followed by the text of the command Multiple commands may be specified on one line by separating them with semicolons The third command form consists of single letter abbreviations called macros macros are invoked by pressing single keys without typing a first Certain macros are predefined in the systemwide cad lib magic sys magic file but you can override them and add your own macros using the macro command described below under COMMANDS FOR ALL WINDOWS Most commands deal with the window underneath the cursor so if a command doesn t do what you expect make sure that you are pointing to the correct place on the screen There are several different kinds of win dows in Magic layout color and netlist each window has a different command set described in a separate section below MOUSE BUTTONS FOR LAYOUT WINDOWS Magic uses a three button mouse The buttons are interpreted in a way that depends on the current tool as indicated by the shape of the cursor see the tool command The various tools are described below The initial tool is box These interpretations apply only when mouse buttons are pressed in the interior of a lay out window Box Tool This is the default tool and is indicated by a crosshair cursor It is used to position the box and to paint and erase left This button i
253. icutils 3 ext 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 5 GEOMETRY 3 CAD Tool User s Manual GEOMETRY 3 NAME geometry primitive geometric structures and procedures in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include geometry h typedef struct int p_x p_y typedef struct Point r_ll r_ur define r_xbot r_Il p_x define r_ybot r_ll p_y define r_xtop r_ur p_x define r_ytop r_ur p_y typedef struct G1 Rect r_r typedef struct int t_a t_b define GEO_CENTER 0 define GEO_NORTH 1 define GEO_NORTHEAST2 define GEO_EAST 3 define GEO_SOUTHEAST4 define GEO SOUTH 5 define GEO_SOUTHWEST6 define GEO_WEST 7 define GEO_NORTHWESTS8 bool GEO_OVERLAP r1 r2 Rect r1 Rect r2 bool GEO_TOUCH r1 r2 Rect r1 Rect r2 bool GEO_SURROUND r1 r2 Rect r1 Rect r2 bool GEO_SURROUND_STRONG r1 r2 Rect r1 Rect r2 bool GEO_ENCLOSE p r Point p Rect r bool GEO_RECTNULL r Rect r GEO_EXPAND src amount dst Rect src dst int amount Transform GeoldentityTransform Transform GeoUpsideDownTransform Transform GeoSidewaysTransform Transform Geo90Transform Transform Geo180Transform 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 GEOMETRY 3 CAD Tool User s Manual GEOMETRY 3 Transform Geo270Transform Rect GeoNullRect GeoTransPoint t psrc pdst Transform t Point psrc pdst GeoTransRect t rsrc rdst Transform t Rect rsrc rdst GeoTranslateTrans tsrc x y tdst Transform
254. iddle button and you will see that the node has been set to a 1 The Magic command simemd will take the selected nodes and use them as RSIM input These uses of simemd are like typing the RSIM commands h hold followed by c The arguments given to simemd are normal RSIM commands and simemd will apply the specified RSIM command to each node in the current selection Try RSIM commands on this node such as or d by using the command as an argument to simemd You can enter RSIM interactively at any time by simply typing rsim To continue using the RSIM tool escape to Magic by typing a period to the RSIM prompt The node RESET_B must be set to a 0 This node is the red square area at the middle right of the circuit Place the cursor over this node and select it Type the Magic commands simemd followed by simemd c to set the selected node to a 0 Click the middle mouse button to check that this node is now 0 Step the clock once more to ensure the counter is reset Do this using the simemd c command The outputs of this counter are the four vertical purple strips at the bottom of the circuit Zoom in if necessary select each of these nodes and click the middle button to check that all are 0 Each of these four nodes is labeled bit_x If they are all not 0 check the circuit to make sure hold 1 and RESET_B 0 Assuming these nodes are at 5 Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic September 19 1990 their correct v
255. ide an efficient interface to the wir ing commands left Same as the long command wire type right Same as the long command wire leg middle bottom Same as the long command wire switch Netlist Tool This tool is used to edit netlists interactively It is indicated by a thick box cursor left Select the net associated with the terminal nearest the cursor right Find the terminal nearest the cursor and toggle it into the current net if it wasn t already in the current net or out of the current net if it was previously in the net middle bottom Find the terminal nearest the cursor and join its net with the current net Rsim Tool Used when running the IRSIM simulator under Magic A pointing hand is used as the cursor left Moves the box just like the box tool right Moves the box just like the box tool middle bottom Displays the Rsim node values of the selected paint LONG COMMANDS FOR LAYOUT WINDOWS These commands work if you are pointing to the interior of a layout window Commands are invoked by typing a colon or semi colon followed by a line containing a command name and zero or more parameters In addition macros may be used to invoke commands with single keystrokes Useful default macros are set in the global magic file in cad lib magic sys unless the CAD_HOME environ ment variable is set You can list all current macros with the macro command described under LONG CO
256. ierarchical extraction to avoid having to process too much of a cell all at once and possibly run out of memory The size of these chunks is determined by the step keyword step step This specifies that chunks of step units by step units will be processed during hierarchical extraction The default is 100 units Be careful about changing step if it is too small then the overhead of hierarchical processing will increase and if it is too large then more area will be processed during hierarchical extraction than necessary It should rarely be necessary to change step unless the minimum feature size changes dramatically if so a value of about 50 times the minimum feature size appears to work fairly well wiring contact pdcontact 4 metall 0 pdiff 0 contact ndcontact 4 metall 0 ndiff 0 contact pcontact 4 metall 0 poly 0 contact m2contact 4 metall 0 metal2 0 end Table 15 Wiring section 13 Wiring section The wiring section provides information used by the wire switch command to gen erate contacts See Table 15 for the wiring section from the scmos technology file Each line in the section has the syntax contact type minSize layer surround layer2 surround2 Type is the name of a contact layer and layer and layer2 are the two wiring layers that it connects MinSize is the minimum size of contacts of this type If Surround is non zero then additional material of type layer will be painted for surround units around co
257. ighlighted with a pale stipple outline Subsequent plows are not allowed to modify any area outside that specified by the box if they do the distance the plow moves is reduced by an 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 16 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 amount sufficient to insure that no geometry outside the boundary gets affected plow help Prints a short synopsis of all the plow command options plow horizon n plow horizon The first form sets the plowing jog horizon to n units The second form simply prints the value of the jog horizon Every time plowing considers introducing a jog in a piece of material it looks up and down that piece of material for a distance equal to the jog hor izon If it finds an existing jog within this distance it uses it Only if no jog is found within the jog horizon does plowing introduce one of its own A jog horizon of zero means that plowing will always introduce new jogs where needed A jog horizon of infinity plow nojogs means that plowing will not introduce any new jogs of its own plow jogs Re enable jog insertion with a horizon of 0 This command is equivalent to plow hor izon 0 plow noboundary Remove any boundary specified with a previous plow boundary command plow nojogs Sets the jog horizon to infinity This means that plowing will not introduce any jogs of its own it will only use existing ones plow nostraighten Don t straighten jogs automatically after each plow o
258. ignored otherwise the transistor s length or width is set to the numeric value defined for that symbol This option is not currently used by extcheck but it is common to ext2sim 1 and other tools that are written using the extflat 3 library C Set the capacitance threshold to infinity Because this avoids any internodal capacitance process ing all tools will run faster when this flag is given R Set the resistance threshold to infinity S symfile Each line in the file symfile is of the form sym value just like the argument to the s flag above the lines are interpreted in the same fashion This option is not currently used by extcheck but it is common to ext2sim et al T tech Set the technology in the output sim file to tech This overrides any technology specified in the root ext file 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 EXTCHECK 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXTCHECK 1 SEE ALSO ext2dlys 1 ext2sim 1 ext2spice 1 magic 1 rsim 1 sim2spice 1 ext 5 sim 5 AUTHOR Walter Scott BUGS The s mechanism is incomplete it should allow quantities other than transistor lengths and widths to be specified 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 FSLEEPER 1 CAD Tool User s Manual FSLEEPER 1 NAME fsleeper run sleeper remotely SYNOPSIS fsleeper t tty l user remotemachine DESCRIPTION F sleeper is used if you wish to run a program such as magic 1 on a different machine rem
259. in Magic because some people find it useful 5 Netlist Files Netlists are stored on disk in ordinary text files You are welcome to edit those files by hand or to write programs that generate the netlists automatically For example a net list might be generated by a schematic editor or by a high level simulator See the manual page net 5 for a description of netlist file format 6 Running the Router Once you ve created a netlist it is relatively easy to invoke the router First place the box around the area you d like Magic to consider for routing No terminals outside this area will be considered and Magic will not generate any paint more than a few units outside this area Magic may use the next routing grid line outside the area Load tut7d flush the netlist if you made any changes to it set the box to the bounding box of the cell and then invoke the router using the command route When the command completes the netlist should be routed Click the Verify netlist but ton to make sure the connections were made correctly Try deleting a piece from one of the wires and verify again Feedback areas should appear to indicate where the routing was incorrect Use the feedback command to step through the areas and eventually to delete the feedback feedback help gives a synopsis of the command options If the router is unable to complete the connections it will report errors to you Errors may be reported in several ways F
260. in another directory by setting the CAD_HOME shell environment variable If this variable is set magic will use that location instead of the cad it finds in the pass word file 4 1 INSTALLING MAGIC The distribution tape contains a version of Magic ready to run on Digital s line of Ultrix RISC workstations such as the DECstation 3100 For other machines read ahead In any event all users should set their shell environment variable CAD_HOME to point to the place where the tape is loaded unless that place is cad in which case things will default correctly Before installing Magic you should set your shell environment variable CAD_HOME to point to the place where you loaded the tape If you cd to the magic source directory CAD_HOME src magic you will find a makefile A make config will run a configuration script that asks questions about your configuration and sets up magic to be compiled for your local environment After running a make config you can run a make force to force a complete recompilation of magic A make install will then copy the binaries to the CAD_HOME bin area as well as install things in CAD_HOME lib and CAD_HOME man Included in this documentation is a set of Magic maintainer s manuals These should be read by anybody interested in modifying Magic or by anybody that is having difficulty installing it on their system Overview of DECWRL Livermore Magic September 19 1990 4 2 Technology
261. indows Notice that the box also moves in the other window Windows containing the same root cell are equivalent as far as the box is concerned if it appears in one it will appear in all and it can be manipu lated from them interchangeably If you change tut5a by painting or erasing portions of it you will see the changes in both windows This is because both windows are looking at the same thing the cell tut5a Go ahead and try some painting and erasing until you feel comfortable with it Try positioning one corner of the box in one window and another corner in another window You ll find it doesn t matter which window you point to all Magic knows is that you are pointing to tut5a Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 These windows are independent in some respects however For example you may scroll one window around without affecting the other window Use the scrollbars to give this a try You can also expand and unexpand cells independently in different windows We have seen how Magic behaves when both windows view a single cell What happens when windows view different cells To try this out load tut5b into one of the windows point to a window and type load tut5b You will see the captions on the windows change only one window contains the cell currently being edited The box cannot be positioned by placing one corner in one window and another corner in the other window because that doesn t really make sense t
262. ing to the box The com mand alone just moves the view without changing the scale factor so that the box is in the center of the screen If the zoom argument is given then the magnification is changed too so that the area of the box nearly fills the screen z is a macro for findbox zoom and B is a macro for findbox The command view resets the view so that the entire cell is visible in the window It comes in handy if you get lost in a big layout The macro v is equivalent to view The command box prints out the size and location of the box in case you d like to measure something in your layout The macro b is predefined to box The box com mand can also be used to set the box to a particular location height or width See the man page for details The command what will print out information about what s selected This may be helpful if you re not sure what layer a particular piece of material is or what layer a particular label is attached to If you forget what a macro means you can invoke the command macro char This command will print out the long command that s associated with the macro char If you omit char Magic will print out all of the macro associations The command macro char command We set up char to be a macro for command replacing the old char macro if there was one If command contains any spaces then it must be enclosed in double quotes To see how this works type the command macro 1 echo You
263. int the material This section describes a different painting mechanism based on wires At any given time there is a current wiring material and wire thickness With the wiring interface you can create a new area of material with a single button click this paints a straight line segment of the current material and width between the end of the previous wire segment and the cursor location Each additional button click adds an additional segment The wiring interface also makes it easy for you to place contacts 2 1 Tools Before learning about wiring you ll need to learn about tools Until now when you ve pressed mouse buttons in layout windows the buttons have caused the box to change or material to be painted The truth is that buttons can mean different things at different times The meaning of the mouse buttons depends on the current tool Each tool is identified by a particular cursor shape and a particular interpretation of the mouse buttons Initially the current tool is the box tool when the box tool is active the cursor has the shape of a crosshair To get information about the current tool you can type the long command stool info This command prints out the name of the current tool and the meaning of the buttons Run Magic on the cell tut3a and type tool info The tool command can also be used to switch tools Try this out by typing the command stool Magic will print out a message telling you that you re using the wi
264. ion terminals a Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 source and a drain If a capacitor with only one diffusion terminal is desired in this tech nology the type decap should be used instead The fets warning is a consistency check for transistors whose diffusion terminals have been accidentally shorted together or for transistors with insufficiently many diffusion terminals The third warning labels is generated if you violate the following guideline for placement of labels Whenever geometry from two subcells abuts or overlaps it s a good idea to make sure that there is a label attached to the geometry in each subcell in the area of the overlap or along the line of abutment Following this guideline isn t necessary for the extractor to work but it will result in noticeably faster extraction By default the dup and fets warnings are enabled and the labels warning is dis abled Load the cell tut8h expand all its children tut8i and tut8j and enable all extrac tor warnings with extract warn all Now extract tut8h and all of its children with extract and examine the feedback for examples of fatal errors and warnings 4 Advanced Circuit Extraction 4 1 Lengths The Magic extractor has a rudimentary ability to compute wire lengths between specific named points in a circuit This feature is intended for use with technologies where the wire length between two points is more important than the total capacita
265. ircuit Magic will print the RSIM header but you return to Magic instead of remaining in RSIM This is an alternate way of starting up RSIM and it is equivalent to the command rsim tutlla rsm and typing a period to the RSIM prompt escaping to Magic We need to initialize RSIM so get to RSIM by typing rsim and you ll see the RSIM prompt again As before type tut1la cmd to the RSIM prompt to initialize everything Type a period to return to Magic We are now ready to use the RSIM tool As mentioned earlier tutlla is a 4 bit counter We ll reset the counter and then step it using the RSIM tool Locate the square blue area on the top right corner of the cir cuit Place the cursor over this region and select it Now click the middle button and the RSIM value for this node will be printed in both the text window and in the layout Magic RSIM will report that the node is named hold and that its current value is X You may not be able to see the node value in the layout if you are zoomed out too far Zoom in closer about this node if necessary Try selecting other nodes singly or in groups and click the middle button to display their values This is an easy way to probe nodes when debugging a circuit Select hold again the blue square This node must be a 1 before resetting the circuit Make sure this is the only node in the current selection Type simcmd h to set it to a 1 Step the clock by typing simemd c Click the m
266. irst Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Commands introduced in this tutorial array corner fill flush plow straighten tool wire Macros introduced in this tutorial lt space gt 1 Introduction Tutorial 2 showed you the basic facilities for placing paint and labels selecting and manipulating the things that are selected This tutorial describes two additional facil ities for manipulating paint wiring and plowing These commands aren t absolutely necessary since you can achieve the same effect with the simpler commands of Tutorial 2 however wiring and plowing allow you to perform certain kinds of manipulations much more quickly than you could otherwise Wiring is described in Section 2 it allows you to place wires by pointing at the ends of legs rather than by positioning the box and also provides for convenient contact placement Plowing is the subject of Sec tion 3 It allows you to re arrange pieces of your circuit without having to worry about design rule violations being created plowing automatically moves things out of the way to avoid trouble Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 2 Wiring The box and painting paradigm described in Tutorial 2 is sufficient to create any possible layout but it s relatively inefficient since three keystrokes are required to paint each new area two button clicks to position the box and one more to pa
267. irst position the box over a small blank area in the middle of the screen Then move the cursor over the red rectan gle and press the middle mouse button At this point the area of the box should get painted red Now move the cursor over empty space and press the middle button again The red paint should go away Note how this command uses both the cursor and box locations to control what happens As an example of a macro type the g key on the text keyboard A grid will appear on the color display along with a small black box marking the origin of the cell If you type g again the grid will go away You may have noticed earlier that the box corners didn t move to the exact cursor position you can see now that the box is forced to fall on grid points Long commands are invoked by typing a colon or semi colon After oe 32 you type the colon or semi colon the gt prompt on the text screen will be replaced by a prompt This indicates that Magic is waiting for a long command At this point you should type a line of text followed by a return When the long command has been processed the gt prompt reappears on the text display Try typing semi colon fol lowed by return to see how this works Occasionally a right bracket prompt will appear This means that the design rule checker is reverifying part of your design For now you can just ignore this and treat
268. ist pc a 50000 resist pdiff ppd 120000 resist ndiff nnd 120000 resist m2contact m1 1200 resist metall 200 resist metal2 pad m1 60 resist ppc a pdc a 100000 resist nnc a ndc a 100000 resist nwell pwell 3000000 areacap poly 33 areacap metall 17 areacap metal2 pad m1 11 areacap ndiff nsd 350 areacap pdiff psd 200 areacap ndc a nsc a 367 areacap pdc a psc a 217 areacap pcontact a 50 perimc allMetall space 56 perimc allMetal2 space 55 overlap metall pdiff ndiff psd nsd 33 overlap metal pdiff ndiff psd nsd 17 metal overlap metall poly 33 overlap metal2 poly 17 metall overlap metal2 metall 33 sideoverlap allMetall space allDiff 64 sideoverlap allMetal2 space allDiff 60 sideoverlap allMetall space poly 64 sideoverlap allMetal2 space poly 60 sideoverlap allMetal2 space allMetall 70 fet pfet pdiff pdc a 2 pfet Vdd nwell 00 fet nfet ndiff ndc a 2 nfet GND pwell 0 0 end Table 14 Extract section be Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 contact types size R where types is a comma separated list of types size is in lambda and R is in milliohms Size is interpreted as a hole size quantum the number of holes in a contact is equal to its width divided by size times its length divided by size with both quotients rounded down to the nearest integer The resistance of a contact is R divided by the number of holes Transistors also have resistance information associated with them Ho
269. ite them out If you make changes to a netlist and then decide you don t want them you can use the flush netlist command to throw away all of the changes and re read the netlist from its disk file If you create netlists using a text editor or some other program you can use flush after you ve modified the netlist file in order to make sure that Magic is using the most up to date version The Print button in the netlist menu will print out on the text screen the names of all the terminals in the current net Try this for some of the nets in tut7b The official name of a terminal looks a lot like a Unix file name consisting of a bunch of fields separated by slashes Each field except the last is the id of a subcell and the last field is the name of the terminal These hierarchical names provide unique names for each ter minal even if the same terminal name is re used in different cells or if there are multiple copies of the same cell The Verify button will check the paint of the edit cell to be sure it implements the connections specified in the current netlist Feedback areas are created to show nets that are incomplete or nets that are shorted together The Terms button will cause Magic to generate a feedback area over each of the terminals in the current netlist so that you can see which terminals are included in the Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 netlist If you type the command feedback clear in a
270. l clients returned 0 or 1 if some client returned 1 If some client returns 1 the enumeration is aborted SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 RUNSTATS 3 CAD Tool User s Manual RUNSTATS 3 NAME runstats keep track of process time and memory utilization in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include lt sys types h gt include lt sys times h gt include lt sys time h gt include runstats h char RunStats flags lastt deltat int flags struct tms lastt deltat char RunStatsRealTime DESCRIPTION RunStats collects information about a process s utilization of memory and CPU time Depending on the flags provided the following information is returned RS_TCUM cumulative user and system time RS_TINCR the difference between the current cumulative user and system time and the values stored in the tms struct pointed to by lastt This struct is usually the one last passed to RunStats when it was last called with RS_TINCR as a flag RS_MEM the number of bytes by which the data segment has grown past its initial size RunStats returns a pointer to a statically allocated character string of the form stuff where stuff contains the information specified by the flags Times are of the form mins secsu mins secss where the first time is the amount of user CPU time this process has used and the second time is the amount of sys tem time used Memory is specified by a string of the form Nk where N is
271. l in the glyph The first character of each pair specifies the color to appear in that pixel The color is represented as as a single character which must be the short name of a display style in the current display style file Some commonly used characters are K for black W for white and for the background color when is used in a cursor it means that that pixel position is transparent the underlying picture appears through the cursor See Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 Display Styles Color Maps and Glyphs for more information The second character of each pair is normally blank except for one pixel per glyph which may contain a in the second character The is used for programmable cursors to indicate the hot spot the pixel corresponding to the is the one that the cursor is considered to point to For an example of a glyph file see cad lib magic sys color glyphs SEE ALSO magic 1 dstyle 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MAGIC 5 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 5 NAME magic format of mag files read written by Magic DESCRIPTION Magic uses its own internal ASCII format for storing cells in disk files Each cell name is stored in its own file named name mag The first line in a mag file is the string magic to identify this as a Magic file The next line is optional and is used to identify the technology in which a cell was designed If present it should be of
272. l use the cell s name plus the mag extension as the file name and it will prompt you for a name if the cell hasn t yet been named Once a cell has been saved on disk you can edit it by invoking Magic with the com mand magic name where name is the same name you used to save the cell no mag extension Magic can also read and write files in CIF and Calma Stream formats See Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma for details 9 Plotting Magic can generate hardcopy plots of layouts in four ways versatec black and white or color gremlin and pixels a generalized pixel file that can be massaged in many ways The first style is for printers like the black and white Versatec family for these Magic will output a raster file and spool the file for printing To plot part of your design place the box around the part you d like to plot and type plot versatec width layers This will generate a plot of the area of the box Everything visible underneath the box will appear in more or less the same way in the plot Width specifies how wide the plot will be in inches Magic will scale the plot so that the area of the box comes out this wide The default for width is the width of the plotter if width is larger than the plotter width it s reduced to the plotter width If ayers is given it specifies exactly what infor mation is to be plotted Only those layers will appear in th
273. layout window then the feedback will be erased The Cleanup button is there as a convenience to help you cleanup your netlists If you click on it Magic will scan through the current netlist to make sure it is reasonable Cleanup looks for two error conditions terminal names that don t correspond to any labels in the design and nets that don t have at least two terminals When it finds either of these conditions it prints a message and gives you the chance to either delete the offending terminal if you type dterm delete the offending net dnet skip the current problem without modifying the netlist and continue looking for other problems skip or abort the Cleanup command without making any more changes abort The Show button provides an additional mechanism for displaying the paint in the net If you place the box over a piece of paint and click on Show Magic will highlight all of the paint in the net under the box This is similar to pointing at the net and typing s three times to select the net except that Show doesn t select the net it uses a different mechanism to highlight it and Show will trace through all cells expanded or not the selection mechanism only considers paint in expanded cells Once you ve used Show to highlight a net the only way to make the highlighting go away is to place the box over empty space and invoke Show again Show is an old command that pre dates the selec tion interface but we ve left it
274. ld be either or The option may be used twice if both characters are desired Trimming and is enabled by default when the format is hspice Merge parallel fets mn means conservative merging of fets that have equal widths only usefull with hspice format multiplier if delta W effects need to be taken care of M means aggresive merging the fets are merged if they have the same terminals and the same length Select the precision for outputing capacitors The default is 1 which means that the capa citors will be printed to a precision of 1 fF f hspice spice2 spice3 J hier flat Select the output format Spice3 is the the format understood by the latest version of berkeley spice Node names have the same names as they would in a sim 5 file and no special constructs are used Spice2 is the format understood by the older version of spice which usually has better convergence Node names are numbers and a dictionary of number and corresponding node is output in the end HSPICE is a format understood by meta software s hspice and other commercial tools In this format node names cannot be longer than 15 characters long blame the fortran code so if a hierarchical node name is longer it is truncated to something like x1234 name where x1234 is an alias of the normal node hierarchical prefix and name its hierarchical postfix a dictionary mapping prefixes to real hierarchical paths is output at the end of the spice file If
275. le or invoke the macro X which is equivalent This causes the internals of that instance of tut4y to be displayed If you type X again the instance is unexpanded so you only see a bounding box again The expand toggle command expands all of the selected cells that are unexpanded and unexpands all those that are expanded Type X a third time so that tut4y is expanded As you can see now tut4y contains an array of tut4x cells plus some additional paint In Magic an array is a special kind of instance containing multiple copies of the same subcell spaced at fixed intervals Arrays can be one dimensional or two dimensional The whole array is always treated as a single instance any command that operates on one element of the array also operates on all the other elements simultane ously The instance identifiers for the elements of the array are the same except for an index Now select one of the elements of the array and expand it Notice that the entire array is expanded at the same time When you have expanded the array you ll see that the paint in the top level cell tut4a is displayed more brightly than the paint in the tut4x instances Tut3a is called the edit cell because its contents are currently editable The paint in the edit cell is normally displayed more brightly than other paint to make it clear that you can change it As long as tut4a is the edit cell you cannot modify the paint in tut4x Try erasing paint from the area of on
276. le Magic will try to route on layerl in preference to layer2 Thus in a single metal process metal should always be used for layer1 The third line provides information about contacts It has the format contacts contactType size surround surround2 The tile type contactType will be used to make contacts between layerl and layer2 Con tacts will be size units square In order to avoid placing contacts too close to hand routed material Magic assumes that both the layerl and layer2 rules will apply to contacts If surround and surround are present they specify overlap distances around contacts for layerl and layer2 additional layerl material will be painted for surround units around each contact and additional layer2 material will be painted for surround2 units around contacts The last line of the routing section indicates the size of the grid on which to route It has the format gridspacing distance The distance must be chosen large enough that contacts and or wires on adjacent grid lines will not generate any design rule violations 39 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 plowing fixed pfet nfet glass pad covered pfet nfet drag pfet nfet end Table 17 Plowing section 15 Plowing section The plowing section of a technology file identifies those types of tiles whose sizes and shapes should not be changed as a result of plowing Typically these types will be transistors
277. lect one or more pieces of the design and then perform operations such as copying deletion and rotation on the selected things To see how the selection works load cell tut2b You can do this by typing load tut2b if you re still in Magic or by starting up Magic with the shell command magic tut2b The first thing to do is to learn how to select Move the cursor over the upper por tion of the L shaped blue area in tut2b and type s which is a macro for select The box will jump over to cover the vertical part of the L This operation selected a chunk of material Move the box away from the chunk and you ll see that a thin white outline is left around the chunk to show that it s selected Now move the cursor over the vertical red bar on the right of the cell and type s The box will move over that bar and the selec tion highlighting will disappear from the blue area If you type s several times without moving the cursor each command selects a slightly larger piece of material Move the cursor back over the top of the blue L and type s three times without moving the cursor The first s selects a chunk a rectangular region all of the same type of material The second s selects a region all of the blue material in the region underneath the cursor rectangular or not The third s selects a net all of the material that is electrically connected to the original chunk this includes the blue metal the red polysilicon
278. lectrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 1 Introduction NOTE This manual is no longer maintained by the Magic team as MOSIS has taken over responsibility for it For the latest copy send an electronic mail message to mosis mosis edu with the following lines REQUEST INFORMATION TOPIC SCMOS_MANUAL INF NET ADDRESS lt put your e mail address here gt REQUEST END The Net Address line is optional leave it out if you aren t sure of your e mail address In almost all cases MOSIS can figure out your return address The latest technology file is also available Send a message similar to the above message but request topic SCMOS TECH instead of SCMOS_MANUAL Other Reports In This Series September 1990 d il li ftali Western Research Laboratory 100 Hamilton Avenue Palo Alto California 94301 USA WRL Research Reports Titan System Manual Michael J K Nielsen WRL Research Report 86 1 September 1986 Global Register Allocation at Link Time David W Wall WRL Research Report 86 3 October 1986 Optimal Finned Heat Sinks William R Hamburgen WRL Research Report 86 4 October 1986 The Mahler Experience Using an Intermediate Language as the Machine Description David W Wall and Michael L Powell WRL Research Report 87 1 August 1987 The Packet Filter An Efficient Mechanism for User level Network Code
279. les also for non contact types At this point the behavior of the component types of contacts has been 12 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 completely determined so the third pass can generate the default rules for all contact types and the fourth pass can modify these as per any compose etc rules for contacts connect define allMetal2 m2 m2c m2 pad m2 define allMetall m1 m2c m1 pc m1 ndc m1 pdc m1 ppcont m1 nncont m1 pad m1 define allPoly poly pc a nfet pfet allMetal2 allMetal2 allMetal1 allMetal1 allPoly allPoly ndiff ndc pdiff pdc nwell nnc nsd nwell nnc nsd pwell ppc psd pwell ppc psd nnc pdc ppc ndc end Table 8 Connect section 7 Connect section For circuit extraction routing and some of the net list operations Magic needs to know what types are electrically connected Magic s model of electrical connectivity used is based on signal propagation Two types should be marked as connected if a sig nal will always pass between the two types in either direction For the most part this will mean that all non space types within a plane should be marked as connected The exceptions to this rule are devices transistors A transistor should be considered electri cally connected to adjacent polysilicon but not to adjacent diffusion This models the fact that polysilicon connects to the gate of the transistor but that the transistor acts as a switch between
280. ly Fora node comprised entirely of a single type of material Magic will compute the node s total perimeter and area It then solves a quadratic equation to find the width and height of a simple rectangle with this same perimeter and area and approximates the resistance of the node as the resistance of this equivalent rectangle The resistance is always taken in the longer dimension of the rectangle When a node contains more than a single type of material Magic computes an equivalent rectangle for each type and then sums the resistances as though the rectangles were laid end to end This approximation for resistance does not take into account any branching so it can be significantly in error for nodes that have side branches Figure 2 gives an exam ple For global signal trees such as clocks or power Magic s estimate of resistance will likely be several times higher than the actual resistance between two points a b Figure 2 Magic approximates the resistance of a node by assuming that it is a simple wire The length and width of the wire are estimated from the node s perimeter and area a For non branching nodes this approximation is a good one b The computed resistance for this node is the same as for a because the side branches are counted yet the actual resis tance between points and 2 is significantly less than i
281. ly If more than one cell is selected this command uses the upper leftmost one extract showparents Like extract parents but only print the cells that would be extracted don t actually extract them extract style style Select the style to be used for extraction parameters If no style argument is provided then Magic prints the names of all extraction parameter styles defined in the technology file and identifies the current style If style is provided it is made the current style extract unique For each cell in the window beneath the cursor check to insure that no label is attached to more than one node If the keyword was not specified whenever a label is attached to more than one node the labels in all but one of the nodes are changed by appending a numeric suffix to make them unique If the keyword is specified only names that end in a are made unique any other duplicate nodenames that don t end in a Y are reported by leaving a warning feedback area This command is provided for converting old designs that were intended for extraction with Mextra which would automatically append unique suffixes to node names when they appeared more than once extract warn no option no all The extractor always reports fatal errors This command controls the types of warnings that are reported Option may be one of the following dup to warn about two or more unconnected nodes in the same cell that have the
282. ly OKTypes are present If the material just above and to the left of the edge is one of corner Types then area B is also checked to be sure that it contains only OKTypes A similar corner check is made at the bottom of the edge Figure b shows a polysilicon spacing rule c shows a situation where corner extension is performed on both ends of the edge and d shows a situation where corner extension is made only at the bottom of the edge If the rule described in d were to be written as an edge rule it would look like edge poly space 2 poly poly 2 Poly poly separation must be at least 2 Some of the edge rules in Magic have the property that if a rule is violated between two pieces of geometry the violation can be discovered looking from either piece of geometry toward the other To capitalize on this Magic normally applies an edge rule only in two of the four possible directions bottom to top and left to right reducing the work it has to do by a factor of two Also the corner extension is only performed to one side of the edge to the top for a left to right rule and to the left for a bottom to top rule All of the width and spacing rules translate neatly into edge rules However you ll probably find it easiest when you re writing edge rules to insist that they be checked in all directions To do this write the rule the same way except use the keyword edge4way instead of edge 29 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The
283. ly the same area Abutment between tiles from different cells is considered to be a partial overlap so it is prohibited too This rule is used to ensure that the CIF squares operator will work correctly as described in Section 8 6 See Table 12e for the exact_overlap rule from the standard scmos technology file exact_overlap m2c ndc pdc pc ppcont nncont no_overlap pfet nfet pfet nfet Table 12e Exact_overlap rule in the dre section The no_overlap rule makes illegal any overlap between a tile in type list and a tile in type list2 You should rarely if ever need to specify no_overlap rules since Magic automatically prohibits many kinds of overlaps between subcells After reading the tech nology file Magic examines the paint table and applies the following rule if two tile types A and B are such that the result of painting A over B is neither A nor B or the result of painting B over A isn t the same as the result of painting A over B then A and B are not allowed to overlap Such overlaps are prohibited because they change the struc ture of the circuit Overlaps are supposed only to connect things without making struc tural changes Thus for example poly can overlap pcontact without violating the above rules but poly may not overlap diffusion because the result is efet which is neither poly nor diffusion The only no_overlap rules you should need to specify are rules to keep transistors from overlapping other transistors of th
284. ly behind if massive changes are made dre printrules file Print out the compiled rule set in file or on the text terminal if file isn t given For system maintenance only dre rulestats Print out summary statistics about the compiled rule set This is primarily for use in writ ing technology files dre statistics Print out statistics kept by the design rule checker For each statistic two values are printed the count since the last time dre statistics was invoked and the total count in this editing session This command is intended primarily for system maintenance pur poses dre why Recheck the area underneath the box and print out the reason for each violation found Since this command causes a recheck the box should normally be placed around a small area such as an error area dump cellName child refPointC parent refPointP edit Copy the contents of cell cell Name into the edit cell so that refPointC in the child is positioned at point refPointP in the edit cell The reference points can either be the name of a label in which case the lower left corner of the label s box is used as the reference point or as a pair of numbers giving the x y coordinates of a point explicitly If refPointC is not specified the lower left corner of cellName cell is used If refPointP is not specified the lower left corner of the box tool is used the box must be in a window on the edit cell After this command completes the new i
285. m and look at the sub strate node fields of all the n channel transistors if there were any whose substrate nodes weren t connected to GND then these transistors appear either outside of any explicit well their substrate nodes will be the default of NSubstrateNode or in a well that isn t tied to GND with a substrate contact 6 Extraction styles Magic usually knows several different ways to extract a circuit from a given layout Each of these ways is called a style Different styles can be used to handle different fabrication facilities which may differ in the parameters they have for parasitic 13 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 capacitance and resistance For a scalable technology such as the default semos there can be a different extraction style for each scale factor The exact number and nature of the extraction styles is described in the technology file that Magic reads when it starts At any given time there is one current extraction style To print a list of the extraction styles available type the command extract style The scemos technology currently has the styles lambda 1 5 lambda 1 0 and lambda 0 6 though this changes over time as technology evolves To change the extraction style to style use the command extract style style Each style has a specific scale factor between Magic units and physical units e g microns you can t use a particular style with a different scale
286. m ext2sim The following keywords define the circuit formed by the mask information in cell name This circuit is extracted independently of any subcells its connections to subcells are handled by the keywords in the sec tion after this one node name R C x y type al pl a2 p2 aN pN Defines an electrical node in name This node is referred to by the name name in subsequent equiv lines connections to the terminals of transistors in fet lines and hierarchical connections or adjustments using merge or adjust The node has a total capacitance to ground of C attofarads and a lumped resistance of R milliohms For purposes of going back from the node name to the geometry defining the node x y is the coordinate of a point inside the node and type is the layer on which this point appears The values al pl aN pN are the area and perimeter for the 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 EXT 5 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT 5 material in each of the resistance classes described by the resistclasses line at the beginning of the ext file these values are used to compute adjusted hierarchical resistances more accurately NOTE since many analysis tools compute transistor gate capacitance themselves from the transistor s area and perimeter the capacitance between a node and substrate GND normally does not include the capacitance from transistor gates connected to that node If the sim file was produced by ext2sim 1 check the technology fil
287. manual describing the features of that technology such as design rules routing layers CIF styles etc If you haven t seen any of the technology manuals yet this is a good time to take a look at the one for your process errors design rule violations labels subcells all mask layers all mask layers visible under cursor Table I Pseudo layers available in all technologies If you re used to designing with mask layers e g you ve been reading the Mead Conway book Magic s log style will take some getting used to One of the reasons for logs is to save you work In Magic you don t draw implants wells buried windows or contact via holes Instead you draw the primary conducting layers and paint some of their overlaps with special types such as n transistor or polysilicon contact For transis tors you draw only the actual area of the transistor channel Magic will generate the polysilicon and diffusion plus any necessary implants when it creates a CIF file For contacts you paint the contact layer in the area of overlap between the conducting layers Magic will generate each of the constituent mask layers plus vias and buried windows when it writes the CIF file Figure 1 shows a simple cell drawn with both mask layers as in Caesar and with logs as in Magic If you re curious about what the masks will look like for a particular layout you can use the cif see command to view the mask informa tion 1
288. mary of how many nets it extracted and how many required supplemental networks The resistance networks are placed in the file root res ext To produce a sim file with the supplemental resistors type cat root ext root res ext gt newname ext and then rerun ext2sim on the new file During this second ext2sim run the t flag may be used Like extraction of wire lengths resistance extraction is not performed hierarchi cally it should only be done in the root cell of a design and can take a long time for com plex wires 4 2 3 Options Features Caveats and Bugs The following is a list of command line options and the arguments that they take tolerance value This controls how large the resistance in a network must be before it is added to the output description value is defined as the minimum ratio of transistor resistance to interconnect resistance that requires a resistance network The default value is 1 values less than 1 will cause fewer resistors to be output and will make the program run faster while values greater than 1 will produce more a larger more accurate description but will run slower all Causes all nets in the circuit to be extracted no comparison between transistor size and lumped resistance is performed This option is not recommended for large designs simplify on off Turns on off the resistance network simplification routines Magic normally simplifies the resistance network it extracts by removing small r
289. metal and the overglass hole 2 5 Transistors Dfet or Dcap Polysilicon 19 VG EN Diffusion 2 Pa apt we Efet LS There are three transistor structures in the NMOS technology Enhancement transistors are known by the names efet and enhancement_fet and are drawn to look like red over green with green stripes You get efet automatically when you paint poly over diffusion or vice versa Depletion transistors are known by the names dfet and depletion_fet and are drawn the same way except with yellow stripes A third type of material is called depletion_capacitor or dcap It is displayed with yellow crosses over the transistor area and is identical to dfet except that there are no overhang design rules for it since it is assumed to be used only as a capacitor You do not drawn any implants in Magic but just use a different material for the transistor Magic will generate the implants automatically All transistors must be at least 2 units on each side and there must be a poly or diffusion overhang for 2 units on each side of efet or dfet this is not required for dcap Poly must be separated from diffusion by at least one unit except where it is forming a transistor Dfet and dcap must be at least 3 units from efet in order to keep the implant from contaminating the enhancement transistor Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 2 6 Buried Contacts Diffusion Poly 05
290. mitted nor are abutting contacts of the same type contacts of different types may abut as long as the abutment doesn t violate any other design rules The contact restrictions are necessary to guarantee that CIF can be generated correctly in a hierarchical fashion 3 Routing If you use Magic s automatic routing tools on an NMOS design the routing will be run in metal and polysilicon with metal as the primary layer The routing will be placed on a 7 unit grid 4 Reading and Writing CIF There is only one CIF output style available in the NMOS technology lambda 2 The CIF layers in this style and their meanings are Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 Name Meaning NP polysilicon ND diffusion NM metal depletion implant generated around depletion NI transistors and depletion contacts contact via generated as small squares inside NC a poly metal contacts and diffusion metal contacts NB buried window generated around buried contacts NG overglass via generated for overglass contacts To see exactly where each CIF layer is generated for a particular design use the cif see command There is also just one CIF input style It is called lambda 2 and can be used to read files written by Magic in the lambda z2 style or files written by Caesar using the standard NMOS technology with a scale factor of 200 5 Extraction Transistors of type efet or dfet in the NMOS technology must h
291. n Ordinarily Magic arrays are output using the Calma ARRAY construct After a calma flatten command though arrays will be output instead as a collection of individual cell uses as occurs when writing CIF calma help Print a short synopsis of all of the calma command options calma labels Output labels whenever writing a Calma output file calma lower Allow both upper and lower case to be output for label text This is the default behavior calma nolower causes lower case to be converted to upper case on output calma noflatten 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 5 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 Undoes the effect of a prior calma flatten command re enabling the output of Magic arrays using the Calma ARRAY construct calma nolabels Don t output labels when writing a Calma output file calma nolower Convert lower to upper case when outputting labels calma read file The file file strm is read in Calma format and converted to a collection of Magic cells The current CIF input style determines how the Calma layers are converted to Magic layers The new cells are marked for design rule checking Calma format doesn t iden tify the root of the collection of cells read in so none of the cells read will appear on the display use load to make them visible If the Calma file had been produced by Magic then the name of the root cell is the same as the library name printed by the calma read command calma write file
292. n a The approximated resistance also does not lend itself well to hierarchical adjust ments as does capacitance To allow programs like ext2sim to incorporate hierarchical adjustments into a resistance approximation each node in the ext file also contains a per imeter and area for each resistance class that was defined in the technology file see Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File and ext 5 When flattening a circuit ext2sim uses this information along with adjustments to perimeter and area to produce the value it actually uses for node resistance Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 If you wish to disable the extraction of resistances and node perimeters and areas use the command extract no resistance which will cause all node resistances perimeters and areas in the ext file to be zero To re enable extraction of resistance use the command extract do resistance Sometimes it s important that resistances be computed more accurately than is pos sible using the lumped approximation above Magic s extresist command does this by computing explicit two terminal resistors and modifying the circuit network to include them so it reflects more exactly the topology of the layout See the section on Advanced Extraction for more details on explicit resistance extraction with extresist diff buried perim diffusion KEW Figure 3 Each type of edge ha
293. n then this command does not modify the box position wire vertical Just like wire leg except that the new segment is forced to be vertical writeall force This command steps through all the cells that have been modified in this edit session and gives you a chance to write them out If the force option is specified then autowrite mode is used all modified cells are automatically written without asking for permission MOUSE BUTTONS FOR WINDOW CONTROL For systems with pre existing window packages such as X windows Magic generally uses the conventions for moving windows in those systems For systems without pre existing window packages such as the AED line of displays windows can be re arranged by clicking mouse buttons in window borders When pressed in the border area of a window the left and right mouse buttons resize the window instead of resizing the box as they would when the box tool is active The buttons behave in the same way that they do for the box tool For example the left button moves the whole window by the lower left corner while the right button moves just the upper right corner The use of scroll bars and the middle button are explained in Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows COMMANDS FOR ALL WINDOWS These commands are not used for layout but are instead used for overall housekeeping functions They are valid in all windows center Adjust the view in the window under the cursor so the point
294. n by typing select clear and then click the middle mouse button The RSIM labels do not affect the cell modified flag nor will they be written in the mag file When you re finished using RSIM resume RSIM by typing rsim and then quit it by typing a q to the RSIM prompt Quitting Magic before quitting RSIM will also quit RSIM We ve used a few macros to lessen the typing necessary for the RSIM tool The ones commonly used are smacro h simemd h smacro simemd smacro k simemd c Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers John Ousterhout Walter Scott Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first All of them Commands covered in this tutorial profile runstats seeflags watch Macros covered in this tutorial None 1 Introduction This document provides some information to help would be Magic maintainers learn about the system It is not at all complete and like most infrequently used docu mentation will probably become less and less correct over time as the system evolves but this tutorial doesn t So take what you read here with a grain of salt We believe that everything in this tutorial was up to date as of the 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic release Before doing anything to the internals of Magic you shoul
295. n explicit technology with the T techname flag FILES cad lib magic tech cad lib magic sys magic magic SEE ALSO magic 1 magic 5 AUTHOR Walter Scott 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 NETZ2IR 1 CAD Tool User s Manual NET2IR 1 NAME net2ir produce iroute commands to route a netlist composed of two point nets SYNOPSIS net2ir feedfile netfile DESCRIPTION Net2ir is used to produce commands for the Magic interactive hint router to route the collection of two point nets specified in the net 5 file netfile in the order in which they appear in the file The label loca tions come from feedfile which should consist of a series of box and feedback add Magic commands such as produced by the find command in a Magic netlist window The text associated with each feedback command must be of the form layer label where layer is the Magic layer on which label lies The output of net2ir is a sequence of iroute route commands one for each net in the netlist file SEE ALSO magic 1 net 5 AUTHOR Walter Scott 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 RSLEEPER 1 CAD Tool User s Manual RSLEEPER 1 NAME rsleeper run sleeper remotely SYNOPSIS rsleeper remotemachine DESCRIPTION Rsleeper is used if you wish to run a program such as magic 1 on a different machine remotemachine than the one to which a graphics terminal is attached and the local graphics terminal has a login process To use it log in o
296. n modify your design in light of this feedback to improve its routabil ity You ll probably need to iterate a few times until the routing is successful 2 Terminals and Netlists A netlist is a file that describes a set of desired connections It contains one or more nets Each net names a set of terminals that should all be wired together A terminal is simply a label attached to a piece of mask material within a subcell it is distinguishable from ordinary labels within a subcell by its presence within a netlist file and by certain characteristics common to terminals as described below The first step in building a netlist is to label the terminals in your design Figure 1 shows an example Each label should be a line or rectangle running along the edge of the cell point terminals are not allowed The router will make a connection to the cell somewhere along a terminal s length If the label isn t at the edge of the cell Magic will route recklessly across the cell to reach the terminal taking the shortest path between the terminal and a routing channel It s almost always a good idea to arrange for terminal labels to be at cell edges The label must be at least as wide as the minimum width of the routing material the wider you make the label the more flexibility you give the router to choose a good point to connect to the terminal Terminal labels must be attached to mask material that connects directly to one of Magic s two routing
297. n page cad lib magic sys tech technology files see Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File cad lib displays configuration file for Magic serial line displays CAD_HOME variable If the shell environment variable CAD_HOME is set Magic uses that location instead of the true cad location whenever it sees a file name beginning with cad This allows Magic to be run without creating an actual user called cad Search path Magic s system and library files such as technology files and display style files normally are placed in the cad lib magic area However Magic first tries to find them in the user s current directory This makes it easier for an individual user to override installed system files AUTHORS BUGS Original Gordon Hamachi Robert Mayo John Ousterhout Walter Scott George Taylor Contributors Michael Arnold Magic maze router and Irouter command Don Stark new contact scheme X11 interface various other things Mike Chow Rsim interface The X11 driver is the work of several people including Don Stark Walter Scott and Doug Pan Many other people have contributed to Magic but it is impossible to list them all here We appreciate their help If Magic gets stuck for some reason try using kill TERM on it to save your cells in cel save mag Report bugs to magic ucbarpa Berkeley EDU Please be specific tell us exactly what you did to cause the problem what you expected to happen
298. n the graphics terminal and run rsleeper The tty printed will be on the remote machine and can be used as the graphics display device for programs such as magic 1 For rsleeper to work there must be an account sleeper on the remote machine Its login shell should be the program sleeper 1 Users must be able to rlogin to the sleeper account without supplying a password SEE ALSO fsleeper 1 magic 1 sleeper 1 displays 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 SIM2SPICE 1 CAD Tool User s Manual SIM2SPICE 1 NAME sim2spice convert from sim format to spice format SYNOPSIS sim2spice d defs file sim DESCRIPTION Sim2spice reads a file in sim format and creates a new file in spice format The file contains just a list of transistors and capacitors the user must add the transistor models and simulation information The new file is appended with the tag spice One other file is created which is a list of sim node names and their corresponding spice node numbers This file is tagged names Defs is a file of definitions A definition can be used to set up equivelences between sim node names and spice node numbers The form of this type of definition is set sim_name spice_number tech The tech field is optional In NMOS a special node BULK is used to represent the substrate node For CMOS two special nodes NMOS and PMOS represent the substrate nodes for the n and p transis tors repe
299. n the routing grid which is an impossible situation for the stem generator In this case we think the best approach is to change the PLA templates to space the outputs farther apart Either space them exactly the same as the router grid in which case you can line the PLAs up before routing so the terminals are already on the grid or space the outputs at least 1 5 grid units apart so the stem generator won t have troubles Having tightly spaced PLA outputs is false economy it makes it more difficult to design the PLAs and results in awful routing problems Even if Magic could river route out from tightly spaced terminals to grid lines which it can t it would require N space to route out N lines it takes less area to stretch the PLA 8 3 Obstacles The router tends to have special difficulties with obstacles running along the edges of channels When you ve placed a power wire or other hand routing along the edge of a channel the channel router will often run material under your wiring in the other routing layer thereby blocking both routing layers and making it impossible to complete the routing Where this occurs you can increase the chances of successful routing by mov ing the hand routing away from the channel edges It s especially important to keep hand routing away from terminals The stem generator will not pay any attention to hand routing when it generates stems it just makes a bee line for the nearest grid point so it m
300. name for one of the nodes and some mnemonic but textually distinct name for the other nodes For example in a cell with multiple power rails you might use Vdd for one of the rails and names like Vdd 1 for the oth ers As an example load the cell tut8e If the two nodes are connected in a higher level cell they will eventually be merged when the extracted circuit is flattened If you want to simulate a cell out of context but still want the higher level nodes to be hooked up you can always create a dummy parent cell that hooks them together either with wire or by using the same name for pieces of paint that lie over the terminals to be connected see the cell tut8f for an example of this latter technique You can use the command extract unique as an automatic means of labelling nodes in the manner described above Run this com mand on the cell tut8g A second version of this command is provided for compatibility with previous versions of Magic Running extract unique will only append a unique numeric suffix to labels that end with a Any other dupli cate nodenames that also don t end in a Y the global nodename suffix as described in Section 5 are flagged by feedback A second type of warning fets checks to see whether any transistors have fewer diffusion terminals than the minimum for their types For example the transistor type dfet is defined in the nmos technology file as requiring two diffus
301. name style mag The style part of the filename interacts with the s option see later part of this manual WRITING AN MPACK PROGRAM An mpack program is the C code which assembles tiles into the desired module Typically this program reads a file such as a truth table and then calls the tile placement routines in the mpack library The mpack program must first include the file cad lib mpack h which defines the interface to the mpack system Next the TPinitialize procedure is called This procedure processes command line arguments opens an input file as the standard input stdin and loads in a template The program should now read from the standard input and compute where to place the next tile Tiles may be aligned with previously placed tiles or placed at absolute coordinates If a tile is to overlap an existing tile the program must space over the distance of the overlap before placing the tile When all tiles are placed the program should call the routine TPwrite_tile to create the output file that was specified on the command line To use the mpack library be sure to include it with your compile or load command e g ce your_file cad lib mpack lib ROUTINES Initialization and Output Routines TPinitialize argc argv base_name The mpack system is initialized command line arguments are processed and a template is loaded The file descriptor stdin is attached to the input file specified on the command line The template s
302. named foo it will first look for a file named foo mag in the current directory If it doesn t find the file there it will look for a file named ouster x foo mag and if that doesn t exist then it will try a b foo mag last To find out what the current path is type path with no arguments In addition to your path this command will print out the system cell library path where Magic looks for cells if it can t find them anywhere in your path and the system search path where Magic looks for files like colormaps and technology files if it can t find them in your current directory If you re working on a large design you should use the search path mechanism to spread your layout over several directories A typical large chip will contain a few hun dred cells if you try to place all of them in the same directory there will just be too many things to manage For example place the datapath in one directory the control unit in another the instruction buffer in a third and so on Try to keep the size of each directory down to a few dozen files You can place the path command in a magic file in your home directory or the directory you normally run Magic from this will save you from having to retype it each time you start up see the Magic man page to find out about magic files If all you want to do is add another directory onto the end of the search path you can use the addpath director
303. nce on the net this may occur for example when extracting circuits with very long wires being driven at high speeds e g bipolar circuits Currently you must indicate to Magic which pairs of points are to have distances computed You do this by providing two lists one of drivers and one of receivers The extractor computes the distance between each driver and each receiver that it is connected to Load the cell tut8k There are five labels two are drivers driver1 and driver2 and three are receivers receiverA receiverB and receiverC Type the commands extract length driver driver1 driver2 extract length receiver receiverA receiverB receiverC Now enable extraction of lengths with extract do length and then extract the cell extract If you examine tut8k ext you will see several distance lines corresponding to the driver receiver distances described above These distances are through the center lines of wires connecting the two labels where multiple paths exist the shortest is used Normally the driver and receiver tables will be built by using source to read a file of extract length driver and extract length receiver commands Once these tables are created in Magic they remain until you leave Magic or type the command extract length clear which wipes out both tables Because extraction of wire lengths is not performed hierarchically it should only be done in the root cell of a design Also because it s not hier
304. nction 9 Spacing Parameters iroute spacing The spacing parameters specify minimum spacings between the route types route layers and route contacts and arbitrary Magic types These spacings are the design rules used internally by the Irouter during routing Default values are derived from the dre section of the technology file These values can be overridden in the mzrouter section of the technology file See the Magic Maintainers Manual on Technology Files for details Spacings can be examined and changed at any time with the spacing subcom mand Spacing values can be nil 0 or positive integers A value of nil means there is no spacing constraint between the route layer and the given type A value of 0 means the route layer may not overlap the given type If a positive value is specified the Irouter will maintain the given spacing between new routing on the specified route layer and pre existing features of the specified type except when connecting to the type at an end point of the new route Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 The spacing subcommand takes several forms iroute spacing prints spacings for all route types Nil spacings are omitted sirouter spacing route type prints spacings for route type Nil spacings are omitted iroute spacing route type type prints the spacing between route type and type iroute spacing route type type value sets the spacing between route type and ty
305. nd GeoTransTranslate but only work with Transforms whose scale factor is unity 1 These mac ros are several times faster than their procedural counterparts on a Sun 2 the speed difference is close to a factor of 10 but on other machines the difference is less extreme SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 5 HASH 3 CAD Tool User s Manual HASH 3 NAME hash procedures for managing hash tables in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include hash h HashInit table initsize keysize HashTable table int initsize keysize HashInitClient table initsize keysize compareFn copyFn hashFn killFn HashTable table int initsize keysize int compareFn key1 key2 char copyFn Key int hashFn Key Void killFn key int HashSize keybytes int keybytes HashKill table HashTable table HashEntry HashLookOnly table key HashTable table ClientData key HashEntry HashFind table key HashTable table ClientData key ClientData HashGetValue he HashEntry he HashSetValue he value HashEntry he ClientData value HashStartSearch hs HashSearch hs HashEntry HashNext table hs HashTable table HashSearch hs DESCRIPTION This module provides procedures for creating accessing and destroying hash tables These tables grow automatically as more elements are added to them to avoid overloading They may be indexed by strings single words or multi word structures
306. nd is similar to fill except that it generates L shaped wires that travel across the box first in direction and then in direction2 For example corner north east finds all paint under the bottom edge of the box and extends it up to the top of the box and then across to the right side of the box generating neat corners at the top of the box The box should be at least as tall as it is wide for this command to work correctly Direction and direction2 must be Manhattan direc tions see the section DIRECTIONS below and must be orthogonal to each other If layers is specified then only those layers are used otherwise all layers are considered delete Delete all the information in the current selection that is in the edit cell When cells are deleted only the selected use s of the cell is are deleted other uses of the cell remain intact as does the disk file containing the cell Selected material outside the edit cell is not deleted dre option args This command is used to interact with the design rule checker Option and args if needed are used to invoke a dre command in one of the following ways dre catchup Let the checker process all the areas that need rechecking This command will not return until design rule checking is complete or an interrupt is typed The checker will run even if the background checker has been disabled with dre off dre check 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 7 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1
307. nd lookup The table of strings should be terminated with a NULL string pointer and the entries should be alphabeti cal and all lower case Any characters following the first white space in an entry are ignored If str is an unambiguous abbreviation for one of the entries in table then the index of the matching entry is returned If str is an abbreviation for more than one entry in table then 1 is returned If str doesn t match any entry then 2 is returned Case differences are ignored LookupStruct is a more general version of Lookup for dealing with tables of structures whose first word is a string pointer The table argument should be a pointer to an array of such structures cast as type LookupTable The table should be terminated with an entry whose string pointer is NULL As in Lookup all entries should contain lower case strings and should be sorted alphabetically The size parame ter gives the size in bytes of each structure in the table 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 STRING 3 CAD Tool User s Manual STRING 3 LookupAny looks up a single character in a table of pointers to strings The last entry in the string table must be a NULL pointer The index of the first string in the table containing the indicated character is returned or 1 if no matching string is found LookupFull is like Lookup but does not allow abbreviations It either returns the index of the entry of table matching str or 1 if no match is found Case i
308. ndependent so what you ll see is a combination of the two as if each were a transparent colored foil This happens for example if you paint metall blue on top of polysilicon red In other cases when you paint one layer on top of another you ll get something different from either of the two original layers For example painting poly on top of ndiff produces ntransistor try this In still other cases the new layer replaces the old one this happens for example if you paint a pcontact on top of ntransistor Try painting different layers on top of each other to see what happens The meaning of the various layers is discussed in more detail in Section 11 below There is a second way of erasing paint that allows you to erase some layers without affecting others This is the macro D control D for Delete paint To use it posi tion the box over the area to be erased then move the crosshair over a splotch of paint containing the layer s you d like to erase Type D key on the text keyboard the colors underneath the cursor will be erased from the area underneath the box but no other layers will be affected Experiment around with the D macro to try different combina tions of paints and erases If the cursor is over empty space then the D macro is equivalent to the middle mouse button it erases everything You can also paint and erase using the long commands paint layers erase layers In each of these commands layer
309. ndiff pdiff calma 43 1 layer CCA ndc pdc squares 200 calma 48 1 layer CCA nncont ppcont squares 200 calma 48 1 layer CCP pc squares 200 calma 47 1 end Table 9 Part of the cifoutput section for style lambda 1 0 gen only 8 Cifoutput section The layers stored by Magic do not always correspond to physical mask layers For example there is no physical layer corresponding to ntransistor instead the actual cir cuit must be built up by overlapping poly and diffusion over pwell When writing CIF Caltech Intermediate Form or Calma GDS II files Magic generates the actual geometries that will appear on the masks used to fabricate the circuit The cifoutput sec tion of the technology file describes how to generate mask layers from Magic s abstract 14 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 layers 8 1 CIF styles The technology file can contain several different specifications of how to generate CIF Each of these is called a CIF style Different styles may be used for fabrication at different feature sizes or for totally different purposes For example some of the Magic technology files contain a style plot that generates CIF pseudo layers that have exactly the same shapes as the Magic layers This style is used for generating plots that look just like what appears on the color display it makes no sense for fabrication Lines of the form style name are used to end the
310. nformation is selected Make the selected cell the edit cell and edit it in context The edit cell is normally displayed in brighter colors than other cells see the see command to change this If more than one cell is selected or if the selected cell is an array the cursor position is used to select one of those cells as the new edit cell Generally Magic commands modify only the current edit cell 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 8 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 erase layers For the area enclosed by the box erase all paint in layers See the LAYERS section for the syntax of layer lists If layers is omitted it defaults to labels See your technology manual or use the layers command to find out about the available layer names expand toggle If the keyword toggle is supplied all of the selected cells that are unexpanded are expanded and all of the selected cells that are expanded are unexpanded If toggle isn t specified then all of the cells underneath the box are expanded recursively until there is nothing but paint under the box extract option args Extract a layout producing one or more hierarchical ext files that describe the electrical circuit implemented by the layout The current extraction style see extract style below determines the parameters for parasitic resistance capacitance etc that will be used The extract command with no parameters checks timestamps and re extracts as needed to bri
311. ng GEO_ENCLOSE is TRUE if a point p lies inside or on the border of the rectangle r GEO_RECTNULL is TRUE if r has zero area which can result if the x coordinate of its upper right is less than or equal to the x coordinate of its lower left or similarly for the y coordinates Finally GEO_EXPAND is used to grow or shrink a rectangle src by an integer distance amount leaving the new rectangle in dst which may be the same as src Many procedures exist to manipulate transformations In general when they accept more than one Point or Rect as arguments the Points or Rects must be distinct from each other i e no aliasing is allowed Geo TransPoint applies the Transform f to the Point psrc and leaves its result in the Point pdst Geo TransRect is identical but for Rects it applies t to rsrc and leaves its result in rdst GeoTransRect guarantees that rdst gt r_ur is really above and to the right of rdst gt r_ll by interchanging upper and lower coordinates if necessary after the transform Note that this is NOT the same as transforming the upper right and lower left Points separately since separate transformations can result in a rectangle whose upper right is below its lower left e g GeoUpsideDownTransform Three procedures compose transforms producing the transform that is equivalent to applying first one then the second of the two transforms There are two special case procedures GeoTranslateTrans composes first the Transform fsr
312. ng all ext files up to date for the cell in the window beneath the crosshair and all cells beneath it Magic displays any errors encountered during circuit extraction using stippled feedback areas over the area of the error along with a message describing the type of error Option and args are used in the following ways extract all All cells in the window beneath the cursor are re extracted regardless of whether they have changed since last being extracted extract cell name Extract only the currently selected cell placing the output in the file name If more than one cell is selected this command uses the upper leftmost one extract do option extract no option Enable or disable various options governing how the extractor will work Use extract do with no arguments to print a list of available options and their current settings When the adjust option is enabled the extractor will compute compensating capacitance and resistance whenever cells overlap or abut if disabled the extractor will not compute these adjustments but will run faster If capacitance is enabled node capacitances to substrate perimeter and area are computed otherwise all node capacitances are set to zero Similarly resistance governs whether or not node resistances are computed The coupling option controls whether coupling capacitances are computed or not if disabled flat extraction is significantly faster than if coupling capacitance computation is enabl
313. nlike the stretch command though plow selection insures that design rule correctness and con nectivity are preserved Load the cell tut3e and use a to select the area underneath the label that says select me Then point with the cursor to the point labelled point here and type plow selection Practice selecting things and plowing them Like the stretch com mand there is also a longer form of plow selection For example plow selection down 5 will plow the selection and the box down 10 units Selecting a cell and plowing it is a good way to move the cell Load tut3f and select the cell tut3e Point to the label point here and plow the selection with plow selection Notice that all connections to the cell have remained attached The cell you select must be in the edit cell however The plowing operation is implemented in a way that tries to keep your design as compact as possible To do this it inserts jogs in wires around the plow In many cases though the additional jogs are more trouble than they re worth To reduce the number of jogs inserted by plowing type the command plow nojogs From now on Magic will insert as few jogs as possible when plowing even if this means moving more material You can re enable jog insertion with the command Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 plow jogs Load the cell tut3d again and try plowing it both with and without jog insertion
314. nodes whose capacitance is greater than cthresh as well as the total number of nodes Other programs such as ext2sim 1 use this option as a threshold value below which a capacitor will not be output The default value for cthresh is 10 femtofarads p path Normally the path to search for ext files is determined by looking for path commands in first cad lib magic sys magic then magic then magic in the current directory If p is specified the colon separated list of directories specified by path is used instead Each of these directories is searched in turn for the ext files in a design r rthresh Set the resistance threshold to rthresh ohms Similar in function to c but for resistances The default value for rthresh is 10 ohms s sym value It s possible to use special attributes attached to transistor gates to control the length and width of transistors explicitly rather than allowing them to be determined by the extractor These attri butes are of the form ext w width or ext l length where width or length can either be numeric or textual The trailing indicates that these are transistor gate attributes If textual they are treated as symbols which can be assigned a numeric value at the time ext2sim is run The s flag is used to assign numeric values to symbols If a textual symbol appears in one of the above attri butes but isn t given a numeric value via s or S below then it is
315. ntacts of type If surround2 is non zero it indicates an overlap distance for ayer2 During wire switch commands Magic scans the wiring information to find a con tact whose layer and layer2 correspond to the previous and desired new wiring materi als or vice versa If a match is found a contact is generated according to type minSize surround and surround2 38 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 14 Router section The router section of a technology file provides information used to guide the automatic routing tools The section contains four lines See Table 16 for an example router section router layer1 metall 3 allMetall 3 layer2 metal2 3 allMetal2 4 allPoly allDiff 1 contacts m2contact 4 gridspacing 8 end Table 16 Router section The first two lines have the keywords layer1 and layer2 and the following format layerl wireType wire Width type list distance type list distance They define the two layers used for routing After the layerl or layer2 keyword are two fields giving the name of the material to be used for routing that layer and the width to use for its wires The remaining fields are used by Magic to avoid routing over existing material in the channels Each pair of fields contains a list of types and a distance The distance indicates how far away the given types must be from routing on that layer Layerl and layer2 are not symmetrical wherever possib
316. ntry that was 20 bytes long The macro CALLOC and the procedure callocMagic perform function analagous to MALLOC and malloc Magic except that the malloc d memory is zeroed Memory can be freed using either the procedure freeMagic which frees its argument var exactly as does the UNIX free 3 or using the FREE macro which does the same thing to var but is faster Users of MALLOC and FREE should beware that they are macros that include C statements enclosed in a pair of braces and should be treated accordingly For example it is not legal to type if i j MALLOC HashEntry he i else return NULL One should instead use if i j MALLOC HashEntry he i else return NULL If you wish to take advantage of the debugging features of this memory allocator you must do two things First compile all of your c files that include malloc h with the DMALLOCTRACE flag Second when you link your program to build an a out file use the library cad sre magic lib libmagictrace a instead of the normal libmagicutils a The libmagictrace a library contains additional code to maintain the information needed by the debugging procedures below If you link your program with the standard library it will link successfully but the debugging procedures won t do anything The debugging procedures produce a trace file for subsequent analysis by prleak 8 Before any memory is allocated you should call malloc
317. o define a number of macros for these sets of layers Table 12a gives a complete list All of the layers named in any one width rule must lie on the same plane However if some of the layers are contacts Magic will substitute a different contact image if the named image isn t on the same plane as the other layers 25 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 spacing allPoly allPoly 2 touching_ok Polysilicon spacing must be at least 2 MOSIS rule 3 2 spacing pfet nncont nnd 3 touching_illegal Transistors must be separated from substrate contacts by 3 MOSIS rule 4 1 spacing pe allDiff 1 touching_illegal Poly contact must be I unit from diffusion MOSIS rule 5B 6 Table 12c Some spacing rules in the dre section Euclidean distance Manhattan distance Figure 5 For design rule checking the Manhattan distance between two horizontally or vertically aligned points is just the normal Euclidean distance If they are not so aligned then the Manhattan distance is the length of the longest side of the right triangle forming the diagonal line between the points 11 2 Spacing rules The second simple kind of design rule is a spacing rule It comes in two flavors touching_ok and touching_illegal both with the following syntax spacing types types2 distance flavor error The first flavor touching_ok does not prohibit types and types2 from being imme
318. o the command inter preter by prompting again with irsim gt 4 Node Names It s easy to determine node names under Magic First locate the red square region in the middle right side of the circuit Move the cursor over this region and select it by typing s To find out the name for this node type getnode Magic should print that the node name is RESET_B The command getnode prints the names of all nodes in the current selection Move the cursor over the square blue region in the upper right corner and add this node to the current selection by typing S Type getnode again and Magic should print the names of two nodes the blue node is named hold You can also print aliases for the selected nodes Turn on name aliasing by typing getnode alias on Select the red node again and type getnode Several names will be printed the last a ie Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic September 19 1990 name printed is the one RSIM uses so you should use this name for RSIM Note that get node is not guaranteed to print all aliases for a node Only those alises generated when the RSIM node name is computed are printed However most of the alaiases will usually be printed Printing aliases is also useful to monitor the name search since getnode can take several seconds on large nodes Turn off aliasing by typing getnode alias off getnode works by extracting a single node Consequently it can take a long time to compu
319. ocations of a terminal This is the default behavior of garoute router garoute route netlist Route the edit cell If netlist is not specified the netlist used is the same as when garoute is given with no options If netlist is given then it is used instead garoute reset Clear all channels defined by garoute channel in preparation for redefining a new set of channels garoute warn The opposite of garoute nowarn this command instructs the router to leave feedback if it is not possible to route to all of the places where a terminal appears when a terminal has more than one location even if not all of those locations are actually selected for routing by the global router getcell cellName child refPointC parent refPointP This command adds a child cell instance to the edit cell The instance refers to the cell cellName it is positioned so that refPointC in the child is at point refPointP in the edit cell The reference points can either be the name of a label in which case the lower left corner of the label s box is used as the reference point or as a pair of numbers giving the x y coordinates of a point expli citly If refPointC is not specified the lower left corner of cellName cell is used If refPointP is not specified the lower left corner of the box tool is used the box must be in a window on the edit cell The new subcell is selected The difference between this command and dump is that dump copies the contents of th
320. of the window We may eventually use glyphs in a menu interface but don t hold your breath Glyphs are stored in ASCII glyph files each of which can hold one or more glyph patterns Each glyph is represented as a pattern of characters representing the pixels in the glyph Each character selects a display style from the current display styles file the display style indicates the color to use for that pixel See the manual page glyphs 5 for details on the syntax of glyphs files The window glyphs are stored in files of the form windowsXX glyphs The XX indicates how wide the glyphs are and is set by the graphics driver for a particular display We started out with a windows7 glyphs and a windows11 glyphs Since then display resolution has increased greatly so we have also created a windows14 glyphs and a windows22 glyphs The positions of the various glyphs in these files is important and is defined in the window module of Magic Programmable cursors are stored in files named x glyphs where x is determined by the device driver for the display Displays capable of supporting full color cursors use color glyphs displays that can only support monochrome cursors used bw glyphs The order of the various glyphs in these files is important It is defined by the files styles h in the misc module of Magic Magic Maintainer s Manual 4 Using Magic Under X Windows Don Stark Computer Systems Laboratory Stanford University Stanford CA 943
321. oftware old stuff NO_VARARGS Hack for machines without a VARARGS package SYSV For Unix System V Flags defined if needed in magic h based on other flags BIG_ENDIAN Indicates big endian byte ordering is being used LITTLE_ENDIAN Indicates little endian byte ordering is being used NEED_MONCNTL Hack for machines without a moncontrol procedure NEED_VFPRINTF Hack for machines without a vfprintf procedure SIG_RETURNS_INT Defined in magic h for systems that expect a signal handler to return an integer rather than a void 7 0 2 Graphics Driver Compiletime Options X10 Used in the graphics module for the X10 driver X11 Used in the graphics module for the X11 driver OLD_R2_FONTS Used when X11 is release 2 Magic normally assumes release 3 AED Used in the graphics module when compiling for AED displays GTCO Used in the graphics module when using a GTCO bitpad with an AED display Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 7 0 3 Compiletime Options for Module Inclusion NO_CALMA Flag to eliminate the calma module to reduce the size of Magic NO_CIF Flag to eliminate the cif module to reduce the size of Magic NO_EXT Flag to eliminate the ext module to reduce the size of Magic NO_PLOT Flag to eliminate the plot module to reduce the size of Magic NO_ROUTE Flag to eliminate the router modules to reduce the size of Magic NO_SIM Flag to eliminate the sim module to re
322. ogy files and to generate CIF files from Magic Contains code to implement special windows for editing color maps The procedures in this module contain the top level command routines for layout commands commands that are valid in all windows are handled in the windows module These routines generally just parse the commands check for errors and call other routines to carry out the actions This is the largest and most important Magic module It imple ments the hierarchical corner stitched database and reads and writes Magic files Provides display functions specific to layout windows including managing the box redisplaying layout and displaying highlights and feedback There s not much in this module just a few routines used for debugging purposes This module contains the incremental design rule checker It contains code to read the dre sections of technology files record areas to be rechecked and recheck those areas in a hierarchical fashion The ext2sim directory isn t part of Magic itself It s a self contained program that flattens the hierarchical ext files gen erated by Magic s extractor into a single file in sim format See the manual page ext2sim 1 This is another self contained program It converts ext files into single file in spice format See the manual page ext2spice 1 Contains code that is used by the extract module and the ext2 programs The module produces a library that is linke
323. olar transistors the gate attribute ext aps forces the output of the substrate area and perimeter for a specific fet in flat mode only j device sdRclass subRclass defaultSubstrate Gives ext2sim information about the source drain resistance class of the fet type device Makes device to have sdRclass source drain resistance class subRclass substrate well resistance class and the node named defaultSubstrate as its default substrate The defaults are nfet 0 Gnd and pfet 1 6 Vdd which correspond to the MOSIS technology file but things might vary in your site Ask your local cad administrator The way the extraction of node area and perimeter works in magic the total area and perimeter of the source drain junction is summed up on a single node That is why all the junction areas and perimeters are summed up on a single node this should not affect simulation results however Special care must be taken when the substrate of a fet is tied to a node other than the default substrate eg in a bootstraping charge pump To get the correct substrate info in these cases the fet s with separate wells should be in their own separate subcell with ext aph attributes attached to their sensitive terminals also all the transistors which share sensistive terminals with these should be in another subcell with the same attributes In addition all of the options of extcheck 1 are accepted The awk filter spice2sim is provided with the current distrib
324. ologies should always match the file names 3 Planes types and contact sections The planes types and contact sections are used to define the layers used in the technology Magic uses a new data structure called corner stitching to represent lay outs Corner stitching represents mask information as a collection of non overlapping rectangular tiles Each tile has a type that corresponds to a single Magic layer An indi vidual corner stitched data structure is referred to as a plane Magic allows you to see the corner stitched planes it uses to store a layout We ll use this facility to see how several corner stitched planes are used to store the layers of a layout Enter Magic to edit the cell m2a Type the command watch active demo a ie Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 You are now looking at the active plane Each of the boxes outlined in black is a tile The arrows are stitches but are unimportant to this discussion You can see that some tiles contain layers polysilicon ndiffusion ndcontact polycontact and ntransistor while others contain empty space Corner stitching is unusual in that it represents empty space explicitly Each tile contains exactly one type of material or space You have probably noticed that metall does not seem to have a tile associated with it but instead appears right in the middle of a space tile This is because metall is stored on a different plane the
325. olor window and sends them over a pipe to Magic The pro gram also responds to requests from Magic for the mouse position In addition this program tells Suntools to forward characters typed in the color window directly to Magic s text window ARGUMENTS All six arguments are required colorWindowName This is the name of the color window that magic is running under such as dev win3 Magic normally opens up the color monitor with a single large window on it textWindowName This is the name of the text window that contains Magic s command log Keyboard events are forwarded to this window notifyPID If this processID is not 0 then SIGIO signals are sent to this process when there is data for it requestF D pointFD buttonFD These are the file descriptors that grSunProg should use in its interface see below They are small integers printed as strings INTERFACE Button pushes are sent out over file descriptor buttonFD A button push is encoded as two characters fol lowed by two integers giving the location of the button push The first character is either D M or R depending on the button pushed Left Middle or Right The next character is either D or U depending on the action Up or Down The two numbers are the X and Y coordinates of the button push This string is followed by a newline Example LD 123 342 means that the left button was pushed down at location 123 342 GrSunProg sometimes receives
326. olysilicon diffusion and their overlaps transistors are all stored in the active plane Metall does not interact with any of these tile types so it is stored in its own plane the metall plane Similarly in the scmos technology metal2 doesn t interact with either metall or the active layers so is stored in yet another plane metal2 Contacts between layers in one plane and layers in another are a special case and are represented on both planes This explains why the pcontact and ndcontact tiles appeared on both the active plane and on the metall plane Later in this section when the con tacts section of the technology file is introduced we ll see how to define contacts and the layers they connect The planes section of the technology file specifies how many planes will be used to store tiles in a given technology and gives each plane a name Each line in this section defines a plane by giving a comma separated list of the names by which it is known Any name may be used in referring to the plane in later sections or in commands like the watch command you used earlier Table 2 gives the planes section from the scmos technology file Magic uses six other planes internally The subcell plane is used for storing cell instances rather than storing mask layers The designRuleCheck and designRuleError planes are used by the design rule checker to store areas to be reverified and areas con taining design rule violations respectively Fin
327. ommand No colons are necessary Any line whose last character is backslash is joined to the following line The commands setpoint push button echo sleep and updatedisplay are useful in command files and seldom used elsewhere specialopen x y x2 y2 type args Open a window of type type If the optional x7 y x2 y2 coordinates are given then the new win dow will have its lower left corner at screen coordinates x y and its upper right corner at screen coordinates x2 y2 The args arguments are interpreted differently depending upon the type of the window These types are known layout This type of window is used to edit a VLSI cell The command takes a single argument which is used as the name of a cell to be loaded The command open filename is a shorthand for the command specialopen layout filename color This type of window allows the color map to be edited See the section COMMANDS FOR COLORMAP EDITING below netlist This type of window presents a menu that can be used to place labels and to generate and edit net lists See the section COMMANDS FOR NETLIST EDITING below underneath Move the window pointed at so that it lies underneath the rest of the windows undo count Undoes the last count commands Almost all commands in Magic are now undo able The only holdouts left are cell expansion unexpansion and window modifications change of size zooming etc If count is unspecified it defaults to 1 Only the last tw
328. ommand for Magic is magic file You could type any file name for file and Magic would start editing that file It turns out that tut1 is just a file in Magic s cell library If you didn t type a file name Magic would load a new blank cell If things didn t happen as they should have when you tried to run Magic any of several things could be wrong If a message of the form magic Command not found 4 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 appears on your screen it is because the shell couldn t find the Magic program The most stable version of Magic is the directory cad bin and the newest public version is in cad new You should make sure that both these directories are in your shell path Nor mally cad new should appear before cad bin If this sounds like gibberish find a Unix hacker and have him or her explain to you about paths If worst comes to worst you can invoke Magic by typing its full name cad bin magic tut1 Another possible problem is that Magic might not know what kind of display you are using To solve this use magic s d flag magic d display tut1 Display is usually the model number of the workstation you are using or the name of your window system Look in the manual page for a list of valid names or just guess something Magic will print out the list of valid names if you guess wrong If you are using a graphics terminal not a workstation it is possible that M
329. omputer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Warning Process details often change Contact MOSIS or your fab line to verify information in this document 1 Introduction This document describes Magic s NMOS technology It includes information about the layers design rules routing CIF generation and extraction This technology is available by the name nmos run Magic with the shell command magic T nmos The design rules described here are for the standard Mead and Conway NMOS process with butting contacts omitted and buried contacts added There is a single layer each of metal and polysilicon If you ve been reading the Mead and Conway text or if you ve already done circuit layout with a different editing system don t forget that these are not the layers that actually end up on masks Contacts and transistors are drawn in a stylized form that omits implants vias and buried windows 2 Layers and Design Rules 2 1 Metal There is only one layer of metal and it is drawn in blue Magic accepts the names metal or blue for this layer Metal must always be at least 3 units wide and must be Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS September 19 1990 separated from other metal by at least 3 units 2 2 Polysilicon 2 LILLE 2 Polysilicon is drawn in red and can be referred to in Magic as either polysilicon or red It has a minimum width of 2 units and a minimum spacing of 2 units
330. on Identifies the version of ext format used to write name ext The current version is 5 1 style style Identifies the style that the cell has been extracted with scale rscale cscale Iscale Sets the scale to be used in interpreting resistance capacitance and linear dimension values in the remainder of the ext file Each resistance value must be multiplied by rscale to give the real resistance in milliohms Each capacitance value must be multiplied by cscale to give the real capacitance in attofarads Each linear dimension e g width height transform coordinates must be multiplied by scale to give the real linear dimension in centimicrons Also each area dimen sion e g transistor channel area must be multiplied by scale scale to give the real area in square centimicrons At most one scale line may appear in a ext file If none appears all of rscale cscale and Iscale default to 1 resistclasses r 2 Sets the resistance per square for the various resistance classes appearing in the technology file The values r r2 etc are in milliohms they are not scaled by the value of rscale specified in the scale line above Each node in a ext file has a perimeter and area for each resistance class the values r1 r2 etc are used to convert these perimeters and areas into actual node resistances See Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction for a description of how resistances are computed from perimeters and areas by the progra
331. on diffusion and various combinations of them such as transistors Two additional bits are used one each for the two metal layers so they are transparent with respect to each other and the poly diff combinations Thus although only one poly diff combination can appear at each point it s possible to see the overlaps between each of these combinations and each com bination of metall and metal2 Furthermore all of these styles are overridden if the sixth bit of the pixel is set In this case the low order five bits no longer correspond to mask layers they are used for opaque layers for things like labels and cell bounding boxes and override any mask information Thus for example when metall is displayed it only affects one bit plane but when labels are displayed the entire low order six bits of the pixel are modified It s important that the opaque layers like labels are drawn after the transparent things that they blot out this is guaranteed by giving them higher style numbers in the display styles files Finally the seventh bit of the pixel is used for highlights like the box and the selec tion All 64 entries in the color map corresponding to pixel values with this bit set con tain the same value namely pure white This makes the highlights appear opaque with respect to everything else However since they have their own bit plane which is com pletely independent of anything else they can be drawn and erased without having to red
332. on causes the area through which it s moved to be erased in that layer Also each piece of paint in the selection that touches unselected material along its back side causes extra material to be painted to fill in the gap left by the move If direction isn t given and the cursor isn t exactly left right up or down from the box corner then Magic first rounds the cursor position off to a position that is one of those whichever is closest tool name info Change the current tool The result is that the cursor shape is different and the mouse buttons mean different things The command tool info prints out the meanings of the buttons for the current tool Tool name changes the current tool to name where name is one of box wiring or netlist If tool is invoked with no arguments it picks a new tool in circular sequence multiple invocations will cycle through all of the available tools unexpand Unexpand all cells that touch the box but don t completely contain it upsidedown Flip the selection upside down about a horizontal axis running through the center of the selection s area If the box is in the same window as the selection then it is flipped too Selected material that is not in the edit cell is not changed what Print out information about all the things that are selected wire option args This command provides a centerline wiring style user interface Option and args specify a partic ular wiring option as described b
333. onal Datagram Flow Extended Description Deborah Estrin Jeffrey C Mogul Gene Tsudik Kamaljit Anand WRL Research Report 88 5 December 1988 SCHEME gt C A Portable Scheme to C Compiler Joel F Bartlett WRL Research Report 89 1 January 1989 Optimal Group Distribution in Carry Skip Adders Silvio Turrini WRL Research Report 89 2 February 1989 Precise Robotic Paste Dot Dispensing William R Hamburgen WRL Research Report 89 3 February 1989 Simple and Flexible Datagram Access Controls for Unix based Gateways Jeffrey C Mogul WRL Research Report 89 4 March 1989 Spritely NFS Implementation and Performance of Cache Consistency Protocols V Srinivasan and Jeffrey C Mogul WRL Research Report 89 5 May 1989 Available Instruction Level Parallelism for Super scalar and Superpipelined Machines Norman P Jouppi and David W Wall WRL Research Report 89 7 July 1989 A Unified Architecture Vector Scalar Floating Point Norman P Jouppi Jonathan Bertoni and David W Wall WRL Research Report 89 8 July 1989 Architectural and Organizational Tradeoffs in the Design of the MultiTitan CPU Norman P Jouppi WRL Research Report 89 9 July 1989 Integration and Packaging Plateaus of Processor Performance Norman P Jouppi WRL Research Report 89 10 July 1989 A 20 MIPS Sustained 32 bit CM
334. one of those types the substrate terminal will be connected to the node of the overlapped material Otherwise the substrate terminal will be connected to the node with the global name of snode which must be a global name i e end in an exclamation point Gscap is the capacitance between the transistor s gate and its diffusion terminals in attofarads per lambda Finally gccap is the capacitance between the gate and the chan nel in attofarads per square lambda Currently gscap and gccap are unused by the extractor Often the units in the extracted circuit for a cell will always be multiples of certain basic units larger than centimicrons for distance attofarads for capacitance or milliohms for resistance To allow larger units to be used in the ext file for this technology thereby reducing the file s size the extract section may specify a scale for any of the three units as follows escale c lambda rscale r In the above c is the number of attofarads per unit capacitance appearing in the ext files lis the number of centimicrons per unit length and r is the number of milliohms per unit SZT Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 resistance All three must be integers r should divide evenly all the resistance per square values specified as part of resist lines and c should divide evenly all the capacitance per unit values Magic s extractor breaks up large cells into chunks for h
335. ontents for the layer The result of the last geometric operation is painted into the Magic database The geometric operations that are allowed in the cifinput section are a subset of those permitted in the cifoutput section or layers and layers and not layers grow amount shrink amount In these commands the layers must all be CIF layers and the amounts are all CIF dis tances centimicrons As with the cifoutput section layers can only be specified in sim ple comma separated lists tildes and slashes are not permitted When CIF files are read all the mask information is read for a cell before perform ing any of the geometric processing After the cell has been completely read in the Magic layers are produced and painted in the order they appear in the technology file In general the order that the layers are processed is important since each layer will usually override the previous ones For example in the scmos tech file shown in Table 10 the commands for ndiff will result in the ndiff layer being generated not only where there is only ndiffusion but also where there are ntransistors and ndcontacts The descriptions for ntransistor and ndcontact appear later in the section so those layers will replace the ndiff material that was originally painted Labels are handled in the cifinput section just like in the cifoutput section A line of the form labels layers means that the current Magic layer is to receive all CIF labels on la
336. oo This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows Netlist commands introduced in this tutorial extract flush ripup savenetlist trace writeall Layout commands introduced in this tutorial channel route Macros introduced in this tutorial none 1 Introduction This tutorial describes how to use Magic s automatic routing tools to make inter connections between subcells in a design In addition to the standard Magic router which is invoked by the route command and covered in this tutorial two other routing tools are available A gate array router Garouter permits user specified channel definitions terminals in the interior of cells and route throughs across cells To learn about the gate array router read this first then Magic Tutorial 12 Routing Gate Arrays Finally Magic provides an interactive maze router that takes graphic hints the Trouter that permits the user to control the overall path of routes while leaving the oe Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 tedious details to Magic The Jrouter is documented in Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router The standard Magic router provides an obstacle avoidance cap
337. or some errors such as non existent terminal names messages will be printed For other errors cross hatched feedback areas will be created Most of the feedback areas have messages similar to Net shifter bit 0 phil 8 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 gt Can t make bottom connection To see the message associated with a feedback area place the box over the feedback area and type feedback why In this case the message means that for some reason the router was unable to connect the specified net named by one of its terminals within one of the routing channel The terms bottom top etc may be misnomers because Magic sometimes rotates channels before routing the names refer to the direction at the time the channel was routed not the direction in the circuit However the location of the feedback area indicates where the connection was supposed to have been made You ve probably noticed by now that the router sometimes generates unnecessary wiring such as inserting extra jogs and U shapes in wires look next to right3 in the top cell These jogs are particularly noticeable in small examples However the router actually does better on larger examples there will still be a bit of extra wire but it s negligible in comparison to the total wire length on a large chip Some of this wire is necessary and important it helps the router to avoid several problem situations
338. orkstation then you are also running a window system such as X11 or SunView In this case Magic s windows are moved and resized just like the other windows you have displayed and you can skip the rest of this section For displays like the AED family which don t have a built in window package Magic implements its own window manager To re arrange windows on the screen you can use techniques similar to those you learned for moving the box for painting opera tions Point somewhere in the border area of a window except for the lower left corner and press and hold the right button The cursor will change to a shape like this This indicates that you have hold of the upper right corner of the window Point to a new location for this corner and release the button The window will change shape so that the corner moves Now point to the border area and press and hold the left button The cur sor will now look like Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 This indicates that you have hold of the entire window by its lower left window Move the cursor and release the button The window will move so that its lower left corner is where you pointed The other button commands for positioning the box by any of its corners also work for windows Just remember to point to the border of a window before pushing the but tons The middle button can be used to grow a window up to full screen size To try this
339. os are printed If command contains spaces tabs or semi colons then it must be placed in quotes The semicolon acts as a command separator allowing multiple commands to be combined in a single macro openwindow cell Open a new empty window at the cursor position Placement sizing and methods of manipula tion are determined by the conventions of the window system in use If graphics is being done directly to a frame buffer with no intervening window system e g on an AED the windows can be manipulated via mouse buttons as described in MOUSE BUTTONS FOR WINDOW CON TROL above If cell is specified then that cell is displayed in the new window Otherwise the area of the box will be displayed in the new window over Move the window under the cursor so that it appears above all other windows pushbutton button action Simulates a button push Button should be left middle or right Action is one of up or down This command is normally invoked only from command scripts produced by the logeommands command quit Exit Magic and return to the shell If any cells colormaps or netlists have changed since they were last saved on disk you are given a chance to abort the command and continue in Magic redo n Redo the last n commands that were undone using undo see below The number of commands to redo defaults to 1 if n is not specified redraw Redraw the graphics screen reset Reset the graphics controller and redraw the graphics
340. otemachine than the one to which a graphics terminal is attached and the local graphics terminal has no login process Normally fsleeper will start a remote sleeper on the companion graphics terminal for your terminal This graphics terminal is found by looking in the file cad lib displays as described in displays 5 If a dif ferent graphics terminal is desired it may be specified by the t flag Note that this is the terminal on the local machine not the remote machine The remote terminal will be printed by sleeper 1 when it starts up on the remote machine Also normally fsleeper will attempt to log in as the user sleeper on the remote machine If a different user name is desired it may be specified with the l flag This user name must exist on remotemachine FILES cad lib displays SEE ALSO magic 1 rsleeper 1 sleeper 1 displays 5 AUTHOR Walter Scott BUGS If no remotemachine is specified it defaults to ucbkim This is fine for Berkeley but useless elsewhere 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 GRSUNPROG 1 CAD Tool User s Manual GRSUNPROG 1 NAME grSunProg internal process for Magic s Sun 120 display driver SYNOPSIS grSunProg colorWindowName textWindowName notifyPID requestFD pointFD buttonFD DESCRIPTION GrSunProg is an internal program used by Magic when using the Sun 120 workstation s display This manual page is intended only for Magic maintainers GrSunProg collects button pushes from the c
341. other files via the include mechanism are possible Technology files are installed as a file of the name techname techn The numeric version suffix n currently 26 is added to the final tech when the file is installed and allows multiple versions of the technology file to coexist in the same directory There is a shell script tech techinstall to do all the necessary processing to install a new tech nology file Technology files can be installed in any directory When Magic is run it searches for a technology file first in the current directory and next in the system library directory cad lib magic sys To install a new technology file whose source is techname tech run tech techinstall techname tech vers dir where dir is the directory in which the technology file is to be installed and vers is the proper version suffix to insure that this technology file is readable by the latest version of Magic See the Makefile in tech for the string VERSION which defines the current ver sion number 43 Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 Display Styles Color Maps and Glyphs Robert N Mayo John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first All of them Commands covered in this tutorial none Macros covered in this tutorial none 1 Introduction This document gives
342. ous although it usually works it can introduce large inaccuracies when the parts are large compared to the sizes of the wires used to connect them as might be the case on a silicon PCB 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 DSTYLE 5 CAD Tool User s Manual DSTYLE 5 NAME dstyle format of dstyle files display styles DESCRIPTION Display styles indicate how to render information on a screen Each style describes one way of rendering information for example as a solid area in red or as a dotted outline in purple Different styles correspond to mask layers highlights labels menus window borders and so on See Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 Display Styles Color Maps and Glyphs for more information on how the styles are used Dstyle files usually have names of the form x y dstylen where x is a class of technologies y is a class of displays and n is a version number currently 5 The version number may increase in the future if the for mat of dstyle files changes For example the display style file mos 7bit dstyle5 provides all the rendering information for our nMOS and CMOS technologies for color displays with at least 7 bits of color Dstyle files are stored in ASCII as a series of lines Lines beginning with are considered to be com ments and are ignored The rest of the lines of the file are divided up into two sections separated by blank lines There should not be any blank lines within a section DISP
343. overall information about the files that tell Magic how to display information on the screen There are three types of files that contain display information display styles files color map files and glyph files 2 Display Styles Display styles files describe how to draw rectangular areas and text A single file contains a large number of display styles Each display style contains two kinds of infor mation a how to modify pixels which bits of the pixel should be changed and what their new value s should be and b which pixels to modify Part b consists of things like fill the entire area or modify only those pixels in the area that are given by a particular stipple pattern or draw a dashed line around the area s outline In the case of text which pixels to modify is determined by the font for the text which is not part 1 Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 September 19 1990 of the display style so the display style information for this is ignored See the manual page dstyle 5 for details on the format of display styles files Display styles are designed to take into account both the characteristics of certain technologies and the characteristics of certain displays For example a bipolar process may require information to be displayed very differently than a MOS process and a black and white display will be used much differently than a color display Thus there can be many differen
344. ow the user to supply a pro cedure that could determine whether or not an address was to be traced SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 MPACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MPACK 3 NAME mpack routines for generating semi regular modules DESCRIPTION Mpack is a library of C routines that aid the process of generating semi regular modules Decoder planes barrel shifters and PLAs are common examples of semi regular modules Using Magic an mpack user will draw an example of a finished module and then break it into tiles These tiles represent the building blocks for more complicated instances of the module The mpack library pro vides routines to aid in assembling tiles into a finished module MAKING AN EXAMPLE MODULE The first step in using mpack is to create an example instance of the module called a template The basic building blocks of the structure or tiles are then chosen Each tile should be given a name by means of a rectangular label which defines its contents If the tiles in the module do not abut e g they overlap it is useful to define another tile whose size indicates how far apart the tiles should be placed Templates should be in Magic format and by convention end with a mag suffix With some programs it is possible to generate the same structure in a different technology or style by changing just the template If this is the case each template should have a filename of the form base
345. ows Robert N Mayo Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Commands introduced in this tutorial center closewindow openwindow over specialopen under windowpositions Macros introduced in this tutorial o O 1 Introduction A window is a rectangular viewport You can think of it as a magnifying glass that may be moved around on your chip Magic initially displays a single window on the screen This tutorial will show you how to create new windows and how to move old ones around Multiple windows allow you to view several portions of a circuit at the same time or even portions of different circuits Some operations are easier with multiple windows For example let s say that you want to paint a very long line say 3 units by 800 units With a single window it is hard to align the box accurately since the magnification is not great enough With multiple windows one window can show the big picture while other windows show magnified views of the areas where the box needs to be aligned The box can then be positioned accurately in these magnified windows Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows September 19 1990 2 Manipulating Windows 2 1 Opening an
346. ox s width for the x direction and Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 height for the y direction By changing the box size you can space elements so that they overlap abut or have gaps between them The elements are given indices from 0 to xsize 1 in the x direction and from 0 to ysize 1 in the y direction The second form of the command is identical to the first except that the elements are given indices from xlo to xhi in the x direction and from ylo to yhi in the y direction Try making a 4x4 array out of the tut4z cell with gaps between the cells You can also invoke the array command on an existing array to change the number of elements or spacing Use a size of 1 for xsize or ysize in order to get a one dimensional array If there are several cells selected the array command will make each of them into an array of the same size and spacing It also works on paint and labels if paint and labels are selected when you invoke array they will be copied many times over to create the array Try using the array command to replicate a small strip of paint 4 Switching the Edit Cell At any given time you are editing the definition of a single cell This definition is called the edit cell You can modify paint and labels in the edit cell and you can re arrange its subcells You may not re arrange or delete the subcells of any cells other than the edit cell nor may you modify the paint or labels of any cells exce
347. ox constituted a paint brush Magic sweeps the brush across the box in the given direction Place the box over the label Fill here in tut3b and type fill left The corner command is similar to fill except that it generates L shaped wires that follow two sides of the box travelling first in direction and then in direction2 Place the box over the label Corner here in tut3b and type corner right up In both fill and corner if layers isn t specified then all layers are filled If layers is given then only those layers are painted Experiment on tut3b with the fill and corner commands When you re painting bundles of wires it would be nice if there were a convenient way to place contacts across the whole bundle in order to switch to a different layer There s no single command to do this but you can place one contact by hand and then use the array command to replicate a single contact across the whole bundle Load the cell tut3c This contains a bundle of wires with a single contact already painted by hand on the bottom wire Type s with the cursor over the contact and type S with the cursor over the stub of purple wiring material next to it Now place the box over the label Array and type the command array 1 10 This will copy the selected contact across the whole bundle The syntax of the array command is sarray xsize ysize This command makes the selection into an array of identical elements
348. pacitance within a single cell and between cells AUTHOR Walter Scott SEE ALSO ext2sim 1 magic 1 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 4 GLYPHS 5 CAD Tool User s Manual GLYPHS 5 NAME glyphs format of glyphs files DESCRIPTION Glyph files glyph extension are used to store commonly used bit patterns glyphs for Magic Right now the bit patterns are used for two purposes in Magic First they specify patterns for programmable cursors each cursor shape e g the arrow used for the wiring tool is read in as a glyph from a glyph file Second glyphs are used by the window manager to represent the icons displayed at the ends of scroll bars Glyph file names normally have the extension glyph Glyph files are stored in ASCII format Lines beginning with are considered to be comments and are ignored Blank lines are also ignored The first non comment line in a glyph file must have the syntax size nGlyphs width height The nGlyphs field must be a number giving the total number of glyphs stored in the file The width and height fields give the dimensions of each glyph in pixels All glyphs in the same file must have the same size The size line is followed by a description for each of the glyphs Each glyph consists of height lines each containing 2xwidth characters Each pair of characters corresponds to a bit position in the glyph with the leftmost pair on the topmost line corresponding to the upper left pixe
349. paint labels and unexpanded subcells visible underneath the box are selected If layers is specified then only those layers are selected If more is specified the new material is added to the current selec tion rather than replacing it If less is specified the new material is removed from the selection deselected select more less cell name Select a subcell If name isn t given this command finds a subcell that is visible under neath the cursor and selects it If the command is repeated without moving the cursor then it will step through all the subcells under the cursor If name is given it is treated as a hierarchical instance identifier starting from the root of the window underneath the cur sor The named cell is selected If more is specified the new subcell is added to the current selection instead of replacing it If less is specified the new subcell is removed from the selection deselected select clear Clear out the selection This does not affect the layout it merely deselects everything select help Print a short synopsis of the selection commands select save cell Save all the information in the selection as a Magic cell on disk The selection will be saved in file cell mag select and the see command Select interacts with the see command When selecting individual pieces of material only visible layers are candidates for selection When selecting an entire area however both visible and non visible mater
350. pe to value The spacings associated with each route type are the ones that are observed when the Irouter places that route type To change the spacing between two route types two spacing parameters must be changed the spacing to the first type when routing on the second and the spacing to the second type when routing on the first Spacings to the SUBCELL pseudo type give the minimum spacing between a route type and unexpanded subcells The SUBCELL spacing for a given route layer defaults to the maximum spacing to the route layer required by the design rules in the dre section of the technology file This ensures that no design rules will be violated regardless of the contents of the subcell If subcell designs are constrained in a fashion that permits closer spacings to some layers the SUBCELL spacings can be changed to take advantage of this 10 Search Parameters search The Mzrouter search is windowed Early in the search only partial paths near the start point are considered as the search progresses the window is moved towards the goal This prevents combinatorial explosion during the search but still permits the exploration of alternatives at all stages The search subcommand permits access to two parameters controlling the windowed search rate and width The rate parameter deter mines how fast the window is shifted towards the goal and the width parameter gives the width of the window The units are comparable with those use
351. peration plow selection direction distance Like the move or stretch commands this moves all the material in the selection that belongs to the edit cell However any material not in the selection is pushed out of its way just as though each piece of the selection were plowed individually If no argu ments are given the selection is picked up by the point underneath the lower left corner of the box and plowed so that this point lies at the cursor location The box is moved along with the selection If direction is given it must be a Manhattan direction e g north The selection is moved in that direction by amount If the box is in the same window as the selection it is moved too Amount defaults to 1 If there is selected material that isn t in the edit cell it is ignored note that this is different from select and move If direction isn t given and the cursor isn t exactly left right up or down from the box corner then Magic first rounds the cursor position off to a position that is one of those whichever is closest plow straighten Straighten jogs automatically after each plow operation The effect will be as though the straighten command were invoked after each plow operation with the same direction and over the area changed by plowing resist cell tolerance This command is similar to extresist above but used for extracting resistance networks for indivi dual nodes Only the node underneath the box is processed
352. pes section Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 The types section identifies the technology specific tile types used by Magic Table 3 gives this section for the scmos technology file Each line in this section is of the fol lowing form plane names Each type defined in this section is allowed to appear on exactly one of the planes defined in the planes section namely that given by the plane field above For contacts types such as pcontact the plane listed is considered to be the contact s home plane Other tile types will be used to represent the contact on the other planes it connects this is described later in this section The names field is a comma separated list of names The first name in the list is the Jong name for the type it appears in the mag file and whenever error messages involving that type are printed Any unique abbreviation of any of a type s names is sufficient to refer to that type both from within the technology file and in any commands such as paint or erase Tile type Plane space all error_p EP designRuleError error_s ES designRuleError error_ps EPS designRuleError checkpaint CP designRuleCheck checksubcell CS designRuleCheck magnet mag mhint fence f fhint rotate r rhint Table 4 Built in Magic types Magic has certain built in types as shown in Table 4 Empty space space is spe cial in that it
353. pidly during Magic s life so we use version numbers to allow multiple formats of technology files to exist at once The installed versions of technology files have names like nmos tech26 where 26 is a version number The current version is defined in the Makefile for tech and should be incremented if you ever change the format of technology files if you install a new format without changing the version number pre existing versions of Magic won t be able to read the files After incrementing the version number you ll also have to re make the tech module since the version number is referenced by the code that reads the files 8 2 Display Styles The display style file sources are contained in the source directory graphics See Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 The Display Style and Glyph Files and the manual page dstyle 5 for a description of their contents Make install in graphics will copy the files to cadlib sys which is where Magic looks for them when it executes 8 3 Glyph Files Glyph files are described in Maintainer s Manual 3 and the manual page glyphs 5 they define patterns that appear in the cursor The sources for glyph files appear in two places some of them are in graphics in files like color glyphs and some others are defined in windows windowXX glyphs When you make install in those directories the glyphs are copied to cadlib sys which is where Magic looks for them when it executes 8 4 Color M
354. pt the edit cell You may however copy information from other cells into the edit cell using the selection commands To help clarify what is and isn t modifiable Magic displays the paint of the edit cell in brighter colors than other paint When you rearrange subcells of the edit cell you aren t changing the subcells them selves All you can do is change the way they are used in the edit cell location orienta tion etc When you delete a subcell nothing happens to the file containing the subcell the command merely deletes the instance from the edit cell Besides the edit cell there is one other special cell in Magic It s called the root cell and is the topmost cell in the hierarchy the one you named when you ran Magic tut4a in this case As you will see in Tutorial 5 there can actually be several root cells at any given time one in each window For now there is only a single window on the screen and thus only a single root cell The window caption at the top of the color display contains the name of the window s root cell and also the name of the edit cell Up until now the root cell and the edit cell have been the same However this need not always be the case You can switch the edit cell to any cell in the hierarchy by selecting an instance of the definition you d like to edit and then typing the command edit Use this command to switch the edit cell to one of the tut4x instances in tut4a Its paint brightens
355. put to other image tools or for generation of slides and viewgraphs for presentations The file consists of a sequence of bytes three for each pixel written from left to right and top to bottom Each three bytes represent the red green and blue values used to display the pixel Thus if the upper left most pixel were to be red the first three bytes of the file would have values of 255 0 and 0 The resolution of the generated file is normally 512 but can be controlled by setting the plot parameter pixWidth It must be a multiple of 8 Magic will round up if an inap propriate value is entered The height of the file is determined by the shape of the box In any case the actual resolution of the file is appended to the file name For example plotting a square region 2048 pixels across will result in a file named something like magicPlot1234a 2048 2048 There are several plotting parameters used internally to Magic such as the width of the Versatec printer and the number of dots per inch on the Versatec printer You can modify most of these to work with different printers For details read about the various plot command options in the man page 10 Utility Commands There are several additional commands that you will probably find useful once you start working on real cells The command grid spacing grid xSpacing ySpacing grid xSpacing ySpacing xOrigin yOrigin grid off will display a grid over your layout Initially
356. r s Manual NAME list procedures for managing lisp style lists in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS List 3 include magic h include list h LIST_ADD item list LIST_FIRST ist LIST_TAILilist bool ListContainsP element list ClientData element List list Void ListDealloc list List list Void ListDeallocC list List list int ListLength list List list ClientData ListPop listPP List listPP List ListReverse list List list DESCRIPTION These macros and procedures permit the implementation of linked lists of arbitrary things The lists are lisp like i e list pointers are in separate structures rather than in the strucs being linked Macros are dis tinguished from procedues by names that are all upper case LIST_ADD i l adds an item to the front of a list LIST_COPY I Inew creates a copy of a list LIST_FIRST references the first item on the list LIST_TAIL 1 references the sublist consisting of all but the first item of the list ListContainsP returns TRUE in the specified item is contained in the list int ListLength returns the length of the list Void ListDealloc reclaims a list but not its contents Void ListDeallocC reclaims a list fland fR its contents ListPop deletes the first item from the list and returns it the item List ListReverse creates and returns a reversed copy of a list SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MAGICUTILS 3 CAD Tool
357. r For example if the scmos technology supported stacked contacts it doesn t you could define a contact the type pm12c that connected polysilicon metall and metal2 as Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 p automatically generated pcontact metal metall plane active plane oo Figure 1 A different tile type is used to represent a contact on each plane that it connects Here a contact between poly on the active plane and metall on the metall plane is stored as two tile types One pcontact is specified in the technology file as residing on the active plane the other is automatically generated for the metal1 plane pcontact contact pm12c polysilicon metall metal2 but it wouldn t be possible to define directly a contact that connected four layers such as pwell ndiffusion metall and metal2 To define this latter type of contact you d have to define two different contact tile types wnde and nm12c and use two contact lines each of which connects only three layers contact wndc pwell ndiffusion metall contact nm12c ndiffusion metall metal2 Magic will automatically generate the appropriate paint and erase rules to allow painting for example nm12c over wndc to give the four layer stacked contact In order for Magic to do this however you must be certain never to define two types of contacts with identical component types This is the reason why in
358. r and nature of the styles is determined by whoever wrote your technology file There are separate styles for reading and writing CIF Calma at any given time there is one current input style and one current output style The standard SCMOS technology file provides an example of how different styles can be used Start up Magic with the SCMOS technology magic Tscmos Then type the commands cif ostyle cif istyle The first command will print out a list of all the styles in which Magic can write CIF Calma in this technology and the second command prints out the styles in which Magic can read CIF Calma You use the cif command to change the current styles but the styles are used for both CIF and Calma format conversion The SCMOS technology file provides several output styles The initial default style for writing CIF is lambda 1 0 gen This style generates mask layers for the MOSIS scalable CMOS pro cess where each Magic unit corresponds to 1 micron and both well polarities are gen erated See the technology manual for more information on the various styles that are available You can change the output style with the command cif ostyle newStyle where newStyle is the new style you d like to use for output After this command any future CIF or Calma files will be generated with the new style The cif istyle command can be used in the same way to see the available styles for reading CIF and to change the current style Each style
359. r file describing all the the information underneath the box in a format suitable for printing on Versatec black and white or color printers and spool the file for printing See the plot parameters above for information about the parameters that are used to control Versatec plotting Size is used to scale the plot a scalefactor is chosen so that the area of the box is size inches across on the printed page Size defaults to the width of the printer Layers selects which layers including labels and subcells to plot it defaults to everything visible on the screen plow direction layers plow option args The first form of this command invokes the plowing operation to stretch and or compact a cell Direction is a Manhattan direction Layers is an optional collection of mask layers which defaults to One of the edges of the box is treated as a plow and dragged to the opposite edge of the box e g the left edge is used as the plow when plow right is invoked All edges on layers that lie in the plow s path are pushed ahead of it and they push other edges ahead of them to maintain design rules connectivity and transistor and contact sizes Subcells are moved in their entirety without being modified internally Any mask information overlapping a subcell moved by plow ing is also moved by the same amount Option and args are used in the following ways plow boundary The box specifies the area that may be modified by plowing This area is h
360. r to value on layer type If type is parameter is set to value on all layers iroute layers type value value valuen sets a row in the parameter table iroute layers parameter value valuen sets a column in the table There are six layer parameters Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 active Takes the value of YES the default or NO Only active layers are used by the Trouter width Width of routing created by the Irouter on the given layer The default is the minimum width permitted by the design rules hcost Cost per unit length for horizontal segments on this layer vcost Cost per unit length for vertical segments jogcost Cost per jog transition from horizontal to vertical segment hintcost Cost per unit area between actual route and magnet segment 8 Contact Parameters iroute contacts The contacts subcommand gives access to a table of parameters for contact types used in routing one row of parameters per type The syntax is identical to that of the layers subcommand described above and parameters are printed and set in the same way There are three contact parameters active Takes the value of YES the default or NO Only active contact types are used by the Irouter width Diameter of contacts of this type created by the Irouter The default is the minimum width permitted by the design rules cost Cost per contact charged by the Irouter cost fu
361. rased The ripup netlist command may be use ful to ripup existing routing before rerouting The command trace name provides an additional facility for examining router feedback It highlights all paint con nected to each terminal in the net containing name much as the Show menu button does for paint connected to anything under the box The net to be highlighted may be 13 Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing September 19 1990 specified by naming one of its terminals for example trace shifter bit 0 phil Use the trace command in conjunction with the nets specified in router feedback to see the par tially completed wiring for a net Where no net is specified the trace command highlights the currently selected net 14 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction Walter Scott some updates by other folks too Special Studies Program Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory PO Box 808 L 270 Livermore CA 94550 wss mordor s1 gov This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Commands introduced in this tutorial extract Macros introduced in this tutorial none Programs introduced in this tutorial ext2sim ext2spice extcheck Changes since Magic version 4 New form of extract unique Path length extraction with extract length Accurate resistance extraction with
362. raw a grid in the line style given by 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 DSTYLE 5 CAD Tool User s Manual DSTYLE 5 outline The styles cross and stipple may be supplemented with an outline by giving a non zero outline field The outline and grid styles don t make sense without an an outline and solid doesn t make sense with an outline since all the pixels are modified anyway stipple Used when fill is stipple to specify in decimal the stipple number to use shortName This is a one character name for this style These names are used in the specification of glyphs and also in a few places in the Magic source code Most styles have no short name use a in this field for them longName A more human readable name for the style It s not used at all by Magic STIPPLES SECTION The second section of a dstyle file is separated from the first by a blank line The first line of the second section must be stipples and each additional line specifies one stipple pattern with the syntax number pat tern name Number is a decimal number used to name the stipple in the stipple fields of style lines Number must be no less than and must be no greater than a device dependent upper limit Most devices support at least 15 stipple patterns Pattern consists of eight octal numbers each from 0 377 and separated by white space The numbers form an 8 by 8 array of bits indicating which pixels are to be modified when the stipple is used The n
363. raw any of the mask information underneath This is why the box can be moved rela tively quickly On the other hand if Magic erases a label it must redraw all the mask information in the area because the label shared pixel bits with the mask information Thus the scheme we ve been using for Magic is a hierarchical combination of tran sparent and opaque layers This scheme is defined almost entirely by the styles file so you can try other schemes if you wish However you re likely to have problems if you try anything too radically different we haven t tried any schemes but the one currently being used so there are probably some code dependencies on it For more information on transparent and opaque layers see the paper The User Interface and Implementation of an IC Layout Editor which appeared in IEEE Tran sactions on CAD in July 1984 Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 September 19 1990 5 Glyphs Glyphs are small rectangular bit patterns that are used in two places in Magic The primary use for glyphs is for programmable cursors such as the shapes that show you which corner of the box you re moving and the various tools described in Tutorial 3 Each programmable cursor is stored as a glyph describing the pattern to be displayed in the cursor The second use of glyphs is by the window package the little arrow icons appearing at the ends of scroll bars are stored as glyphs as is the zoom box in the lower left corner
364. rce points to the terminating character in the source file name and pdest points to the null character terminating the expanded name If a tilde cannot be converted because the user name cannot be found psource is still advanced past the current entry but nothing is stored at the destination At most size characters including the terminating null character will be stored at pdest The name consisting of a single tilde i e with no user name expands to the current user s home directory PaConvertTilde returns the number of bytes of space left in the destination area if successful or 1 if the user name couldn t be found in the password file PaOpen opens a file looking it up in the current path and supplying a default extension It either returns a pointer to a FILE as does fopen 3s or NULL if no file could be opened The mode of the file opened is determined by mode also as in fopen If ext is specified then it is tacked onto the end of name to construct the name of the file PaOpen will attempt to find Ext must begin with a dot if that is the extension separa tor none is inserted automatically If the first character of name is a tilde or slash PaOpen tries to look up the file with the original name and extension doing tilde expansion if necessary and returning the result Otherwise it goes through the search path path a colon separated list of directories much as in csh 1 one entry at a time trying to look up
365. re type is the name of the tiletype of the layer and hCost vCost jogCost and hintCost are non negative integers specifying the cost per unit horizontal distance cost per unit vertical distance cost per jog and cost per unit area of deviation from magnets respec tively Route layers for any given style must lie in distinct planes 10 3 Contacts Contact lines specify the route contacts available to the mzrouter in the current style They have the following form contact type routeLayer routeLayer 2 cost Here type is the tiletype of the contact routeLayerl and routeLayer2 are the two layers connected by the contact and cost is a nonnegative integer specifying the cost per con tact 5936 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 10 4 Notactive It maybe desirable to have a layer or contact available to the maze router but default to off i e not be used by the mzrouter until explicitly made active Route types route layers or route contacts can be made to default to off with the following specification notactive route type route typen 10 5 Search The search rate width and penalty parameters can be set with a specification of the form search rate width penalty Here rate and width are positive integers And penalty is a positive rational it may include a decimal point See the irouter tutorial for a discussion of these parameters Note that penalty is a wizardly p
366. real Set the channel router end constant help Print a summary of the router options jog Print the channel router minimum jog length jog int Set the minimum jog length measured in grid units metal Toggle metal maximization on or off netlist Print the name of the current net list netlist file Set the current net list obstacle Print the channel router obstacle constant obstacle real Set the obstacle constant settings Print a list of all router parameters steady Print the channel router steady net constant steady int Set the steady net constant measured in grid units tech Print router technology information vias Print the metal maximization via limit vias int Set the via limit viamin Minimize vias in a routed layout Table III A summary of all of Magic router options 7 How the Router Works In order to make the router produce the best possible results it helps to know a little bit about how it works The router runs in three stages called channel definition global routing and channel routing In the channel definition phase Magic divides the area of the edit cell into rectangular routing areas called channels The channels cover all the space under the box except the areas occupied by subcells All of Magic s routing goes in the channel areas except that stems Section 8 2 may extend over subcells To see the channel structure that Magic chose place the box in tut7d as if you were going to route then type the command
367. resis command Courtesy of Don Stark of Stanford Contains the top level routing code including procedures to read the router sections of technology files chop free space up into channels analyze obstacles and paint back the results pro duced by the channel router This module contains files that manage the selection The rou tines here provide facilities for making a selection enumerating what s in the selection and manipulating the selection in several ways such as moving it or copying it Handles signals such as the interrupt key and control Z Provides an interactive interface to the simulator rsim Courtesy of Mike Chow of Stanford This module contains the top level technology file reading code and the current technology files The code does little except to read technology file lines parse them into arguments and pass them off to clients in other modules such as dre or database The top level command interpreter This module grabs com mands from the keyboard or mouse and sends them to the win dow module for processing Also provides routines for message and error printout and to manage the prompt on the screen Implements basic corner stitched tile planes This module was separated from database in order to allow other clients to use tile planes without using the other database facilities too The undo module provides the overall framework for undo and redo operations in that it stores lists of actions However
368. resistance and capaci tance to substrate Figure 1 shows how these lumped values are intended to be inter preted by the analysis programs that use the extracted circuit Each node in an extracted circuit has a name which is either one of the labels attached to the geometry in the node if any exist or automatically generated by the extractor These latter names are always of the form p_x_y where p x and y are integers e g 3_104_17 If a label ending in the character is attached to a node the node is considered to be a global Post processing programs such as ext2sim 1 will check to ensure that nodes in different cells that are labelled with the same global name are electrically connected Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 Nodes may have attributes attached to them as well as names Node attributes are labels ending in the special character and provide a mechanism for passing infor mation to analysis programs such as crystal 1 The man page ext 5 provides additional information about node attributes 5 2 Resistance Magic extracts a lumped resistance for each node rather than a point to point resis tance between each pair of devices connected to that node The result is that all such point to point resistances are approximated by the worst case resistance between any two points in that node By default node resistances are approximated rather than computed exact
369. rial that is not in the edit cell is not affected The second form of the command is as though the cur sor were pointing to x y in the edit cell the selection is picked up by the point beneath the lower left corner of the box and moved so that this point lies at x y paint layers The area underneath the box is painted in layers path searchpath This command tells Magic where to look for cells Searchpath contains a list of directories separated by colons or spaces if spaces are used then searchpath must be surrounded by quotes When looking for a cell Magic will check each directory in the path in order until the cell is found If the cell is not found anywhere in the path Magic will look in the system library for it If the path command is invoked with no arguments the current search path is printed plot option args Used to generate hardcopy plots direct from Magic Options and args are used in the following ways plot gremlin file layers Generate a Gremlin format description of everything under the box and write the description in file If layers isn t specified paint labels and unexpanded subcells are all included in the Gremlin file just as they appear on the screen If layers is specified then just the indicated layers are output in the Gremlin file Layers may include the special layers labels and subcell The Gremlin file is scaled to have a total size between 256 and 512 units you should use the width and or
370. ring tool and the cur sor will change to an arrow shape Use the tool info command to see what the buttons mean now You ll be using the wiring tool for most of the rest of this section The macro space corresponds to tool Try typing the space key a few times Magic will cycle circularly through all of the available tools There are three tools in Magic right now the box tool which you already know about the wiring tool which you ll learn about in this tutorial and the netlist tool which has a square cursor shape and is used for netlist editing Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing will show you how to use the netlist tool The current tool affects only the meanings of the mouse buttons It does not change the meanings of the long commands or macros This means for example that you can still use all the selection commands while the wiring tool is active Switch tools to the wiring tool point at some paint in tut3a and type the s macro A chunk gets selected just as it does with the box tool Magic Tutorial 3 Wiring and Plowing September 19 1990 2 2 Basic Wiring There are three basic wiring commands selecting the wiring material adding a leg and adding a contact This section describes the first two commands At this point you should be editing the cell tut3a with the wiring tool active The first step in wiring is to pick the material and width to use for wires This can be done in two ways The easi
371. rms f in current netlist same as showterms command Check current netlist for missing labels and nets Cleanup with less than two terminals same as typing cleanup command No Net Delete selected net same as dnet command Highlight paint connected to material under box Show same as typing shownet command Table I A summary of all the netlist menu button actions specialopen netlist A new window will appear in the lower left corner of the screen containing several rec tangular areas on a purple background Each of the rectangular areas is called a button Clicking mouse buttons inside the menu buttons will invoke various commands to edit labels and netlists Figure 2 shows a diagram of the netlist menu and Table I summarizes the meaning of button clicks in various menu items The netlist menu can be grown shrunk and moved just like any other window see Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Win dows for details It also has its own private set of commands To see what commands you can type in the netlist menu move the cursor over the menu and type help You shouldn t need to type commands in the netlist menu very often since almost every thing you ll need to do can be done using the menu See Section 9 for a description of a few of the commands you can type the complete set is described in the manual page magic 1 One of the best uses for the commands is so that you can define macros for them and avoid h
372. rob lems or highlight certain things for users Option and args are used in the following ways feedback add fext style Used to create a feedback area manually at the location of the box This is intended as a way for other programs like Crystal to highlight things on a layout They can generate a command file consisting of a feedback clear command and a sequence of box and 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 10 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 feedback add commands Text is associated with the feedback it will be printed by feedback why and feedback find Style tells how to display the feedback and is one of dotted medium outline pale and solid if unspecified style defaults to pale feedback clear Clears all existing feedback information from the screen feedback count Prints out a count of the current number of feedback areas feedback find nth Used to locate a particular feedback area If nth is specified the box is moved to the location of the nth feedback area If nth isn t specified then the box is moved to the next sequential feedback area after the last one located with feedback find In either event the explanation associated with the feedback area is printed feedback help Prints a short synopsis of all the feedback command options feedback save file This option will save information about all existing feedback areas in file The informa tion is stored as a collection of Magic commands so that it
373. route command routes the preferred routing layer termed metal horizontally and the alternate routing layer vertically By default wires on the alternate routing layer are then converted as much as possible to the pre ferred layer before being painted into the layout Enabling metal maximization improves the quality of the resulting routing since the preferred routing layer generally has better electrical characteristics however designers wishing to do hand routing after automatic routing may find it easier to disable metal maximization and deal with a layer per direction layout route netlist file Print the name of the current netlist If a file name is specified it is opened if possible and the new netlist is loaded This option is provided primarily as a convenience so you need not open the netlist menu before routing route obstacle real Print the obstacle constant used by the channel router If a value is supplied set the channel router obstacle constant to that value The obstacle constant is a dimensionless multiplier used in deciding how far in front of an obstacle the channel router should begin jogging nets out of the way Larger values mean that nets will jog out of the way earlier however if nets jog out of the way too early routing area is wasted route origin x y Print the x and y coordinates of the origin of the routing grid By default the routing grid starts from 0 0 However by supplying an
374. rs to control the routing Implements simple keyboard macros Like ext2sim this is also a self contained program It searches through a layout to find all the files that are used in it See mag icusage 1 This module contains the main program for Magic which parses command line parameters initializes the world and then transfers control to textio A few small things that didn t belong anyplace else Contains routines that implement the Tpack tile packing inter face using the Magic database not supported Contains maze routing routines that are used by the irouter and garouter modules Contains a program to convert a netlist into irouter commands Netlist manipulation routines Implements netlists and the special netlist editing windows Contains the code that parses command lines into arguments The internals of the plot command This module contains the code to support the plow and straighten commands Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 prieak resis router select signals sim tech textio tiles undo utils windows Also not part of Magic itself Prleak is a self contained program intended for use in debugging Magic s memory allocator It analyzes a trace of mallocs frees to look for memory leaks See the manual page prleak 8 for information on what the program does Resis is a module that does better resistance extraction via the ext
375. ry it However the selection commands work between windows you can select information in one window and then copy it into another this only works if the window you re copying into contains the edit cell if not you ll have to use the edit command first The operation of many Magic commands is dependent upon which window you are pointing at If you are used to using Magic with only one window you may at first for get to point to the window that you want the operation performed upon For instance if there are several windows on the screen you will have to point to one before executing a command like grid otherwise you may not affect the window that you intended 4 Special Windows In addition to providing multiple windows on different areas of a layout Magic pro vides several special types of windows that display things other than layouts For exam ple there are special window types to edit netlists and to adjust the colors displayed on the screen One of the special window types is described in the section below others are described in the other tutorials The specialopen type args command is used to create these sorts of windows The type argument tells what sort of window you want and args describe what you want loaded into that window The openwindow cel name command is really just short for the command specialopen lay out cellname Each different type of window layout color etc has its own command set If
376. ry to break a node up into several smaller nodes The appearance of a killnode line during the processing of a ext file means that all infor mation currently accumulated about node along with all fets that have a terminal connected to node should be thrown out it will be replaced by information later in the ext file The order of processing ext files is important in order for this to work properly children are processed before their parents so a killnode in a parent overrides one in a child resist nodel node2 R Defines a resistor of R milliohms between the two nodes nodel and node2 Both names are 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXT 5 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT 5 hierarchical distance namel name2 dmin dmax Gives the distance between two electrical terminals namel a driver and name2 a receiver Note that these are terminals and not nodes the names which are hierarchical label names are used to specify two different locations on the same electrical node The two distances dmin and dmax are the lengths in lambda of the shortest and longest acyclic paths between the driver and receiver The keywords in this last section describe the subcells used by name and how connections are made to and between them use def use id TRANSFORM Specifies that cell def with instance identifier use id is a subcell of cell name If cell def is arrayed then use id will be followed by two bracketed subscript ranges of the form lo hi sep
377. s AUTHOR Robert N Mayo BUGS When a tile contains part of a subcell or touches a subcell then the whole subcell is considered to be part of the tile The same goes for arrays of subcells 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 20 85 5 PATH 3 CAD Tool User s Manual PATH 3 NAME path procedures for managing search paths in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include lt stdio h gt include utils h int PaConvertTilde psource pdest size char psource pdest int size FILE PaOpen file mode ext path libpath prealname char file mode ext char path libpath char prealname char PaSubsWD path newWD char path newWD int PaEnum path file func cdata char path file int func name cdata ClientData cdata DESCRIPTION These procedures implement a path mechanism whereby several places may be searched for files PaConvertTilde is used to convert csh 1 style tilde notation for users home directories e g wss mydir file o to standard directory names as understood by open 2 etc If psource is a tilde then the name following the tilde up to the first slash or end of string is converted to a home direc tory and stored in the string pointed to by pdest Then remaining characters in the file name at psource are copied to pdest the file name is terminated by white space a NULL character or a colon and psource is updated Upon return psou
378. s Routes can be terminated at unexpanded subcells in the same fashion that connections to other pre existing features are made 7 Layer Parameters iroute layers Route layers specified in the mzrouter section of the technology file are the layers potentially available to the Irouter for routing The layer subcommand gives access to parameters associated with these route layers Many of the parameters are weights for factors in the Irouter cost function The Irouter strives for the cheapest possible route Thus the balance between the factors in the cost function determines the character of the routes which layers are used in which directions and the number of contacts and jogs can be controlled in this way But be careful Changes in these parameters can also pro foundly influence performance Other parameters determine which of the route layers are actually available for routing and the width of routes on each layer It is a good idea to inactivate route layers not being used anyway as this speeds up routing The layers subcommand takes a variable number of arguments iroute layers prints a table with one row for each route layer giving all parameter values iroute layers type prints all parameters associated with route layer type iroute layers type parameter prints the value of parameter for layer type If type is the value of parameter is printed for all layers iroute layers type parameter value sets paramete
379. s and you should always use the no_overlap rule to prevent unpleasant hierarchical interactions The problems with hierarchy are discussed in Section 8 6 below and design rules are discussed in Section 10 8 4 Labels There is an additional statement permitted in the cifoutput section as part of a layer description labels Magiclayers This statement tells Magic that labels attached to Magic layers Magiclayers are to be associated with the current CIF layer Each Magic layer should only appear in one such statement for any given CIF style If a Magic layer doesn t appear in any labels state ment then it is not attached to a specific layer when output in CIF 8 5 Calma GDS II Stream format layers Each layer description in the cifoutput section may also contain one of the follow ing statements calma calmaNumber calmaType This statement tells Magic which layer number and data type to use when the calma command outputs Calma GDS II Stream format for this CIF layer Both calmaNumber and calmaType should be positive integers between O and 63 Each CIF layer should have a different calmaNumber If there is no calma line for a given CIF layer then that layer will not be output by the calma command a b c Figure 4 If the operator grow 100 is applied to the shapes in a the merged shape in b results If the operator shrink 100 is applied to b the result is c However if th
380. s on some of the errors in tut6a It s a good idea to place the box right around the area of the error paint dre why rechecks the entire area under the box so it may take a long time if the box is very large If you re working in a large cell it may be hard to see the error paint To help locate the errors select a cell and then use the command dre find nth If you don t provide the nth argument the command will place the box around one of the errors in the selected cell and print out the reason for the error just as if you had typed dre why If you invoke the command repeatedly it will step through all of the errors in the selected cell remember the macro can be used to repeat the last long command this will save you from having to retype dre find over and over again Try this out on the errors in tut6a If you type a number for nth the command will go to the nth error in the selected cell instead of the next one If you invoke this command with no cell selected it searches the edit cell A third dre command is provided to give you summary information about errors in hierarchical designs The command is dre count This command will search every cell visible or not that lies underneath the box to see if any have errors in them For each cell with errors dre count will print out a count of the number of error areas Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking September 19 1990 3 Errors in Hierarchic
381. s so there is no rounding or loss of accuracy in the operations Rounding occurs only AFTER the geometrical operations at the last possible instant before entering paint into the Magic database 4 Non Manhattan Geometries Magic only supports Manhattan features When CIF or Calma files contain non Manhattan features they are approximated with Manhattan ones The approximations occur for wires if the centerline contains non Manhattan segments and polygons if the outline contains non Manhattan segments In these cases the non Manhattan segments are replaced with one or more horizontal and vertical segments before the figure is pro cessed Conversion is done by inserting a one unit stairstep on a 45 degree angle until a point is reached where a horizontal or vertical line can reach the segment s endpoint Some examples are illustrated in the figure below in each case the figure on the left is the one specified in the CIF file and the figure on the right is what results in Magic CIF Wire Resulting Magic Shape CIF Polygon Resulting Magic Shape The shape of the Magic stairstep depends on the order in which vertices appear in the CIF or Calma file The stairstep is made by first incrementing or decrementing the x coordinate then incrementing or decrementing the y coordinate then x then y and so on For example in the figure above the polygon was specified in counter
382. s type is one of fartypes sidewall intypes outtypes neartypes fartypes cap where intypes outtypes neartypes and fartypes are all type lists described in Figure 11 Cap is half the capacitance in attofarads per lambda when the edges are lambda apart Parallel wire coupling capacitance is computed as being inversely proportional to the dis tance between two edges at 2 lambda separation it is equal to the value cap at 4 lambda separation it is half of cap This approximation is not very good in that it tends to overestimate the coupling capacitance between wires that are farther apart To reduce the amount of searching done by Magic there is a threshold distance beyond which the effects of parallel wire coupling capacitance are ignored This is set as follows sidehalo distance where distance is the maximum distance between two edges at which Magic considers them to have parallel wire coupling capacitance If this number is not set explicitly in 36 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 the technology file it defaults to 0 with the result that no parallel wire coupling capacitance is computed Sidewall overlap capacitance is between material on the inside of an edge and over lapping material of a different type It is described by the sideoverlap keyword sideoverlap intypes outtypes ovtypes cap where intypes outtypes and ovtypes are type lists and cap is capacitance in attofarads
383. s what s mentioned above Just run X11 and then run Magic If you are running on some other workstation you ll need to read the next section on how to make a new binary The rest of this section concerns serial line displays so if you are using any sort of workstation with a built in display there is no need to read the next couple of paragraphs If you re running on a mainframe with a serial line color display you ll probably need to do some additional setup If the display is an AED512 or similar display it will be attached to the mainframe via an RS232 port Magic needs to be able to read from this port and there are two ways to do this The first is simply to have no login process for that port and have your system administrator change the protection to allow all processes to read from the port and write to it The second way is to have users log in on the display and run a process that changes the protection of the display There is a pro gram called Sleeper that we distribute with Magic if it s run from an AED port it will set everything up so Magic can use the port Sleeper is clumsy to use so we recommend that you use the first solution no login process When you re running on mainframes Magic will need to know which color display port to use from each terminal port Users can type this information as command line switches but it s clumsy To simplify things Magic checks the file cad lib displays when it starts up The
384. s a cross section side view not a top view of a set of masks that shows all three kinds of capacitance Overlap capacitance is parallel plate capacitance between two different kinds of material when they overlap Sidewall capacitance is parallel plate capacitance between the vertical edges of two pieces of the same kind of material Sidewall overlap capacitance is orthogonal plate capacitance between the vertical edge of one piece of material and the horizontal surface of another piece of material that overlaps the first edge Whenever material from two subcells overlaps or abuts the extractor computes adjustments to substrate capacitance coupling capacitance and node perimeter and area Often these adjustments make little difference to the type of analysis you are perform ing as when you wish only to compare netlists Even when running Crystal for timing analysis the adjustments can make less than a 5 difference in the timing of critical paths in designs with only a small amount of inter cell overlap To disable the computa tion of these adjustments use 1 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 poly lt 6 gt a 2 b 2 6 4 lt 6 gt v 1 2 c 2 Figure 5 a When transistors are rectangular it is possible to compute L W exactly Here gateper im 4 srcperim 6 drainperim 6 and L W 2 b The L W of non branching transistors can be approxima
385. s capacitance to substrate per unit length Here the diffusion space perimeter of 13 units has one value per unit length and the diffusion buried perimeter of 3 units another In addition each type of material has capacitance per unit area diff space perim 5 3 Capacitance Capacitance to substrate comes from two different sources Each type of material has a capacitance to substrate per unit area Each type of edge i e each pair of types has a capacitance to substrate per unit length See Figure 3 The computation of capaci tance may be disabled with extract no capacitance which causes all substrate capacitance values in the ext file to be zero It may be re enabled with extract do capacitance Internodal capacitance comes from three sources as shown in Figure 4 When materials of two different types overlap the capacitance to substrate of the one on top as determined by the technology is replaced by an internodal capacitance to the one on the bottom Its computation may be disabled with 10 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 extract no coupling which will also cause the extractor to run 30 to 50 faster Extraction of coupling capacitances can be re enabled with extract do coupling metal sidewall metal T overlap sidewall overlap oxide poly Figure 4 Magic extracts three kinds of internodal coupling capacitance This figure i
386. s currently accept it It is normally necessary to flatten the extracted circuit using one of the programs discussed in Section 7 such as ext2sim 1 ext2spice 1 or extcheck 1 2 Basic Extraction You can use Magic s extractor in one of several ways Normally it is not necessary to extract all cells in a layout To extract only those cells that have changed since they were extracted use sload root sextract The extractor looks for a ext file for every cell in the tree that descends from the cell root The ext file is searched for in the same directory that contains the cell s mag file Any cells that have been modified since they were last extracted and all of their parents are re extracted Cells having no ext files are also re extracted To try out the extractor on an example copy all the tut8x cells to your current direc tory with the following shell commands cp cad lib magic tutorial tut8 mag Start magic on the cell tut8a and type extract Magic will print the name of each cell tut8a tut8b tut8c and tut8d as it is extracted Now type extract a second time This time nothing gets printed since Magic didn t have to re extract any cells Now delete the piece of poly labelled delete me and type extract again This time only the cell tut8a is extracted as it is the only one that changed If you make a change to cell tut8b do it and then extract again both tut8b and tut8a will be re extracted
387. s for graphics terminals and X10 are also included but X11 is the preferred interface meaning it is better supported and you ll have lots of com pany Magic s X11 driver has a long history starting with an X10 driver by Doug Pan at Stanford Brown University the University of Southern Califor nia the University of Washington and Lawrence Livermore National Labs all prepared improved versions some of them for X11 Don Stark of Stanford took on the task of pulling these together and producing the X11 driver in this release Magic runs on a number of workstations such as the DECstation 3100 and Sun s SPARC processors Partial Unix System V support is provided via the compilation flags mentioned below The system also runs on the MaclIl Don Stark gets credit for the System V mods and support for HP machines while Mike Chow helped get it running on the Macll To assist people with small machines such as the Mac II Magic can now be compiled without some of its fancy features Compilation flags are provided as indicated below to eliminate things like routing plotting or calma output This is courtesy of Don Stark Reorganization of Magic Source Directory Magic as previously distributed was set up with the assumption that lots of people would be changing the code at the same time As a result the makefiles did all sorts of paranoid things like making extra copies of the source code whenever a module was re installed Since
388. s how to determine the node names that Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic September 19 1990 RSIM uses Lastly section 5 explains how to use the RSIM tool in Magic to simulate a circuit 2 Preparations for Simulation Magic uses the RSIM input file when it simulates the circuit Before proceeding any further make sure you have the correct versions of the programs ext2sim and rsim installed on your system Important changes have been made to these programs to sup port simulation within Magic To try out this tool on an example copy all the tut11x cells to your current directory with the following command cp cad lib magic tutorial tut11 The tut1la cell is a simple 4 bit counter using the Magic scmos technology file Start Magic on the cell tut11a and extract the entire cell using the command extract all When this command completes several ext files will be created in your current directory by the extractor The next step is to flatten the hierarchy into a single representation Return to the Unix c shell by quitting Magic The program ext2sim is used to flatten the hierarchy Run this program from the c shell by typing ext2sim L R c 20 tutlla This program will create the file tutl1a sim in your current directory If you are running IRSIM the tut11la sim can be used directly as input to the simu lator and you should skip the next step Instead if you will be using RSIM the last step is to crea
389. s is one or more layer names separated by commas you can also use spaces for separators but only if you enclose the entire list in double quotes Any layer can be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous For example paint poly metall will paint the polysilicon and metall layers The macro D is predefined by Magic to be erase is a pseudo layer that means all layers under neath the cursor Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection September 19 1990 3 Undo There are probably going to be times when you ll do things that you ll later wish you hadn t Fortunately Magic has an undo facility that you can use to restore things after you ve made mistakes The command undo or alternatively the macro u will undo the effects of the last command you invoked If you made a mistake several commands back you can type undo several times to undo successive commands However there is a limit to all this Magic only remembers how to undo the last ten or so commands If you undo something and then decide you wanted it after all you can undo the undo with the command redo U is a macro for this command Try making a few paints and erases then use undo and redo to work backwards and forwards through the changes you made 4 The Selection Once you have painted a piece of layout there are several commands you can invoke to modify the layout Many of them are based on the selection you se
390. s significant and entries are considered to extend all the way to their trailing NULL byte instead of being terminated by the first white space as in Lookup StrDup can be used to replace an old string with a new one freeing the storage for the old one and allocat ing sufficient storage for the new one It returns a pointer to a newly allocated character array just large enough to hold str and its trailing NULL byte This newly allocated array contains a copy of str How ever if str is NULL no memory is allocated and we return NULL If oldstr is non NULL then if oldstr is non NULL StrDup frees the storage pointed to by oldstr StrDup then sets oldstr to point to the new array of memory just allocated or NULL if str was NULL StrIsWhite returns TRUE if str is all white space or FALSE otherwise If commentok is TRUE then if the first non white character in str is a pound sign str is considered to be all white space StrIsInt returns TRUE if str is a well formed decimal integer or FALSE if it isn t Match provides a csh 1 like wild card matching facility The string pattern may contain any of the csh wildcard characters and If pattern matches string Match returns TRUE otherwise it returns FALSE ArgStr is provided to allow standard processing of command line arguments that take parameters It recog nizes flag value pairs of either the form Xvalue a single argument string or
391. s sometimes useful If you are working on a large cell and want to make sure that plowing never affects any geometry outside of a certain area you can place a boundary around the area you want to affect with the com mand plow boundary The box is used to specify the area you want to affect After this command subsequent plows will only affect the area inside this boundary Load the cell tut3h place the box over the label put boundary here and type plow boundary Now move the box away You will see the boundary highlighted with dotted lines Now place the box over the area labelled put plow here and plow up This plow would cause geometry outside of the boundary to be affected so Magic reduces the plow distance enough to prevent this and warns you of this fact Now undo the last plow and remove the boundary with plow noboundary Put the box over the put plow here label and plow up again This time there was no boundary to stop the plow so everything was moved as far as the height of the box Experiment with placing the boundary around an area of this cell and plowing Biy A Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others too This tutorial corresponds to Magic version 6 Tutorials to read first Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial
392. s technology which in this example is mos Each subsequent line consists of a tile type and a style number an integer between 1 and 63 The style number is nothing more than a reference between the technology file and the styles file Notice that a given tile type can have several styles e g pcontact uses styles 1 20 and 32 and that a given style may be used to display several dif ferent tiles e g style 2 is used in ndiff and ndcontact If a tile type should not be displayed it has no entry in the styles section 6 Compose section The semantics of Magic s paint operation are defined by a collection of rules of the form given material HAVE on plane PLANE if we paint PAINT then we get Z plus a similar set of rules for the erase operation The default paint and erase rules are simple Assume that we are given material HAVE on plane PLANE and are painting or erasing 10 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 compose compose nfet poly ndiff compose pfet poly pdiff paint pwell nwell nwell paint nwell pwell pwell paint pdc active pwell ndc active paint pdc m1 pwell ndc m1 paint pfet pwell nfet paint pdiff pwell ndiff paint nsd pwell psd paint nsc active pwell psc active paint nsc m1 pwell psc m1 paint ndc active nwell pdc active paint ndc m1 nwell pdc m1 paint nfet nwell pfet paint ndiff nwell pdiff paint psd nwell nsd paint psc active nwell nsc active paint p
393. s used to move the box by one of its corners Normally this button picks up the box by its lower left corner To pick the box up by a different corner click the right button while the left button is down This switches the pick up point to the corner nearest the cursor When the button is released the box is moved to position the corner at the cursor location If the box has been set to snap to the window s grid see the snap command then the box corner is left aligned with the grid that the user has chosen for 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 the window with the grid command even if that grid is not visible right Change the size of the box by moving one corner Normally this button moves the upper right corner of the box To move a different corner click the left button while the right button is down This switches the corner to the one nearest the cursor When you release the button three corners of the box move in order to place the selected corner at the cursor location the corner opposite the one you picked up remains fixed Snapping to the window s grid is handled as for the left button middle bottom Used to paint or erase If the crosshair is over paint then the area of the box is painted with the layer s underneath the crosshair If the crosshair is over white space then the area of the box is erased Wiring Tool The wiring tool indicated by an arrow cursor is used to prov
394. sc m1 nwell nsc m1 end Table 7 Compose section material PAINT 1 You get what you paint If the home plane of PAINT is PLANE or PAINT is space you get PAINT otherwise nothing changes and you get HAVE 2 You can erase all or nothing Erasing space or PAINT from PAINT will give space erasing anything else has no effect These rules apply for contacts as well Painting the base type of a contact paints the base type on its home plane and each image type on its home plane Erasing the base type of a contact erases both the base type and the image types It is sometimes desirable for certain tile types to behave as though they were com posed of other more fundamental ones For example painting poly over ndiffusion in scmos produces ntransistor instead of ndiffusion Also painting either poly or ndiffu sion over ntransistor leaves ntransistor erasing poly from ntransistor leaves ndiffusion and erasing ndiffusion leaves poly The semantics for ntransistor are a result of the fol lowing rule in the compose section of the scmos technology file compose ntransistor poly ndiff Sometimes not all of the component layers of a type are layers known to magic As an example in the nmos technology there are two types of transistors enhancement fet and depletion fet Although both contain polysilicon and diffusion depletion fet can be thought of as also containing implant which is not a tile type So
395. se with debuggers such as dbx 1 which would otherwise catch the SIGIO signal that is sent to Magic on each keystroke When running Magic in debug mode keystrokes and mouse clicks won t inter rupt the background design rule checker so it s generally best to run with design rule checking disabled dre off When D is set crashes do not generate mail to the system maintainer and coredumps are not created F This switch only works on VAXes and hasn t been tested recently The next two arguments are filenames The first object_file is the name of the file that was executed to run this version of Magic The second save_file is the name of a new file After performing all initializations read ing in the technology file loading the style information and colormap etc an executable image of Magic is stored in save_file This executable image may then be run as a normal Magic except that it starts up much more quickly The symbol table from object_file is copied to save_file so the new version can be debugged When Magic starts up it looks for a command file in cad lib magic sys magic and processes it if it exists Then Magic looks for a file with the name magic in the home directory and processes it if it exists Finally Magic looks for a magic file in the current directory and reads it as a command file if it exists The magic file format is described under the source command COMMANDS GENERAL INFORMATION Mag
396. shKill to perform any final cleanup of a key such as freeing a key that had been copied by copyFn when it was installed in the hash table HashKill can be used to free all the storage associated with table Both HashLookOnly and HashFind are used for retrieving the entry from table that matchs key They differ in their behavior when key is not in the table HashLookOnly will return NULL if the key is not found while HashFind will create a new HashEntry whose value as returned by HashGetValue is zero It is possible to scan sequentially through a hash table to visit all its entries HashStartSearch initializes the HashSearch structure hs which is then passed to HashNext which keeps returning subsequent entries in the table until all have been returned when it returns NULL BUGS If it is possible for initialized entries in the hash table to have NULL values then HashLookOnly must be called before HashFind if you are to be certain that an entry was not already in the table since there is no distinction between a NULL value that was already in the table and a NULL value that signifies that the entry was newly created by HashFind SEE ALSO magicutils 3 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 HEAP 3 CAD Tool User s Manual HEAP 3 NAME heap procedures for managing sorted heaps in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include magic h include heap h typedef struct int he_key char he_id HeapEntry bool HEAP_EMPTY h Heap h
397. sion and n diffusion to overlap or abut a ie Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 In addition to errors the extractor can give warnings If only warnings are present the extracted circuit can still be simulated By default only some types of warnings are reported and displayed as feedback To cause all warnings to be displayed use extract warn all The command extract warn warning may be used to enable specific warnings selectively see below To cause no warnings to be displayed or to disable display of a particular warning use respectively extract warn no all or extract warn no warning Three different kinds of warnings are generated The dup warning checks to see whether you have two electrically unconnected nodes in the same cell labelled with the same name If so you are warned because the two unconnected nodes will appear to be connected in the resulting ext file which means that the extracted circuit would not represent the actual layout This is bad if you re simulating the circuit to see if it will work correctly the simulator will think the two nodes are connected but since there s no physical wire between them the electrons won t When two unconnected nodes share the same label name the extractor leaves feedback squares over each instance of the shared name It s an excellent idea to avoid labelling two unconnected nodes with the same name within a cell Instead use the correct
398. splay each of these combinations Typi cally the colors are chosen to present an illusion of transparency the poly and metal S92 Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 September 19 1990 color is chosen to make it appear as if metal were a transparent colored foil placed on top of poly You can see this effect if you paint polysilicon metall and metal2 on top of each other in our standard technologies The problem with transparent layers is that they require many bits per pixel Most color displays don t have enough planes to use a different one for each mask layer Another option is to use a group of planes together For example three bits of a pixel can be used to store seven mask layers plus background with each mask layer corresponding to one of the combinations of the three bits The problem with this scheme is that there is no way to represent overlaps where there is an overlap one of the layers must be displayed at the expense of the others We call this scheme an opaque one since when it is used it appears as if each layer is an opaque foil with the foils lying on top of each other in some priority order This makes it harder to see what s going on when there are several mask layers in an area The display styles files we ve designed for Magic use a combination of these tech niques to get as much transparency as possible For example our mos 7bit dstyle5 file uses three bits of the pixel in an opaque scheme to represent polysilic
399. splays Most of the displays are now available with special ROMs in them that provide extra Magic support talk to your local AED sales rep to make sure you get the UCB ROMs More displays are being added so check the Unix man page for the most up to date information 4 Running Magic From this point on you should be sitting at a Magic workstation so you can experi ment with the program as you read the manuals Starting up Magic is usually pretty sim ple Just log in and if needed start up your favorite window system Then type the shell command magic tut1 Tuti is the name of a library cell that you will play with in this tutorial At this point several colored rectangles should appear on the color display along with a white box and a cursor A message will be printed on the text display to tell you that tut1 isn t writable it s in a read only library and a gt prompt should appear If this has happened then you can skip the rest of this section except for the note below and go directly to Section 5 Note in the tutorials when you see things printed in boldface for example magic tut1 from above they refer to things you type exactly such as command names and file names These are usually case sensitive A is different from a When you see things printed in italics they refer to classes of things you might type Arguments in square brackets are optional For example a more complete description of the shell c
400. src magic misc DFLAGS should contain the compile switches that you wish to use at your site All makefiles for Magic reference the common DFLAGS file The switches in this release are shown below These flags are normally setup by running the make config script in cad src magic Some of them are turned on in magic h when a particular machine configuration is detected 7 0 1 Machine OS Compiletime Options The following switches should be defined automatically by the compiler vax For VAX machines mips For mips processors such as the DECstation 3100 MIPSEL For little endian mips processors such as the DECstation 3100 MIPSEB For big endian mips processors pyramid For Pyramid machines sun For Sun machines mc68000 For machines which have a version of the 68000 as the processor sparc Sparc based machines lint Used to bypass things that lint complains about Don t turn this on Lint turns it on itself Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 If needed you should put the following switches in the DFLAGS file macll For the Macll SUNVIEW Used when including Magic s SunView graphics drivers SUN120 For the Sun120 machine BSD4_2 Used in the utils module to patch around a broken version of flsbuf that is needed in the VAX version of Unix 4 2 BSD systems This is rarely needed since almost all version of Unix now have this bug fixed FASYNC Hack for some versions of Sun2 s
401. st menu They may also be invoked when you are pointing at another window by using the send netlist command Terminal names in all of the commands below are hierarchical names consisting of zero or more cell use ids separated by slashes followed by the label name e g toplatch shiftcell_1 in When processing the terminal paths the search always starts in the edit cell add term term2 Add the terminal named term to the net containing terminal term2 If term2 isn t in a net yet make a new net containing just term and term2 cleanup Check the netlist to make sure that for every terminal named in the list there is at least one label in the design Also check to make sure that every net contains at least two distinct terminals or one terminal with several labels by the same name When errors are found give the user an opportun ity to delete offending terminals and nets This command can also be invoked by clicking the Cleanup menu button cull Examine the current netlist and the routing in the edit cell and remove those nets from the netlist that are already routed This command is often used after pre routing nets by hand so the router won t try to implement them again dnet name name For each name given delete the net containing that terminal If no name is given delete the currently selected net just as happens when the No Net menu button is clicked dterm name name For each name given delete that t
402. st of its contents are ignored Each terminal name is a path much like a file path name in Unix It consists of one or more fields separated by slashes The last field in the path is the name of a label in a cell The other fields if any are cell instance identifiers that form a path from the edit cell down to the label The first instance identifier must name a subcell of the edit cell the second must be a subcell of the first and so on Instance identifiers are unique within their parent cells so a terminal path selects a unique cell to contain the label However the same label may appear multiple times within its cell When this occurs Magic assumes that the identical labels identify electrically equivalent terminals it will choose the closest of them when routing to that terminal Further after connecting to one of these terminals Magic may take advan tage of the internal wiring connecting them together and route through a cell to complete the net s wiring An example netlist file follows below It contains three distinct nets Netlist File alu bit_1l cout alu bit_2 cin regcel1 21 2 output latch 2 input This line starts with a blank so it s a separator opcode_pla out6 shifter drivers shift2 SEE ALSO magic 1 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 SIM 5 CAD Tool User s Manual SIM 5 NAME sim format of sim files read by esim crystal etc DESCRIPTION The simulation tools crystal 1 and esim 1 accep
403. stem design is the art of composing systems which use each level of technology in an appropriate balance A major advance in overall system performance will require reexamination of all aspects of the system We do work in the design fabrication and packaging of hardware language processing and scaling issues in system software design and the exploration of new applications areas that are opening up with the advent of higher performance systems Researchers at WRL cooperate closely and move freely among the various levels of system design This allows us to explore a wide range of tradeoffs to meet system goals We publish the results of our work in a variety of journals conferences research reports and technical notes This document is a research report Research reports are normally accounts of completed research and may include material from earlier technical notes We use technical notes for rapid distribution of technical material usually this represents research in progress Research reports and technical notes may be ordered from us You may mail your order to Technical Report Distribution DEC Western Research Laboratory UCO 4 100 Hamilton Avenue Palo Alto California 94301 USA Reports and notes may also be ordered by electronic mail Use one of the following addresses Digital E net DECWRL WRL TECHREPORTS DARPA Internet WRL Techreports decwrl dec com CSnet WRL Techreports decwrl dec com UUCP de
404. strate terminal of Vdd while n channel transistors would have one of GND However when a transistor is surrounded by explicit well material as defined in the technology file Magic will override the default substrate terminal with the node to which the well 12 Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction September 19 1990 Type Loc AP Subs Gate Source Drain fet nfet 59 160 2 812 GND Mid2 4 N3 Out 4 0 Vss 0 4 0 fet nfet 36 137 2 812 Float Midl 4N2 Mid240 Vss 0 4 0 fet nfet 4152 812 Vss 0 In4N1 Mid1 40 Vss 0 4 0 fet pfet 5925 60 26 812 Vdd Mid2 4 P3 Vdd 040 Out40 fet pfet 36 25 37 26 812 VBias Mid 4 P2 Vdd 040 Mid240 fet pfet 425 526 812 Vdd 0 In4P1 Vdd 040 Midi 40 Table 1 The transistor section of tut8l ext material is connected This has several advantages it allows simulation of analog cir cuits in which wells are biased to different potentials and it provides a form of checking to ensure that wells in a CMOS process are explicitly tied to the appropriate DC voltage Transistor substrate nodes are discovered by the extractor only if the transistor and the overlapping well layer are in the same cell If they appear in different cells the transistor s substrate terminal will be set to the default for the type of transistor Load the cell tut8l extract it and look at the file tut8l ext Table 1 shows the lines for the six transistors in the file You ll notice that the substrate terminals the
405. strictly less than xtop and ybot strictly less than ytop The smallest legal value of xbot or ybot is 67108858 and the largest legal value for xtop or ytop is 67108858 Values that approach these limits within a factor of 100 or 1000 may cause numerical overflows in Magic even though they are not strictly illegal We recommend using coordi nates around zero as much as possible Rectangles should be non overlapping although this is not essential They should also already have been merged into maximal horizontal strips the neighbor to the right or left of a rectangle should not be of the same type but this is also not essential 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MAGIC 5 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 5 The second kind of line group describes a single cell use Each cell use group is of the following form use filename use id array xlo xhi xsep ylo yhi ysep timestamp stamp transform abcdef box xbot ybot xtop ytop A group specifies a single instance of the cell named filename with instance identifier use id The instance identifier use id must be unique among all cells used by this mag file If use id is not specified a unique one is generated automatically The array line need only be present if the cell is an array If so the X indices run from xlo to xhi inclusive with elements being separated from each other in the X dimension by xsep lambda The Y indices run from ylo to yhi inclusive with elements being separated from
406. strip_labels tile ch All labels in the tile tile that begin with the character ch are deleted TPremove_labels tile name r All labels in the tile tile that are completely within the area r are deleted If name is non NULL then only labels with that name will be affected TPstretch_tile tile str num The string str is the name of one or more labels within the tile tile Each of these labels must be of zero width or zero height i e they must be lines Each of these lines define a line across which the tile will be stretched The amount of the stretch is specified by num in units of half lambda Stretching such a line turns it into a rectangle Note that if the tile contains 2 lines that are co linear the stretching of one of them will turn both into rectangles Point Valued Routines POINT tLLf tile POINT tLR tile POINT tUL tile POINT tUR tile The location of the specified corner of tile tile relative to the tile s lower left corner is returned as a point LL stands for lower left LR for lower right UL for upper left and UR for upper right Note that tLLQ returns 0 0 POINT rLL rect POINT rLR rect POINT rUL rect POINT rUR rect The location of the specified corner of the rectangle rect is returned as a point LL stands for lower left LR for lower right UL for upper left and UR for upper right POINT align p p2 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 20 85 3 MPACK 3 CAD Tool User s Manual MPACK 3
407. t up or down Distance defaults to the width of the box if direction is right or left and to the height of the box if direction is up or down width size height size Set the box to the width or height indicated If size is not specified the width or height is reported xl yl x2 y2 Move the box to the coordinates specified these are in edit cell coordinates if the edit cell is in the window under the cursor otherwise these are in the root coordinates of the window x and y1 are the coordinates of the lower left corner of the box while x2 and y2 are the upper right corner The coordinates must all be integers calma option args This command is used to read and write files in Calma GDS II Stream format version 3 0 corresponding to GDS II Release 5 1 This format is like CIF in that it describes physical mask layers instead of Magic layers In fact the technology file specifies a correspondence between CIF and Calma layers The current CIF output style see cif ostyle controls how Calma stream layers are generated from Magic layers If no arguments are given the calma command generates a Calma stream file for the layout in the window beneath the cursor in file strm where file is the name of the root cell This stream file describes the entire cell hierarchy in the window The name of the library is the same as the name of the root cell Option and args may be used to invoke one of several additional operations calma flatte
408. t a circuit description in sim format There is a single Sim file for the entire circuit unlike Magic s ext 5 format in which there is a ext file for every cell ina hierarchical design A sim file consists of a series of lines each of which begins with a key letter The key letter beginning a line determines how the remainder of the line is interpreted The following are the list of key letters under stood units s tech tech format MIT LBL SU If present this must be the first line in the sim file It identifies the technology of this circuit as tech and gives a scale factor for units of linear dimension as s All linear dimensions appearing in the sim file are multiplied by s to give centimicrons The format field signifies the sim variant MIT and SU are compatible and understood by all tools LBL is understood only by gemini 1 type g s dl w x y g gattrs s sattrs d dattrs Defines a transistor of type type Currently type may be e or d for NMOS or p or n for CMOS The name of the node to which the gate source and drain of the transistor are connected are given by g s and d respectively The length and width of the transistor are and w The next two tokens x and y are optional If present they give the location of a point inside the gate region of the transistor The last three tokens are the attribute lists for the transistor gate source and drain If no attributes are present for a particular terminal the correspondin
409. t cell is currently the UNNAMED cell name must be specified in this case the edit cell is renamed to name as well as being saved in the file name mag Otherwise name is optional If specified the edit cell is saved in the file name mag otherwise it is saved in the file from which it was originally read see option This command is used to control which layers are to be displayed in the window under the cursor It has several forms see no layers Do not display the given layers in the window under the cursor If labels is given as a layer name don t display labels in that window either If errors is given as a layer no design rule violations will be displayed the checker will continue to run though If layers is given as all mask layers will be disabled but errors and labels will still be shown See the LAYERS section at the end of this manual page for an explanation of layer naming in Magic see layers Reenable display of the given layers Note that expands to all mask layers but does not include the label or error layers See the LAYERS section at the end of this manual page for details see no Don t display any mask layers or labels Only subcell bounding boxes will be displayed see Reenable display of all mask layers labels and errors see allSame Display all cells the same way This disables the facility where the edit cell is displayed 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 19 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User
410. t containing this filename is returned to the caller FLATTENING A CIRCUIT Once command line argument processing is complete the caller can cause ext 5 files to be read by calling EFReadFile This procedure will read name ext and all of the ext files it refers to recursively until the entire tree rooted at name has been read and converted into an internal hierarchical representation EFReadFile may be called several times with different values of name any portions of the tree rooted at name that aren t already read in will be To build up the flat representation of a circuit read using EF ReadFile one should call EF FlatBuild The argument rootName gives the name of the cell which should have been read with EFReadFile above that is the root of the hierarchical circuit to be flattened After all subsequent processing of the flat design is complete the caller may call EF FlatDone to free the memory associated with the flattened circuit possibly in preparation for calling EF FlatBuild with a different rootName A different procedure is provided for visiting all of the structures of each type in the flattened circuit EFVisitCaps EFVisitFets EFVisitNodes and EFVisitResists Each takes two arguments a search pro cedure to apply to all structures visited and a ClientData field used to pass additional information to this search procedure EFVisitCaps visits each of the internodal capacitors in the flat circuit applying capProc to each Th
411. t display styles files each corresponding to a particular class of technologies and a class of displays The names of styles files reflect these classes each display styles file has a name of the form x y dstyle5 where x is the technology class given by the styletype line in the styles section of the technology file and y is the class of display Each display driver knows its display class the driver initialization routine sets an internal Magic variable with the display class to use Right now we have two display styles files mos 7bit dstyle5 and mos bw dstyle5 Both files contain enough different styles to handle a variety of MOS processes including both nMOS and CMOS hence the mos field Mos 7bit dstyle5 is designed for color displays with at least seven bits of color per pixel while mos bw dstyle5 is for black and white displays stipple pat terns are used instead of colors 3 Color Maps The display styles file tells how to modify pixels but this doesn t completely specify the color that will be displayed on the screen unless the screen is black and white For color displays the pixel values are used to index into a color map which contains the red green and blue intensity values to use for each pixel value The values for color maps are stored in color map files and can be edited using the color map editing window in Magic See cmap 5 for details on the format of color map files Each display styles file uses a separate
412. t files are stored on disk with a net extension which is added by Magic when it reads and writes files You can change the current netlist by clicking the current netlist button again Startup Magic on the cell tut7b open the netlist menu and set the current netlist to tut7b Then expand the subcells in tut7b so that you can see their terminals Button Action Left Select net using nearest terminal to cursor Toggle nearest terminal into or out of Right 8 current net Find nearest terminal join its net with the Middle current net Table II The actions of the mouse buttons when the terminal tool is in use Netlist editing is done with the netlist tool If you haven t already read Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing you should read it now up through Sec tion 2 1 Tutorial 3 explained how to change the current tool by using the space macro or by typing tool Switch tools to the netlist tool the cursor will appear as a thick square When the netlist tool is in use the left right and middle buttons invoke select tog gle and join operations respectively see Table II To see how they work move the cur sor over the terminal right4 in the top subcell of tut7b and click the left mouse button you may have to zoom in a bit to see the labels terminals are numbered in clockwise order right4 is the fourth terminal from the top on the right side This causes the net
413. tainer s Manual 4 September 19 1990 of planes or reducing the number of colors that other applica tions use When magic s colormap is being used other windows may change color possibly to some unusable combination such as black on black or white on white This problem can sometimes be ameliorated by changing the constants X_COLORMAP_BASE and X_COLORMAP_RESERVED in grX11lsu2 c a more complete description of what these con stants do is included in that file Values for these constants that are incompatible with your machine will sometimes generate Xerrors in XQueryColors Failure to prompt user for window position Whether or not the designer is prompted for a window s location is dependent on the window manager Certain window managers notably twm do not always do this 3 2 X10 Driver In general the Version 10 driver is less reliable than the X11 one If you have the choice you are better off running under X11 grX2 GrXSetCMap Failed to get color cells Magic gives this error when it can t get sufficient colors to run This can be caused by running Magic on a machine with an insufficient number of planes 8 planes are generally required to run a 7 bit dstyles file or by having too many colors already used by other applications Try using only black and white xterms xclocks etc and see if the problem goes away Couldn t get 7 planes allocating by color Certain X10 servers most notably the VaxstationII GPX allo
414. te dest 14 APS APS 4ALUD DCD AN 10 1 1 1 3 APS APS 4ALUD DCD AN 11 1 1 1 3 APS MR 3V2 R1 1P 23 0 6 0 8 J APS MR 3V6 R1 1P 62 0 3 0 4 J APS APS 4ALUD DCD 0 4 0 6 J APS APS 4ALUD DCD 1 0 4 0 6 J APS APS 4ALUD DCD 2 0 4 OPE 1G APS APS 4ALUD DCD 3 0 4 0 6 J APS APS 4ALUD DCD 4 0 7 0 8 J APS APS 4ALUD DCD 5 0 7 OB dy Although it is not good practice it is possible to omit the actual pin names from the location names and only give the path to the part the example above shows several cases where the final pin name is missing Since the timing verifier and simulator have the original SCALD netlist available they are usually able to use the signal name to determine the net and then use the part s path to identify which pin of the net is meant This is accurate when a net connects to at most one pin per part if it connects to more than one pin per part then there is ambiguity over which pin is meant Usually though this ambiguity results in only a small inaccuracy since the delay to different pins on the same part is usually similar Also if delay is capacitive the delay to all pins in a net will be the same anyway so there is no inaccuracy 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 DLYS 5 CAD Tool User s Manual DLYS 5 SEE ALSO ext2dlys 1 ext 5 sim 5 BUGS There should be some way to specify which pins are drivers and which are receivers in a net The ability to omit pin names is danger
415. te the binary representation of the flattened hierarchy by using the program presim To do this type presim tut11la sim tut11la rsm cad lib scmos150 prm nostack nodrops The third file is the parameter file used by presim for this circuit The convention at Stanford is to use the suffix rsm when naming the RSIM input file The file tutlla rsm can also be used as input for running RSIM alone 3 Using RSIM Re run Magic again to edit the cell tutila We ll first learn how to run RSIM in interactive mode under Magic To simulate the circuit of tutlla using IRSIM type the command rsim scmos150 prm tut11la sim To simulate the circuit of tut la using RSIM type the command rsim tut1la rsm You should see the RSIM header displayed followed by the standard RSIM prompt rsim gt or irsim gt depending on the simulator in place of the usual Magic prompt this means keyboard input is now directed to RSIM This mode is very similar to running RSIM alone one difference is that the user can escape RSIM and then return to Magic Also the mouse has no effect when RSIM is run interactively under Magic a se Magic Tutorial 11 Using IRSIM and RSIM with Magic September 19 1990 Only one instance of RSIM may be running at any time under Magic The simula tion running need not correspond to the Magic layout however as we shall see later they must correspond for the RSIM tool to work All commands typed to the RSIM prompt should be R
416. te the name for large nodes such as Vdd or GND Select the horizontal blue strip on top of the circuit and run getnode on this You ll find that this will take about six seconds for getnode to figure out that this is Vdd You can interrupt getnode by typing C control C and getnode will return the best name found so far There is no way to tell if this is an alias or the name RSIM expects unless getnode is allowed to complete To prevent these long name searches you can tell getnode to quit its search when certain names are encountered Type getnode abort Vdd Select the blue strip on top of the circuit and type getnode You ll notice that the name was found very quickly this time and getnode tells you it aborted the search of Vdd The name returned may be an alias instead of the the one RSIM expects In this example the abort option to getnode will abort the name search on any name found where the last component of the node name is Vdd That is getnode will stop if a name such as miasma crock Vdd or hooha Vdd is found You can abort the search on more than one name now type getnode abort GND Select the bottom horizontal blue strip in the layout and type getnode The search will end almost immediately since this node is GND getnode will now abort any node name search when either Vdd or GND is found The search can be aborted on any name just supply the name as an argument to getnode abort Remember that only the last part of
417. ted Here gateperim 4 srcperim 6 drainperim 10 By averaging srcperim and drainperim we get L W 2 8 c The L W of branching transis tors is not well approximated Here gateperim 16 srcperim 2 drainperim 2 Magic s estimate of L W is 8 2 whereas in fact because of current spreading W is effec tively larger than 2 and L effectively smaller than 8 so L W is overestimated extract no adjustment which will result in approximately 50 faster extraction This speedup is not entirely additive with the speedup resulting from extract no coupling To re enable computa tion of adjustments use extract do adjustment 5 4 Transistors Like the resistances of nodes the lengths and widths of transistors are approxi mated Magic computes the contribution to the total perimeter by each of the terminals of the transistor See Figure 5 For rectangular transistors this yields an exact L W For non branching non rectangular transistors it is still possible to approximate L W fairly well but substantial inaccuracies can be introduced if the channel of a transistor contains branches Since most transistors are rectangular however Magic s approximation works well in practice In addition to having gate source and drain terminals MOSFET transistors also have a substrate terminal By default this terminal is connected to a global node that depends on the transistor s type For example p channel transistors might have a sub
418. tes to the box may terminate on any active route layer If you are having trouble connecting to a large region it may be because the connection point or area is too far in the interior of the region Try moving it toward the edge Alternately see the discussion of the penetration parameter in the wizard section below 5 Hints Magic has three built in layers for graphical control of the Irouter fence f mag net mag and rotate r These layers can be painted and erased just like other Magic layers The effect each has on the Irouter is described below 5 1 The Fence Layer The Irouter won t cross fence boundaries Thus the fence layer is useful both for carving out routing regions and for blocking routing in given areas It is frequently use ful to indicate the broad path of one or a series of routes with fence In addition to guid ing the route the use of fences can greatly speed up the router by limiting the search 5 2 The Magnet Layer Magnets attract the route They can be used to pull routes in a given direction e g towards one edge of a channel Over use of magnets can make routing slow In particu lar magnets that are long and far away from the actual route can cause performance prob lems If you are having problems with magnets and performance see also the discus sion of the penalty parameter in the wizard section below 5 3 The Rotate Layer The Irouter associates different weights with horizontal and verti
419. th the uninstalled version of a module create another subdirectory identical to magic and modify the Makefile so that it uses uninstalled versions of the relevant modules For example the Magic team uses subdirectories hamachitest mayotest mhatest ouster test and wsstest that we use to test new versions of modules before installing them If you want to remake the entire system type make magic in the top level directory cad src magic One last thing there are some customizations you may want to make to Magic If magic core dumps it sends mail to somebody That somebody is set in the MAIL_COMMAND definition in the file misc niceabort c You may want to change it Also in the same file is CRASHDIR which says where core dumps should be placed Paths used by magic are located in misc paths h You shouldn t need to change them 4 Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers September 19 1990 though because the CAD_HOME shell environment variable controls what Magic uses for the location of cad 5 Summary of Magic Modules This section contains brief summaries of what is in each of the Magic source sub directories calma cif cmwind commands database dbwind debug dre ext2sim ext2spice extflat extract Contains code to read and write Calma Stream format files It uses many of the procedures in the cif module Contains code to process the CIF sections of technol
420. that would cause it to fail on more difficult examples However you can use the straighten command described in Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing to remove unnecessary jogs Please don t judge the router by its behavior on small examples On the other hand if it does awful things on big examples we d like to know about it All of the wires placed by the router are of the same width so the router won t be very useful for power and ground wiring When using the Magic router you can wire power and ground by hand before run ning the router The router will be able to work around your hand placed connections to make the connections in the netlist If there are certain key signals that you want to wire carefully by hand you can do this too the router will work around them Signals that you route by hand should not be in the netlist Tutorial7b has an example of hand routing in the form of a piece of metal in the middle of the circuit Undo the routing and try modifying the metal and or adding more hand routing of your own to see how it affects the routing The Magic router has a number of options useful for getting information about the routing and setting routing parameters You need to invoke the route command once for each option you want to specify then type route with no options to start up the router with whatever parameters you ve set The viamin option which invokes a routing post
421. that didn t have continuous checking read on You may also need to read this section if you ve changed the design rules in the technology file In order to find out about errors in a design that wasn t created with Magic you must force Magic to recheck everything in the design Once this global recheck has been done Magic will use its continuous checker to deal with any changes you make to the design you should only need to do the global recheck once To make the global recheck load your design place the box around the entire design and type dre check This will cause Magic to act as if the entire area under the box had just been modified it will recheck that entire area Furthermore it will work its way down through the hierar chy for every subcell found underneath the box it will recheck that subcell over the area of the box If you get nervous that a design rule violation might somehow have been missed you can use dre check to force any area to be rechecked at any time even for cells that were created with Magic However this should never be necessary unless you ve changed the design rules If the number of errors in the layout ever changes because of a dre check it is a bug in Magic and you should notify us immediately Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing John Ousterhout Computer Science Division Electrical Engineering and Computer Sciences University of California Berkeley CA 94720 Updated by others t
422. the login process from eating input destined for the CAD tool When sleeper is run it will print a message of the form tty is dev ttyname Here dev ttyname is the device name of the graphics terminal This is particularly useful when sleeper is run over the network or when using fsleeper 1 or rsleeper 1 Sleeper may be killed by sending it two QUIT signals within ten seconds of each other This is most easily done by typing two quit characters usually CTRL or CTRL SHIFT L in a row on the graphics terminal For sleeper to work best there should be an account named sleeper whose login shell is cad bin sleeper and with no password This enables users to log in as the user sleeper and is also necessary for the pro grams fsleeper 1 and rsleeper 1 to work Note that you will have to include the full pathname of cad bin sleeper in etc passwd the initial cad does not get expanded SEE ALSO fsleeper 1 magic 1 rsleeper 1 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 DQUEUE 3 CAD Tool User s Manual DQUEUE 3 NAME dqueue procedures for managing double ended queues in libmagicutils a SYNOPSIS include magic h include malloc h include dqueue h DQInit q capacity DQueue q int capacity DQFree q DQueue q DQPushFront q elem DQueue q ClientData elem DQPushRear q elem DQueue q ClientData elem ClientData DQPopFront q DQueue q ClientData DQPopRear q DQueue q DQChangeSize q ne
423. the diffusion areas on either side of the channel of the transistor The lines in the connect section of a technology file as shown in Table 8 each con tain a pair of type lists in the format described in Section 4 Each type in the first list connects to each type in the second list This does not imply that the types in the first list are themselves connected to each other or that the types in the second list are connected to each other Because connectivity is a symmetric relationship only one of the two possible ord ers of two tile types need be specified Tiles of the same type are always considered to be connected Contacts are treated specially they should be specified as connecting to material in all planes spanned by the contact For example pcontact is shown as con necting to several types in the active plane as well as several types in the metall plane The connectivity of a contact should usually be that of its component types so pcontact should connect to everything connected to poly and to everything connected to metall 13 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 cifoutput style lambda 1 0 gen scalefactor 100 layer CWN nwell bloat or pdiff pdc pfet 600 bloat or nsc nnd 300 grow 300 shrink 300 calma 42 1 layer CWP pwell bloat or ndiff ndc nfet 600 bloat or psc ppd 300 grow 300 shrink 300 calma 41 1 layer CMS allMetal2 labels m2 calma 51 1 layer CAA allDiff labels
424. the form tech techname If absent the technology defaults to a system wide standard currently nmos The next line is also optional and gives a timestamp for the cell The line is of the format timestamp stamp where stamp is a number of seconds since 00 00 GMT January 1 1970 i e the Unix time returned by the library function time It should be the last time this cell or any of its children changed The timestamp is used to detect when a child is edited outside the context of its parent the parent stores the last timestamp it saw for each of its children see below When this occurs the design rule checker must recheck the entire area of the child for subcell interaction errors If this field is omitted in a cell Magic supplies a default value that forces the rechecks Next come lines describing the contents of the cell There are three kinds of groups of lines describing mask rectangles subcell uses and labels Each group must appear contiguously in the file but the order between groups is arbitrary Each group of mask rectangles is headed with a line of the format lt lt layer gt gt where layer is a layername known in the current technology see the tech line above Each line after this header has the format rect xbot ybot xtop ytop where xbot ybot is the lower left corner of the rectangle in Magic lambda coordinates and xtop ytop is the upper right corner Degenerate rectangles are not allowed xbot must be
425. the module graphics o 3 Troubleshooting the X Drivers The following is a list of problems sometimes encountered in running Magic under X and some suggestions about how to get around the problem 3 1 X11 Driver Fonts Strange Color Effects We have tried to pick a set of fonts that most machines running X11 Revision 3 will have but there is nothing to guarantee that a given machine will have a font If you re getting unable to load font messages you will need to change the fonts that Magic uses The simplest way to do this is to specify them in your Xdefaults file as described in section 2 1 To change the default values that Magic uses change the fontnames array in the file grX1lsu3 c of the graphics module The program xlsfonts will tell you what fonts are available on your machine Magic often co exists rather uneasily with other X applications because it is picky about which colors it is allocated If possi ble it tries to allocate the colors it requires out of the display s default colormap because this perturbs other applications the least If this fails however Magic makes its own colormap When this colormap gets installed is a function of the window manager most window managers install it when the cursor is in the magic window Unfortunately there is no way to guarantee that the window manager installs the magic colormap correctly if you get erratic colormap behavior try using a lower number S92 Magic Main
426. the node name is still longer than 15 characters long again blame the fortran code it is translated to something like z 1234 and the equivalent name is output as a comment In addition since hspice supports scaling and multipliers so the output dimensions are in lambdas and if parallel fets are merged the hspice construct M is used Select the source drain area and perimeter extraction algorithm If hier is selected then the areas and perimeters are extracted only within each subcell For each fet in a subcell the area and perimeter of its source and drain within this subcell are output If two or more fets share a source drain node then the total area and perimeter will be output in only one of them and the other will have 0 If flat is selected the same rules apply only that the scope of search for area and perimeter is the whole netlist In general flat which 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 EXT2SPICE 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2SPICE 1 is the default will give accurate results it will take into account shared sources drains but hier is provided for backwards compatibility with version 6 4 5 On top of this selec tion you can individually control how a terminal of a specific fet will be extracted if you put a source drain attribute ext aph makes the extraction for that specific terminal hierarchical and ext apf makes the extraction flat see the magic tutorial about attaching attribute labels Additionaly to ease extraction of bip
427. the scmos technology file the pad contact is shown as connecting three layers metall metal2 and glass instead of just metali and metal2 as it used to with version 4 of Magic Each contact has an image tiletype on all the planes it connects Normally this means that Magic has to generate a new tiletype for all the planes of a contact other than its base plane In the first example this means that a new tile type will be generated to represent pcontact on the metall plane The type used to represent the contact on the active plane is pcontact itself Figure 1 depicts the situation graphically In later sec tions of the technology file it is sometimes useful to refer separately to the various images of contact A special notation using a is used for this If a tile type aaa bbb is specified in the technology file this refers to the image of contact aaa on plane bbb For example pcontact metall refers to the image of the pcontact that lies on the metal1 plane and pcontact active refers to the image on the active plane which is the same as pcontact Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 Sometimes however there is already an existing contact that has the required con nectivity to be an image of a new contact For example the pad type connects metall metal2 and glass Its home plane is metal2 which implies that we need images on the metall and oxide planes that have the required connectivity
428. the standard input such as a pipe M num This option is accepted by mpack but ignored It is a leftover from the tpack system D num num2 The Demo or Debug option This option will cause mpack to place only the first num tiles and the last num2 of those will be outlined with rectangular labels In addition if a tile called blotch is defined then a copy of it will be placed in the output tile upon each call to the align function during the placing of the last num2 tiles The blotch tile will be centered on the first point passed to align and usually consists of a small blotch of brightly colored paint This has the effect of marking the alignment points of tiles The last tile painted into is assumed to be the output tile EXAMPLE It is highly recommended that the example in cad sre mquilt be examined Look at both the template and the C code A more complex example is in cad src mpla FILES cad lib mpack h definition of the mpack interface cad lib mpack lib linkable mpack library cad lib mpack In lint library for lint cad src mquilt an example of an mpack program cad lib magic sys tech technology description files ALSO SEE magic CAD mquilt CAD mpla CAD Robert N Mayo Pictures with Parentheses Combining Graphics and Procedures in a VLSI Layout Tool Proceedings of the 20th Design Automation Conference June 1983 C Manual HISTORY This is a port of the tpack 1 system which generated Caesar file
429. ting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Commands covered in this tutorial calma cif Macros covered in this tutorial None 1 Basics CIF Caltech Intermediate Form and Calma Stream Format are standard layout description languages used to transfer mask level layouts between organizations and design tools This tutorial describes how Magic can be used to read and write files in CIF and Stream formats The version of CIF that Magic supports is CIF 2 0 it is the most popular layout language in the university design community The Calma format that Magic supports is GDS II Stream format version 3 0 corresponding to GDS II Release 5 1 This is probably the most popular layout description language for the industrial design community To write out a CIF file place the cursor over a layout window and type the com mand Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma September 19 1990 cif This will generate a CIF file called name cif where name is the name of the root cell in the window The CIF file will contain a description of the entire cell hierarchy in that window If you wish to use a name different from the root cell type the command cif write file This will store the CIF in file cif Start Magic up to edit tut9a and generate CIF for that cell The CIF file will be in ASCII format so you can use Unix commands like more and vi to see what it contains To
430. tion Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Commands covered in this tutorial iroute Macros covered in this tutorial Cntl R Cntl N 1 Introduction The Magic interactive router router provides an interactive interface to Magic s internal maze router It is intended as an aid to manual routing Routing is done one connection at a time the user specifying a starting point and destination areas prior to each connection The user determines the order in which signals are routed and how multi point nets are decomposed into point to area connections In addition parameters and special Magic hint layers permit the user to control the nature of the routes Typi cally the user determines the overall path of a connection and leaves the details of satis fying the design rules and detouring around or over minor obstacles to the router The interactive router is not designed for fully automatic routing interactions between nets are not considered and net decomposition is not automatic Thus netlists are generally not suitable input for the Irouter However it can be convenient to obtain endpoint information from netlists The Net2ir program uses netlist information to gen erate commands to the Irouter with appropriate endpoints for specified signals Typically a user might setup parameters and hints to river route a set of connections and then 1 Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Router September 19 1990 generate Irouter commands wit
431. tion is described in a dlys file which consists of a sequence of records one for each electrical net Each record begins with the signal name for the net note that this is the SCALD signal name i e the name given by the user to the entire net and not usually the name of one of the pins in the net followed by an then a comma separated list of the terminals in the net and their associated delay with the list terminated by a semicolon The end of the file is marked with a second semicolon The elements of the comma separated list for each net take the form location min max where location is the full hierarchical SCALD name of the physical pin to which the delay is computed and min and max are the best case and worst case wire delay in nanoseconds both are floating point numbers The assumption is that only a single driver exists per net so all delays are computed from this driver If a net has multiple drivers then the interpretation of delays is up to the program reading this file e g min delays are taken from the fastest driver max from the slowest Here is an example dlys file APS ALU STATUS BITS I1 lt 0 gt APS MR 3V6 R1 1P IN 63 0 3 0 4 APS APS 4RI RFC RF OUT 0 5 ORE APS ALU STATUS BITS I1 lt 1 gt APS APS 4ALUD DCD AN 12 1 4 1 6 APS APS 4ALUD DCD AN 8 1 1 1 3 APS APS 4ALUD DCD AN 9
432. tion size 12 bytes 0x11540 11 bytes at _foo 0x14 called from main 026 0x11556 14 bytes at _bar 0x50 called from _foo 0x36 called from main 0x26 0x11556 at _bar 0x40 called from _foo 0x36 called from main 0x26 malloc out SEE ALSO ACM SIGPLAN Notices Vol 17 No 5 May 1982 the article by Barach and Taenzer 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 PRLEAK 8 CAD Tool User s Manual PRLEAK 8 AUTHOR Walter Scott BUGS Local symbols beginning with in the backtrace output should be tagged with the source file to which they refer 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 vdmpc 8 CAD Tool User s Manual vdmpc 8 NAME vdmpc bitmap raster image filter for a Color Versatec 3000 series SYNTAX usr lib vdmpce x width y length n login h host acnt_file DESCRIPTION The vdmpc filter is a modification of the vdmp filter It works with color Versatec plotters such as the 3000 series Width is the width of the plotter in pixels taken from the px entry in etc printcap Length is the length of a 12 inch plot in pixels taken from the py entry in etc printcap 12 inches was chosen because older software uses the foot as the accounting unit for roll fed paper Vdmpce uses the vdmpce file format described in vdmpc 5 AUTHOR Modifications of original vdmp program by Bob Mayo SEE ALSO Ipr 1 vdmpce 5 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started John Ousterhout updat
433. ton zooms in by a factor of 2 Clicking the middle button here makes everything in the window visible and is equivalent to the view command 2 5 Saving Window Configurations After setting up a bunch of windows you may want to save the configuration for example you may be partial to a set of 3 non overlapping windows To do this type windowpositions filename A set of commands will be written to the file This file can be used with the source command to recreate the window configuration later However this only works well if you stay on the same kind of display if you create a file under X11 and then source it under SunView you might not get the same positions since the coordinate systems may vary 3 How Commands Work Inside of Windows Each window has a caption at the top Here is an example mychip EDITING shiftcell This indicates that the window contains the root cell mychip and that a subcell of it called shiftcell is being edited You may remember from the Tutorial 4 that at any given time Magic is editing exactly one cell If the edit cell is in another window then the caption on this window will read mychip NOT BEING EDITED Let s do an example to see how commands are executed within windows Close any layout windows that you may have on the screen and open two new windows each containing the cell tut5a Use the closewindow and openwindow tut5a commands to do this Try moving the box around in one of the w
434. ual 4 Using Magic Under X Windows X10 An X driver for X version 10 Currently not used much and being phased out XWIND Simply another name for either the X11 driver or the X10 driver This is normally set to refer to whichever driver is more popular at a given site This is here mostly for back ward compatibility reasons The following drivers are used on Suns when X is not available SUN60 A Sun Microsystems workstation model Sun3 60C May work for Sun4 60C also The Sun60 display is the same as a Sun110 display as far as Magic is concerned SUN110 A Sun Microsystems workstation model Sun3 110C color display You must be run ning Suntools This is virtually identical to the SUN160 display type below May also work for Sun4 110C 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 SUN160 A Sun 160 workstation with a single screen that has 8 bit planes of color You must be running Suntools in order for Magic to run with this option Also you can not resize or redisplay Magic windows while Magic is collecting a command since Magic is only one process Because Sun s window package doesn t do interrupt processing you can t interrupt Magic unless you point to its text window SUNBW A black amp white Sun workstation Because this system only has one bit plane Magic does extra redisplay whenever it erases the box or highlight areas Also it is hard to see all the layers since they are
435. ubstrate eg in a bootstraping charge pump To get the correct substrate info in these cases the fet s with separate wells should be in their own separate subcell with ext aph attributes attached to their sensitive terminals also all the transistors which share sensistive terminals with these should be in another subcell with the same attributes In addition all of the options of extcheck 1 are accepted SCALING AND UNITS If all of the ext files in the tree read by ext2sim have the same geometrical scale specified in the scale line in each ext file this scale is reflected through to the output resulting in substantially smaller sim files Otherwise the geometrical unit in the output sim file is a centimicron Resistance and capacitance are always output in ohms and femptofarads respectively SEE ALSO extcheck 1 ext2dlys 1 ext2spice 1 magic 1 rsim 1 ext 5 sim 5 AUTHOR BUGS Walter Scott additions fixes by Stefanos Sidiropoulos Transistor gate capacitance is typically not included in node capacitances as most analysis tools compute the gate capacitance directly from the gate area The c flag therefore provides a limit only on non gate capacitance The areas and perimeters of fet sources and drains work only with the simple extraction algorith and not with the extresis flow So you have to model them as linear capacitors create a special extraction style if you want to extract parasitic resistances
436. uch as foo bar 1 3 bletch in reverse order with the last component e g bletch first Pathnames sharing a common prefix can therefore be shared EFStrToHN is the fundamental procedure for creating HierNames it builds a path of HierNames from the string suffixStr and then leaves this path pointing to the prefix path prefix For example if prefix were the path of HierNames representing foo bar 1 3 and suffix were the string shift Vb1 the resulting HierName would be foo bar 1 3 shift Vb1 but only the shift Vb1 part would be newly allocated EFHNFree frees the memory allocated for the portions of the HierName path pointed to by hn between hn and prefix which should be the same as the prefix passed to EFStrToHN The type parameter is used only for measuring memory usage and should be zero EFHNToStr converts a HierName back into a string it returns a pointer to a statically allocated copy of the string representation of the HierName hn EFHNConcat is like EF StrToHN in that it concatenates a prefix and a suffix but the suffix passed to EFHNConcat has already been converted to a HierName EFHNConcat creates a copy of the HierName path suffix whose final element points to the prefix prefix in effect producing the concatenation of the two HierNames EFHNLook finds the HashEntry in the flat node hash table corresponding to the HierName that is the con catenation of the HierName prefix and the HierName formed from the suffix string suffixStr T
437. underneath the cursor is at the center of the window closewindow The window under the cursor is closed That area of the screen will now show other windows or the background echo n str str2 strN Prints str str2 strN in the text window separated by spaces and followed by a newline If the n switch is given no newline is output after the command grow Grows a window up to full screen size Typing the command again causes the window to shrink down to its former size and position help pattern Displays a synopsis of commands that apply to the window you are pointing to If pattern is given then only command descriptions containing the pattern are printed Pattern may contain and 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 22 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 characters which match a string of non blank characters or a single non blank character respectively logcommands file update If file is given all further commands are logged to that file If no arguments are given command logging is terminated If the keyword update is present commands are output to the file to cause the screen to be updated after each command when the command file is read back in macro char command Command is associated with char such that typing char on the keyboard is equivalent to typing followed by command If command is omitted the current macro for char is printed If char is also omitted then all current macr
438. use that check could also be masked by material of type t2 causing the touching_ok rule to be invoked TOUCHING_OK SPACING RULES DO NOT WORK FOR VERY LARGE SPACINGS RELATIVE TO THE TYPES INVOLVED SEE FIGURE 6 FOR AN EXPLANATION If the spacing to be checked is greater than the width of one of the types involved plus either its self spacing or spacing to a second involved type touching_ok spacing may not work properly a violation can be masked by an interven ing touching type In such cases the rule should be written using the edge4way construct described below The second flavor of spacing rule touching_illegal disallows adjacency Itis used for rules where types and types2 can never touch as in the following spacing pc allDiff 1 touching_illegal Poly contact must be 1 unit from diffusion MOSIS rule 5B 6 Pcontacts and any type of diffusion must be at least 1 unit apart they cannot touch In touching_ illegal rules types and types2 may not have any types in common it would be rather strange not to permit a type to touch itself In touching_illegal rules types and types2 may be spread across multiple planes Magic will find violations between material on different planes 11 3 Edge rules The width and spacing rules just described are actually translated by Magic into an underlying edge based rule format This underlying format can handle rules more gen eral than simple widths and spacings and is accessible to t
439. ution for debugging purposes SEE ALSO extcheck 1 ext2spice 1 magic 1 rsim 1 ext 5 sim 5 AUTHOR Stefanos Sidiropoulos BUGS The areas and perimeters of fet sources and drains work only with the simple extraction algorith and not with the extresis flow So you have to model them as linear capacitors create a special extraction style if you want to extract parasitic resistances with extresis 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXTCHECK 1 CAD Tool User s Manual EXTCHECK 1 NAME extcheck check hierarchical ext 5 files for global node connectivity and summarize number of fets nodes etc SYNOPSIS extcheck c cthresh p path r rthresh s sym value C R S symfile T tech root DESCRIPTION Extcheck will read an extracted circuit in the hierarchical ext 5 representation produced by Magic check to ensure that all global nodes those to which a label ending in an exclamantion point is attached are fully connected in the layout and then print a count of the number of various items nodes fets etc encountered while flattening the circuit The root of the tree to be processed is the file root ext it and all the files it references are recursively flattened The following options are recognized c cthresh Set the capacitance threshold to cthresh femtofarads Extcheck will count the number of explicit internodal capacitors greater than cthresh the number of
440. violations To make sure that the design rule checker verifies all the material that has been generated for a cell pro grams that generate mag files should place the following rectangle in each file lt lt checkpaint gt gt rect xbot ybot xtop ytop This rectangle may appear anywhere a list of rectangles is allowed immediately following the timestamp line at the beginning of a mag file is a good place The coordinates xbot etc should be large enough to completely cover anything in the cell and must surround all this material by at least one lambda Be care ful however not to make this area too ridiculously large For example if you use the maximum and minimum legal tile coordinates it will take the design rule checker an extremely long time to recheck the area SEE ALSO magic 1 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 3 NET 5 CAD Tool User s Manual NET 5 NAME net format of net files read written by Magic s netlist editor DESCRIPTION Netlist files are read and written by Magic s netlist editor in a very simple ASCII format The first line contains the characters Netlist File the leading blank is important After that comes a blank line and then the descriptions of one or more nets Each net contains one or more lines where each line contains a single terminal name The nets are separated by blank lines Any line that is blank or whose first character is blank is considered to be a separator line and the re
441. wSize DQueue q int newSize DQCopy dst src DQueue dst DQueue src bool DQIsEmpty q DQueue q DESCRIPTION These procedures manipulate double ended queues A double ended queue DQueue is a structure to which single word elements of type ClientData actually type char but intended to mean any one word type at all may be added to either end or removed from either end Callers should not reference fields of a DQueue directly but rather should use the following procedures DQInit initializes the DQueue q to have sufficient capacity to hold capacity entries at first If more than this many entries are pushed on the queue it automatically doubles its size at the cost of copying how ever so capacity should be treated as the expected number of entries on the queue rather than the max imum number DQFree frees the storage allocated by DQinit for the DQueue q DQPushFront and DQPushRear each place a new entry elem on the queue q DQPushFront places it on the front of the queue while DQPushRear places it on the rear If the current maximum size of the queue would be exceeded by either operation twice as much space is allocated automatically and the existing queue contents are copied to the bigger area DQPopFront and DQPopRear remove an element from respectively the front or rear of the DQueue g and return it If no elements are left they return NULL zero 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 1 DQUEUE 3 CAD Tool User
442. wever a transistor s resistance may vary depending on a number of variables so a single parame ter is generally insufficient to describe it The fetresist line allows sheet resistivities to be given for a variety of different configurations fetresist fettypes region R where fettypes is a comma separated list of transistor types as defined in fet lines below region is a string used to distinguish between resistance values for a fet if more than one is provided the special region value of linear is required for the resistance extractor and R is the on resistance of the transistor in ohms per square not milliohms there would otherwise be too many zeroes Magic also extracts internodal coupling capacitances as illustrated in Figure 10 The keywords overlap sidewall sideoverlap and sidehalo provide the parameters needed to do this Overlap capacitance is between pairs of tile types and is described by the overlap keyword as follows overlap toptypes bottomtypes cap shieldtypes where toptypes bottomtypes and optionally shieldtypes are type lists and cap is a capaci tance in attofarads per square lambda The extractor searches for tiles whose types are in toptypes that overlap tiles whose types are in bottomtypes and that belong to different electrical nodes The planes of toptypes and bottomtypes must be disjoint When such an overlap is found the capacitance to substrate of the node of the tile in foptypes is
443. while the paint in tut4a becomes dim If you want to edit an element of an array select the array place the cursor over the element you d like to edit then type edit The particular element underneath the cursor becomes the edit cell When you edit a cell you are editing the master definition of that cell This means that if the cell is used in several places in your design the edits will be reflected in all those places Try painting and erasing in the tut4x cell that you just made the edit cell Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 the modifications will appear in all of its instances There is a second way to change the edit cell This is the command sload name The load command loads a new hierarchy into the window underneath the cursor Name is the name of the root cell in the hierarchy If no name is given a new unnamed cell is loaded and you start editing from scratch The load command only changes the edit cell if there is not already an edit cell in another window 5 Subcell Usage Conventions Overlaps between cells are occasionally useful to share busses and control lines run ning along the edges However overlaps cause the analysis tools to work much harder than they would if there were no overlaps wherever cells overlap the tools have to com bine the information from the two separate cells Thus you shouldn t use overlaps any more than absolutely necessary For example suppose you want to creat
444. with extresis 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 2 EXT2SPICE 1 NAME CAD Tool User s Manual EXT2SPICE 1 ext2spice convert hierarchical ext 5 extracted circuit files to flat spice files SYNOPSIS ext2spice B extcheck options M m y num f hspice spice3 spice2 J hier flat j device sdRclass subRclass defaultSubstrate root DESCRIPTION Ext2spice will convert an extracted circuit from the hierarchical ext 5 representation produced by Magic to a flat spice file which can be accepted by spice2 spice3 hspice and other simulation tools The root of the tree to be extracted is the file root ext it and all the files it references are recursively flattened The result is a single flat representation of the circuit that is written to the file root spice The following options are recognized 0 outfile B tchar M m y num Instead of leaving output in the file root spice leave it in outfile Don t output transistor or node attributes in the spice file Usually the attributes of a node or a device are output as special comments fetattr and nodeatrr which can be processed further to create things such a initial conditions etc Don t output nodes that aren t connected to fets floating nodes Normally capacitance from these nodes is output with the comment FLOATING attached on the same line Trim characters from node names when writing the output file Char shou
445. with more complex rules and structures For example Magic permits only Manhattan designs those whose edges are vertical or horizontal Circuit designers tell us that our conservative design rules cost 5 10 in density We think that the density sacrifice is compensated for by reduced design time 2 How to Get Help and Report Problems There are several ways you can get help about Magic If you are trying to learn about the system you should start off with the Magic tutorials of which this is the first Each tutorial introduces a particular set of facilities in Magic There is also a set of 1 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started September 19 1990 Magic Tutorial 1 Getting Started Magic Tutorial 2 Basic Painting and Selection Magic Tutorial 3 Advanced Painting Wiring and Plowing Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies Magic Tutorial 5 Multiple Windows Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking Magic Tutorial 7 Netlists and Routing Magic Tutorial 8 Circuit Extraction Magic Tutorial 9 Format Conversion for CIF and Calma Magic Tutorial 10 The Interactive Route Magic Tutorial 11 Using RSIM with Magic Magic Maintainer s Manual 1 Hints for System Maintainers Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File Magic Maintainer s Manual 3 Display Styles Color Maps and Glyphs Magic Maintainer s Manual 4 Using Magic Under X Windows Magic Technology Manual 1 NMOS Magic Technology Manual 2 SCMOS
446. x and y coordinate to the route origin command the origin can be set to any other value This command is primarily useful when routing a chip that has been designed with routing on the same pitch as the router will use but where the left and bottom edges of the pre existing routing don t line up with the routing grid lines for example the pre existing routing might have been cen tered on routing grid lines The alternative to specifying a different origin for the rout ing grid would be to translate all the material in the cell to be routed so that the prewiring lined up properly with routing grid lines route settings Print the values of all router parameters route steady int Print the value of the channel router s steady net constant If a value is supplied set the steady net constant to the value The steady net constant measured in router grid units specifies how far beyond the next terminal the channel router should look for a conflicting terminal before deciding that a net is rising or falling Larger values mean 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 18 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 that the net rises and falls less often route tech Print the router technology information This includes information such as the names of the preferred and alternate routing layers their wire widths the router grid spacing and the contact size route viamin Minimize vias in previously routed netlist This subcommand removes
447. x the violation Continuous design rule checking means that you always have an up to date picture of design rule errors in your layout There is never any need to run a massive check over the whole design unless you change your design rules When you make small changes to an existing layout you will find out immediately if you ve introduced errors without 1 Magic Tutorial 6 Design Rule Checking September 19 1990 having to completely recheck the entire layout To see how the checker works run Magic on the cell tut6a This cell contains several areas of metal blue some of which are too close to each other or too narrow Try painting and erasing metal to make the error paint go away and re appear again 2 Getting Information about Errors In many cases the reason for a design rule violation will be obvious to you as soon as you see the error paint However Magic provides several commands for you to use to find violations and figure what s wrong in case it isn t obvious All of the design rule checking commands have the form dre option where option selects one of several commands understood by the design rule checker If you re not sure why error paint has suddenly appeared place the box around the error paint and invoke the command dre why This command will recheck the area underneath the box and print out the reasons for any violations that were found You can also use the macro y to do the same thing Try thi
448. y When there are interaction errors between the elements of an array the errors always appear near one of the four corner elements of the array since the array spacing is uniform Magic only checks interactions near the corners if these elements are correct all the ones in the middle must be correct too It s important to remember that each of the three overall rules must be satisfied independently This may sometimes result in errors where it doesn t seem like there should be any Edit the cell tut6c for some examples of this On the left side of the cell there is a sliver of paint in the parent that extends paint in a subcell Although the overall design is correct the sliver of paint in the parent is not correct by itself as required by the first overall rule above On the right side of tut6c is an array with spacing violations between the array elements Even though the paint in the parent masks some of the prob lems the array is not consistent by itself so errors are flagged The three overall rules are more conservative than strictly necessary but they reduce the amount of rechecking Magic must do For example the array rule allows Magic to deduce the correctness of an array by looking only at the corner elements if paint from the parent had to be con sidered in checking arrays it would be necessary to check the entire array since there might be parent paint masking some errors but not all as for example in tut6c Error paint
449. y command Because there is only a single search path that is used everywhere in Magic you must be careful not to re use the same cell name in different portions of the chip A com mon problem with large designs is that different designers use the same name for Magic Tutorial 4 Cell Hierarchies September 19 1990 different cells This works fine as long as the designers are working separately but when the two pieces of the design are put together using a search path a single copy of the cell the one that is found first in the search path gets used everywhere There s another caveat in the use of search paths Magic looks for system files in cad but sometimes it is helpful to put Magic s system files elsewhere If the CAD_HOME shell environment variable is set then Magic uses that as the location of cad instead of the location in the password file This overrides all uses of cad within magic including the cad seen in the search paths printed out by path 9 Additional Commands This section describes a few additional cell related commands that you may find useful One of them is the command select save file This command takes the selection and writes it to disk as a new Magic cell in the file filesmag You can use this command to break up a big file into smaller ones or to extract pieces from an existing cell The command dump cellName labelName does the opposite of select save it copies the contents of
450. y to river route across the tops of cells The channels must have been predefined using garoute channel commands prior to this command being invoked Unlike the route com mand where the box indicates the routing area this command ignores the box entirely The new wires are placed in the edit cell The netlist used is that selected by the route netlist command or the current netlist being edited in a netlist window if no route netlist command has been given Options and args have the following effects garoute channel type garoute channel xlo ylo xhi yhi type Define a channel If xlo ylo xhi and yhi are provided they are interpreted as the coordi nates of the lower left and upper right of the bounding box for the channel respectively 1990 DECWRL Livermore Magic 11 MAGIC 1 CAD Tool User s Manual MAGIC 1 Otherwise the coordinates of the box are used The boundary of each channel is adjusted inward to lie halfway between routing grid lines if it does not lie there already if the channel is adjusted a warning message is printed The channel defined is an ordi nary routing channel if type is not specified such channels are identical to those used by the router of the route command If type is given it must be either h or v The channel thereby created will be a river routing channel inside which only left to right routes are possible h or top to bottom v Unlike a normal channel a river routing ch
451. yers This is actually just an initial layer assignment for the labels Once a CIF cell has been read in Magic scans the label list and re assigns labels if necessary In the example of Table 10 if a label is attached to the CIF layer CPG then it will be assigned to the Magic layer poly However the polysilicon may actually be part of a poly metal contact which is Magic 21 Magic Maintainer s Manual 2 The Technology File September 19 1990 layer pcontact After all the mask information has been processed Magic checks the material underneath the layer and adjusts the label s layer to match that material pcon tact in this case This is the same as what would happen if a designer painted poly over an area attached a label to the material then painted pcontact over the area No hierarchical mask processing is done for CIF input Each cell is read in and its layers are processed independently from all other cells Magic assumes that there will not be any unpleasant interactions between cells as happens in CIF output and so far at least this seems to be a valid assumption If Magic encounters a CIF layer name that doesn t appear in any of the lines for the current CIF input style it issues a warning message and ignores the information associ ated with the layer If you would like Magic to ignore certain layers without issuing any warning messages insert a line of the form ignore cifLayers where cifLayers is a comma separate

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Arbres fruitiers nains  Explore & Crawl Learning Cub™  MCL ACC-F051 screen protector  JATA BT190 blender  PAGE COUVERTURE  Polaroid 4241-TLXB User's Manual  tims 400 user manual  取扱説明書  Artículo completo(PDF — 230 Kb)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file